FACULTY OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

M.St./M.Phil. English Course Details 2015-16 Further programnme information is available in the M.St./M.Phil. Handbook

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION TO THE… M.St. in English Literature (by period, English and American and World Literatures) 4 M.St. in English Language 6 M.Phil. in English (Medieval Studies) 8

STRAND SPECIFIC COURSE DESCRIPTIONS (A- and Hilary Term B- Courses) M.St. 650-1550/first year M.Phil. (including Michaelmas Term B-Course) 9 M.St. 1550-1700 18 M.St. 1700-1830 28 M.St. 1830-1914 35 M.St. 1900-present 38 M.St. English and American Studies 42 M. St. World Literatures in English 46 M.St. English Language (including Michaelmas Term B-Course) 51

B-COURSE, POST-1550 - MICHAELMAS TERM 62 Material Texts, 1550-1830 63 Material Texts, 1830-1914 65 Material Texts, Post-1900 66 Transcription Classes 71

C-COURSES - MICHAELMAS TERM You can select any C-Course The Age of Alfred 72 The Language of Middle English Literature 73 Older Scots Literature 74 Tragicomedy from the Greeks to Shakespeare 77 Documents of Theatre History 80 Romantic to Victorian: Wordsworth’s Writings 1787-1845 85 Literature in Brief 86 Women’s Poetry 1700-1830 89 Aestheticism, Decadence and the Fin de Siècle 91 Late Modernist Poetry in America and Britain 93 High Modernism at play: Modernists and Children’s Literature 94 Reading Emerson 95 Theories of World Literature 96 Legal Fictions: Law in Postcolonial and World Literature 99 Lexicography 101

2

C-COURSES - HILARY TERM You can select any C-Course The Anglo-Saxon Riddle Tradition 106 Old Norse Literature 113 Early Medieval Devotional and Pastoral Literature 114 Chaucer before the Tales 114 Life in Spencer and Shakespeare 115 Utopian Writing from More to Hume 117 Senses of Humour from Wordsworth to Eliot 119 Objects as Subjects in Eighteenth-Century Literature 126 Literatures of Empire and Nation 1870-1930 128 Comparative Criticism 130 Life Writing 132 American Fiction since 2000 133 The Humanitarian Novel 138 Sociolinguistics 139 The History of Written English: From Ye to Teh 143

3

INTRODUCTION TO THE M.ST. IN ENGLISH LITERATURE (BY PERIOD, AND ENGLISH AND AMERICAN) AND THE M.ST. IN WORLD LITERATURES IN ENGLISH

The course consists of four components, outlined briefly below; for further detail you should consult the strand-specific descriptions. The M.St./M.Phil. Handbook will be circulated before the beginning of term and will provide further important information needed once you begin your course.

A-Course: Literature, Contexts and Approaches (the core course)

For all strands other than Language and 650-1550 (for details of which please see pages 9 and 51), this will consist of 8 weeks of 2-hour classes, taught in Michaelmas Term. In every strand, attendance is compulsory. There is no formal assessment, but written work and/or oral presentations may be required.

A student-led all-day conference will be held in Trinity Term (usually in the fourth week) at which all students will give brief papers on topics arising from their dissertation work, and will receive feedback from the course convenor(s).

B-Course: Research Skills

The B-course is very highly recommended for those intending to continue to doctoral study, whether at Oxford or elsewhere, as it provides a thorough foundation in the skills needed to undertake research.

The B-Course for the 650-1550 strand is described in the ‘Strand Specific Course Descriptions’ section of this booklet.

Post-1550; English and American; World Literatures strands:

In Michaelmas, the B-Course is divided into three subcourses: 1550-1830, 1830-1914, and post- 1900, all of which are described in detail later in this booklet. Students should select the B- course that best fits the period-based or thematic strand of the M.St. into which they have been accepted.

Strand-specific classes on manuscript transcription and palaeography are taught in Michaelmas Term; formal assessment of this element of the B-Course takes the form of class tests. The assessment is pass/fail, and while students must pass in order to proceed with the course, scores on the test will not affect their final degree result. Further details about the examination of the B-Course are provided later in this booklet and in the M.St./M.Phil. Handbook.

In Hilary students take their strand’s specific B-Course, which is described in the ‘Strand-Specific Course Descriptions’ section of this booklet.

C-Course: Special Options

You can select any C-Course

These will be taught as 2-hour classes in weeks 1-6 of Michaelmas and Hilary Term. Students must choose EITHER: two of these options in each term if they are not taking the B-Course; OR one of these options in each term if they are taking the B-Course.

4

Students are asked to register their preferred Options by 14 September 2015 by email. If you are taking the B-Course you will need to list three preferences for each term. If you are not taking the B- Course you will need to list your top four preferences for each term.

The Faculty reserves the right not to run a Special Options C-Course if there are insufficient numbers enrolled or a tutor becomes unavailable due to unforeseen circumstances; please bear this in mind when selecting your options.

Remember that you can select any C-Course(s), depending on your interests and research plans.

Assessment

In Michaelmas Term candidates will be required to submit an essay of 5,000-7,000 words on a topic related to a C-Course studied in that term.

In Hilary Term, candidates will be required to submit 2 essays of 5,000-7,000 words, one on a topic related to the C-Course studied in that term, and another on a topic related either to the B-Course or to a C-Course option taken in that term.

Candidates must gain approval of the topic of their essays by writing to the Chair of the M.St. Examiners, care of the English Faculty Graduate Office. Details on approval of topics and timing of submission for all components are in the M.St. /M.Phil. Handbook.

Please note: If you wish to change any of your options, you must first contact the Graduate Studies Office who will seek approval from your convenor and the tutor for the course you wish to take. Requests for option changes for Hilary Term must be submitted by the end of week 4 of Michaelmas Term. If your request is received after this time you may be liable for a fee. Please note that undersubscribed Hilary Term C-Courses may be withdrawn before the start of Michaelmas term.

Dissertation

Each student will write a 10-11,000 word dissertation on a subject to be defined in consultation with the strand convenor(s), written under the supervision of a specialist in the Faculty, and submitted for examination at the end of Trinity Term.

5

INTRODUCTION TO THE M.ST. IN ENGLISH LANGUAGE

The course consists of four components, outlined briefly below; for further detail you should consult the strand-specific descriptions. The M.St./M.Phil Handbook will be circulated before the beginning of term and will provide further informationonce you have begun the course.

A-Course: Topics in English Language: History, Structure and Use This core course, taught through 6 weekly sessions in each of Michaelmas and Hilary Terms, provides a broad context in which to place the more specific inquiries students will pursue in their chosen optional courses. There is no formal assessment, but written work and/or oral presentations may be required.

B-Course: Research Methods for English Language The B-Course is taught in Michaelmas and Hilary Terms. In Michaelmas Term all students will follow a 6-week course, ‘Using corpora to investigate English Usage’. In Hilary Term students will work on their individual B-course projects and further sessions will be offered on research skills for dissertation writing.

The B-Course is assessed by an assignment applying corpus methods to English language data to investigate a question of your own choice (it may relate to the English of any historical period(s) for which suitable resources are available, and should be devised in consultation with B-Course tutors).

C-Course: Special Options These will be taught as 2-hour classes in weeks 1-6 of Michaelmas and Hilary Term. Students must choose one C option in each term. Candidates are asked to commit themselves by 14 September 2015 to a first and second choice for their option(s) for Michaelmas Term.

You can select your C-Courses from any strand of the English M.St, depending on your interests and research plans. You may also be able to choose an option from those offered as B-Courses for the M.St./M.Phil. in General Linguistics and Comparative Philology, although this is dependent on the agreement of the tutor and on whether you are able to fulfil the Linguistics Faculty’s requirements. If you are interested in Linguistics options please consult the M.St convenor at an early stage.

Assessment In Michaelmas Term candidates will be required to submit a piece of written work of 5,000-7,000 words on a topic related to one of the special options taken under C in that term.

In Hilary Term, candidates will be required to submit the following: 1. A piece of written work of 5,000-7,000 words on a topic related to one of C-Course options studied in that term, 2. A piece of written work of 5,000-7,000 words on a topic related to the B-Course.

‘Written work’ may refer to either an essay or a project involving the analysis of linguistic data. The B-course assignment must include data analysis; C-course assignments may take either form. Candidates must gain approval of the topic of their essays by writing to the Chairman of the M.St. Examiners, care of the English Faculty Graduate Office. Details on approval of topics and timing of submission for all components are found in the M.St/M.Phil. Handbook.

Please note: If you wish to change any of your options, approval must be sought from your convenor, the tutor for the course you wish to take, and your college. Requests for option changes for Hilary Term must be submitted by the end of Michaelmas Term week 4, if your request is received after this time you may be liable for a fee. Please note that undersubscribed Hilary term courses may be withdrawn before the start of Michaelmas term.

6

Dissertation Each student will write a 10-11,000 word dissertation on a subject to be defined in consultation with the strand convenor, written under the supervision of a specialist in the Faculty, and submitted for examination at the end of Trinity Term.

7

INTRODUCTION TO THE M.PHIL. IN ENGLISH (MEDIEVAL STUDIES)

In their first year candidates for the M.Phil. in English (Medieval Studies) follow the same course as the M.St. in English (650-1550) students. Provided they achieve a pass mark in the first-year assessments, students may proceed to the second year.

In the second year candidates must offer three of the following subjects and a dissertation:

1. The History of the Book in Britain before 1550 (Candidates will be required to transcribe from and comment on specimens written in English in a 1-hour examination)

2. Old English

3. The Literature of England after the Norman Conquest

4. The Medieval Drama

5. Religious Writing in the Later Middle Ages

6. Medieval Romance

7. Old Norse sagas

8. Old Norse poetry

9. Old Norse special topic (only to be taken by candidates offering either option 7 or 8, or both)

10./11. One or two of the C-Course special options as on offer in any strand, as specified by the M.St. English for the year concerned; candidates may not re-take any option for which they have been examined as part of their first year.

12./13./14./15. Relevant options offered by other Faculties as agreed with the Course Convenors. The teaching and assessment of these options will follow the provisions and requirements as set by the Faculty offering the option.

Second Year Assessment

Students will be required to submit an essay of 5,000-7,000 in Michaelmas Term or Hilary Term (depending on the term in which the course was offered).

Students will write a dissertation of no more than 15,000 words on a subject related to their subject of study. Candidates must gain approval of the topic of their essays by writing to the Chairman of the M.St./M.Phil. examiners, care of the English Graduate Studies Office.

Each candidate's choice of subjects shall require the approval the Chairman of the M.St./M.Phil. Examiners, care of the English Graduate Studies Office. Details on approval of topics and timing of submission for all components are found in the M.St. /M.Phil. Handbook.

Candidates are warned that they must avoid duplicating in their answers to one part of the examination material that they have used in another part of the examination, but the dissertation may incorporate work submitted for the first-year dissertation.

8

STRAND-SPECIFIC COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

M.ST. IN ENGLISH, 650-1550/FIRST YEAR M.PHIL. Course convenors: Professor Daniel Wakelin, St Hilda’s: [email protected] Dr Helen Barr, Lady Margaret Hall: [email protected]

This Outline describes the one-year M.St course, and also the first year of the two-year M.Phil course.

You must attend the A-Course in Michaelmas and Hilary Term, the appropriate B-Courses in Michaelmas and Hilary Term (should you choose to take it), and your chosen C-Courses in Michaelmas and Hilary Terms. The A-Course is not examined, but you will be asked to give a class presentation within it. From the B- and C-Courses you must, in due course, select three topics on which to be assessed. Two at least of these will be from your C-Course options. It is expected that any candidate wishing to proceed to doctoral study, whether at Oxford or elsewhere, would take the B- Course, unless s/he has compelling reasons not to do so. Any candidate uncertain on this issue should contact the convenors as a matter of urgency to discuss this matter prior to the commencement of the course. Also compulsory is the dissertation in Section D.

A-Course (Professor Vincent Gillespie and Dr Nick Perkins)

Michaelmas Term Programme This MSt A-Course is designed to give you an introduction to key works, textual witnesses, concepts, and critical debates in the 650–1550 period. In Michaelmas Term the topics will be covered in two-week sessions, with a primary focus each week on Old or Middle English, as set out below. You will be asked to read in advance some primary texts and secondary works and to think through particular questions and issues. You will be encouraged to suggest texts for discussion. The class may take the form of presentations from students with discussion to follow, and/or roundtable debate about key texts and ideas. The course will continue in Hilary Term with a focus on particular areas of analysis and debate, adapting to the needs and interests of the group. You are not expected to read everything on this list: details of the reading will be confirmed in conversation with the group as each term progresses. The key texts to use for preparation are the primary texts for each seminar. Other valuable preparation would be to familiarize yourself with some fundamental works that are influential for this period, if you have not encountered them already, eg.: Virgil, Aeneid; the Bible; Boethius, The Consolation of Philosophy; Beowulf; Egils Saga; Chaucer, Troilus and Criseyde and The Canterbury Tales; Thomas More, Utopia.

Michaelmas Term

Weeks 1-2 Anthology or Miscellany?

Week 1: The Exeter Book of Old English Poetry The main focus will be on what this manuscript, and the collection in it, can tell us about the composition, writing and reading of poetry in the Anglo-Saxon period.

Facsimiles: The Exeter Book of OE Poetry, ed. Chambers et al. (1933) The Electronic Exeter Anthology of Old English Poetry, ed. Muir and Kennedy (2006)

Editions of all the texts in the Exeter Book: The Exeter Book, ed. Krapp and Dobbie, Anglo-Saxon Poetic Records (ASPR) 3 (1936)

9

The Exeter Book, Part I, ed. Gollancz, Early English Text Society (EETS) original series (o.s.) 104 (1895), Part II, ed. Mackie, EETS o.s. 194 (1934) [with facing translation] The Exeter Anthology of OE Poetry, ed. B.J. Muir, 2nd rev. ed. (2000) Most of the poems are transl. in S.A.J. Bradley, Anglo-Saxon Poetry (1982, several reprints)

Edition of so-called elegies, several of them from the Exeter Book: Anne Klinck, The Old English Elegies: A Critical Edition and Genre Study (1992) [review by James R. Earl, Speculum 69 (1994): http://www.jstor.org/stable/2865658?seq=3 ]

Studies of the manuscript and its origins: Patrick Conner, Anglo-Saxon Exeter (1993), esp. ch. 6 [controversial thesis, mostly not accepted (eg. review by Gameson in Notes and Queries 42 (1995), and comments in Exeter Anthology, ed. Muir), but worth reading the arguments] Richard Gameson, ‘The origin of the Exeter Book of Old English Poetry’, Anglo-Saxon England (ASE) 25 (1996), 135–85 Katherine O’Brien O’Keeffe, Visible Song (1990), ch. 7 Carol Braun Pasternack, The Textuality of Old English Poetry (1995), esp. ch. 2 John C. Pope, ‘Palaeography and Poetry: Some Solved and Unsolved Problems of the Exeter Book’, in Medieval Scribes, Manuscripts, and Libraries, ed. Parkes and Watson (1978) Mary P. Richards, ed., Anglo-Saxon Manuscripts: Basic Readings (1994), esp. essays by Rumble, Robinson, Conner [reprints of influential or provocative essays] Kenneth Sisam, ‘The Exeter Book’, in his Studies in the History of OE Literature (1953)

On particular texts or groups of texts Riddles: J. Niles, Old English Enigmatic Poems and the Play of the Texts (2006); Fred C. Robinson, ‘Artful Ambiguities in the Old English “Book-Moth” Riddle’, in Anglo-Saxon Poetry: Essays in Appreciation for John C. McGalliard, ed. Nicholson and Frese (1975), pp 355–62; Nicholas Howe, ‘The Cultural Construction of Reading in Anglo-Saxon England’, in The Ethnography of Reading, ed. Boyarin (1993), pp. 58–79, repr. in Old English Literature: Critical Essays, ed. Liuzza (2002), pp. 1–22; Seth Lerer, ‘The Riddle and the Book: Exeter Book Riddle 42 in its Contexts’, Papers on Language and Literature 25 (1989), 3–18

Elegies: T.A. Shippey, Old English Verse (1972), ch. 3: ‘Wisdom and experience: the Old English elegies’; or Christine Fell, ‘Perceptions of transience’, in The Cambridge Companion to Old English Literature, ed. Godden and Lapidge (1991; new edn 2013); Robert E. Bjork, ‘Sundor æt Rune: The Voluntary Exile of The Wanderer’, Neophilologus 73 (1989), 119–29, repr. in Old English Literature, ed. Liuzza, pp. 315–27. See also Malcolm Godden, ‘Anglo-Saxons on the Mind’, in Learning and Literature in Anglo-Saxon England: Studies presented to Peter Clemoes, ed. Lapidge and Gneuss (1985), pp. 271-98; repr. in Old English Literature, ed. Liuzza, pp. 284–314; and Leslie Lockett, Anglo-Saxon Psychologies in the Vernacular and Latin Traditions (2011), esp. Introduction. Thomas Bredehoft, Authors, Audiences, and Old English Verse (2009); Peter Orton, The Transmission of Old English Verse (2002).

On monastic history generally: David Knowles, The Religious Orders in England, 3 vols (CUP, 1948–59); and various other books, incl. Medieval Religious Houses: England and Wales (Longman: rev. edn, 1971); The Culture of Medieval English Monasticism, ed. James G. Clark (Boydell Press, 2007); Jean Leclerq, The Love of Learning and the Desire for God (SPCK, 3rd edn, 1982); Sarah Foot, Monastic Life in Anglo-Saxon England, c. 600– 900 (CUP, 2006) 10

Week 2: British Library MS Harley 2253 and the Harley Lyrics Facsimile: N.R. Ker, Facsimile of British Museum MS. Harley 2253, EETS o.s. 255 (1965) See also the British Library page for this MS for some pictures and references

Editions: Wessex Parallel Web Texts electronic edn by Bella Millett of selected Harley Lyrics The Harley Lyrics: The Middle English Lyrics of MS. Harley 2253, ed. G.L. Brook (1956, 4th edn 1968) [standard edn of the English poems, though lacks the political lyrics] English Lyrics of the XIIIth Century, ed. Carleton Brown (1932) [incl. some Harley texts] The Political Songs of England from the Reign of John to that of Edward II, ed. Thomas Wright, Camden Society (1839) [incl. political lyrics from the Harley MS]

Studies: Studies in the Harley Manuscript, ed. Fein (2000), esp. Corrie, Revard, and Stemmler Carter Revard, ‘Oppositional Thematics and Metanarrative in MS Harley 2253, Quires 1-6’, Essays in Manuscript Geography, ed. Scase (2007), pp. 95–112 Susanna Fein, ‘Compilation and Purpose in MS Harley 2253’, in ibid., pp. 67–94 The Whole Book, ed. Nichols and Wenzel (1996) Yearbook of English Studies 33 (2003): special issue on miscellany/anthology Kathryn Kerby-Fulton et al., Opening Up Middle English Manuscripts (2012), pp. 45–55 J.A. Burrow, ‘Poems Without Contexts: the Rawlinson Lyrics’, Essays in Criticism 29 (1979), 6–32; repr. J.A. Burrow, Essays in Medieval Literature (1984: accessible in Oxford via Oxford Scholarship Online) [Not on Harley, but influential paradigm] Thorlac Turville-Petre, ‘Three Languages’, in his England the Nation: Language, Literature, and National Identity, 1290-1340 (1996) Jane Taylor, The Making of Poetry: Late Medieval French Poetic Anthologies (2007) J. Hines, Voices in the Past: English Literature and Archaeology (2004), ch. 3 Nicholas Watson, ‘The Politics of Middle English Writing’, in The Idea of the Vernacular, ed. Wogan- Browne et al. (1999) [on vernacularity] Jocelyn Wogan-Browne, ed., Language and Culture in Medieval Britain: The French of England c.1100– 1500 (2009) [multilingual context] The Oxford History of Literary Translation in English, vol. 1 [medieval], ed. Roger Ellis (2008)] Barbara Newman, Medieval Crossover: Reading the Secular against the Sacred (2013)

Week 3-4: Speech, Manuscript and Print

Week 3: Bede and Cædmon Facsimiles: The Leningrad Bede, ed O. Arngart, Early English MSS in Facsimile (EEMF) 2 (1952) The Moore Bede, ed P. Hunter Blair, EEMF 9 (1959) The Tanner Bede: the Old English version of Bede’s Historia Ecclesiastica, ed. J. Bately, EEMF 24 (1992) [Leningrad and Moore Bedes contain the Latin text, with Caedmon’s Hymn added in the margin or at the end; the Tanner Bede is the OE translation of Bede with Caedmon’s Hymn embedded in the text.]

11

Editions and translations: Bede’s Ecclesiastical History of the English People, ed./trans. Colgrave and Mynors (1969) [also transl. in Oxford World’s Classics and Penguin Classics] The Old English Version of Bede’s Ecclesiastical History of the English People, ed./trans. T.A. Miller, EETS o.s. 95–6 (1890–1) Caedmon’s Hymn: A Multi-Media Edition, ed. Daniel Paul O’Donnell (2005) [associated CD-ROM incl. facsimiles of the relevant pages from all the MSS] OE Bede’s story of Caedmon also in student readers, eg. Mitchell and Robinson, A Guide to Old English, or Treharne, An Anthology of Old and Middle English

Studies: George Molyneaux, ‘The Old English Bede: English Ideology or Christian Instruction?’, English Historical Review 124 (2009), 1289–1323 Kevin Kiernan, ‘Reading Cædmon’s Hymn with Someone Else’s Glosses‘, Representations 32 (1990); repr. in Old English Literature: Critical Essays, ed. Liuzza (2002) Seth Lerer, Literacy and Power in Anglo-Saxon Literature (1991), ch. 2 Francis P. Magoun, ‘Bede’s Story of Cædmon: the Case History of an Anglo-Saxon Oral Singer’, Speculum 30 (1955) [classic attempt to use early oral-formulaic theory on OE] Andy Orchard, ‘Poetic Inspiration and Prosaic Translation: The Making of Cædmon’s Hymn,’ in Studies in English Language and Literature: Doubt Wisely, ed. Toswell and Tyler (1996), pp. 402–22

Bede and history: classic article is Roger Ray, ‘Bede’s Vera Lex Historiae’, Speculum 55 (1980), 1–21. Influential but perhaps dated study by Peter Hunter Blair, The World of Bede (CUP: rev. edn, 1990). Recent Cambridge Companion to Bede worth checking. Often good things in the series of Jarrow Lectures, eg. Bede and his World: The Jarrow Lectures, 1958–1993 (Variorum, 1994), and search on SOLO for ongoing Jarrow Lectures, published as pamphlets, eg. N.J. Higham, ‘Bede as an Oral Historian’ (2011).

Approaches to orality and literacy: Oral Tradition 24:2 (2009); incl. essays by Jones, Orchard Andy Orchard, ‘Oral Tradition’, in Reading Old English Texts, ed. O’Brien O’Keeffe (1997), pp. 101–23 Ruth Finnegan, Oral Poetry (1992) Katherine O’Brien O’Keeffe, Visible Song (1990), ch. 2 Brian Stock, The Implications of Literacy: Written Language and Models of Interpretation in the Eleventh and Twelfth Centuries (1987) [on later period but important ideas] M.T. Clanchy, From Memory to Written Record: England 1066-1307 (1979; 2nd edn 1993; 3rd edn 2012). [If possible, read Clanchy’s updated postscript to 2012 edn] Nicholas Perkins, ‘Writing, Authority, and Bureaucracy’, in The Oxford Handbook of Medieval Literature in English, ed. Treharne and Walker (2010), pp. 68–89

Week 4: Malory’s Morte Darthur: the Winchester Manuscript and early print editions Facsimiles: Facsimile of the Winchester Manuscript: ed. N. Ker, EETS s.s. 4 (1976) Facsimile of Caxton’s print: Le Morte D’Arthur, intro. Paul Needham (1976); also on Early English Books Online, along with Wynkyn de Worde’s 1498 print See also Digital Malory Project for pages from the Winchester MS and Caxton’s edn

12

Editions: Le Morte Darthur, ed. P.J.C. Field, 2 vols (2013); previous standard text is Malory’s Works, ed. E. Vinaver, 3 vols (1973, rev. Field, 1990); also convenient 1-vol. edn by Vinaver (1971): mainly from Winchester MS, but sometimes collates with Caxton, and indicates Caxton’s book divisions. 2-vol. modern spelling Penguin edition by J. Cowen (1969) based on Caxton. Norton Critical Edition by S.H.A. Shepherd (2004) is based on the MS and attempts to reproduce its rubrication; also has. useful sources and contextual material.

Studies: Joyce Coleman, ‘Reading Malory in the Fifteenth Century: Aural Reception and Performance Dynamics’, Arthuriana 13 (2003), 48–70 Helen Cooper, ‘Opening up the Malory Manuscript’, in The Malory Debate: Essays on the Texts of Le Morte Darthur (2000), ed. Wheeler et al. (2000) [see other essays too] D. Thomas Hanks, ‘Textual Harassment: Caxton, de Worde, and Malory’s Morte Darthur’, in Re-viewing Le Morte Darthur, ed. Whetter and Radulescu (2005) A Companion to Malory, ed. Archibald and Edwards (1996) [starting point for Malory] Takako Kato, Caxton’s ‘Morte D’Arthur’: The Printing Process and the Authenticity of the Text (2002) Andrew Taylor, ‘Into his Secret Chamber: Reading and Privacy in Late Medieval England’, in The Practice and Representation of Reading in England, ed. Raven et al. (1996), pp. 41–61 Julia Boffey, Manuscript and Print in London, c.1475–1530 (2012) Beryl Smalley, Historians in the Middle Ages (1974). Also Antonia Gransden’s work, which is still important. On different/changing understandings of truth and Middle English trawthe, see Richard Firth Green, A Crisis of Truth (1999) On the problematic idea of ‘character’ esp. in romance, see Tony (A.C.) Spearing, Textual Subjectivity (2005). Also much earlier than this, the work of Derek Brewer, eg. Symbolic Stories (repr. Longman, 1988) and Jill Mann, eg. the short, brilliant essay ‘Malory: Knightly Combat in Le Morte D’Arthur’, in Medieval Literature, part one: Chaucer and the Alliterative Tradition, ed. Boris Ford, New Pelican Guide to English Literature (Penguin, 1982).

Weeks 5-6 Authors, Texts and Audiences

Week 5: Authorship and revising the text: Wulfstan’s Sermo Lupi ad Anglos Texts: Ælfric’s Prefaces, ed. Jonathan Wilcox (1994) Wulfstan, Sermo Lupi ad Anglos, ed. Dorothy Whitelock (1939, rev. 1976); The Homilies of Wulfstan, ed. Bethurum (1957) [three versions of Sermo Lupi, as Homly 20]; A Wulfstan Manuscript, ed. Loyn, EEMF 17 (1971) [MS Cotton Nero A. I]; translated eg. in Whitelock, EHD I; Swanton, A-S Prose; parallel text edition in Treharne, Old and Middle English

Studies: Ananya Jahanara Kabir, ‘Anglo-Saxon Textual Attitudes’, in The Cambridge History of Literary Criticism 2. The Middle Ages, ed. Minnis and Johnson (2005), pp. 310–23 Stephanie Dien, ‘Sermo Lupi ad Anglos: the order and date of the three versions’, Neuphilologische Mitteilungen 64 (1975), 561–70 Stephanie Hollis, ‘The Thematic Structure of the Sermo Lupi’, ASE 6 (1977), 175–95; repr. in Old English Literature: Critical Essays, ed. Liuzza (2002), pp. 182–203 Andy Orchard, ‘Crying Wolf: Oral Style and the Sermones Lupi’, Anglo-Saxon England 21 (1992), 239–64

13

Wulfstan, Archbishop of York: The proceedings of the Second Alcuin Conference, ed. Townend (2004)

Week 6: Author(s) and audience(s): Ancrene Wisse Texts: Ancrene Wisse, ed. Bella Millett, EETS o.s. 325–6 (2005–6). Separate editions of individual manuscript versions of AW in EETS vols 216, 219, 225, 229, 232, 249, 252, 267, 310. Also ed. Robert Hasentratz (2000); Parts 6 and 7 ed. G. Shepherd (rev.1985). Parts 7 and 8 ed. and with translation by B. Millett and J. Wogan-Browne in Medieval English Prose for Women (1990). Translations by Millett (2009); Savage and Watson (1991); White (1993). Facsimile of CCCC 402 in Parker Library on the Web; and of the Vernon MS text either from The Vernon Manuscript, ed. Doyle (1987), or A Facsimile Edition of the Vernon Manuscript, ed. Scase et al. (2011). Editorial material and images also at http://tei.oucs.ox.ac.uk/Projects/EETS/soton/

Studies: Christopher Cannon, The Grounds of English Literature (2007), ch. 5 A.S.G. Edwards, ‘The Middle English Manuscripts and Early Readers of Ancrene Wisse’, in A Companion to ‘Ancrene Wisse’, ed. Wada (2003) Linda Georgianna, The Solitary Self: Individuality in the ‘Ancrene Wisse’ (1981) Bella Millett, ‘Mouvance and the Medieval Author: Re-editing Ancrene Wisse’, in Late-Medieval Religious Texts and their Transmission, ed. Minnis (1991), pp. 9–20 Bella Millett, ‘ “He speaks to me as if I was a public meeting”: Rhetoric and Audience in the Works of the Ancrene Wisse Group’, in Rhetoric of the Anchorhold, ed. McAvoy (2008), pp. 50–65 Elizabeth Robertson, Early English Devotional Prose and the Female Audience (1990)

Hilary Term Programme In Hilary Term we shall focus on different methodological or theoretical questions and approaches and how they inform our reading of medieval texts. The reading listed below will be adapted according to the group’s interests and ideas.

Week 1: Literary Language and Form Texts to include passages from: Beowulf Sir Gawain and the Green Knight and Pearl The Canterbury Tales

Initial Studies: Daniel Donoghue, ‘Language matters’, in Reading OE Texts, ed. O’Brien O’Keeffe (1997) Fred C. Robinson, ‘Beowulf’ and the Appositive Style (1985) Malcolm Godden, ‘Literary Language’ in The Cambridge History of the English Language Volume I, ed. Hogg, (1992), pp. 490–535 A Beowulf Handbook, ed. Bjork and Niles (1997), chs 4, 5 and 6 Andy Orchard, A Critical Companion to ‘Beowulf’ (2003), ch. 3 G.A. Lester, The Language of Old and Middle English Poetry (1996) N.F. Blake, ‘The Literary Language’ in The Cambridge History of the English Language Volume II, ed. Blake (1992), pp. 500–41 D. Vance Smith, ‘Medieval Forma: The Logic of the Work’, in Reading for Form, ed. Wolfson and Brown (2006)

14

David Burnley, The Language of Chaucer (1989), chs 7 and 8. Christopher Cannon, ‘Chaucer’s Style’, in The Cambridge Companion to Chaucer, ed. Boitani and Mann (2nd edn, 2003), pp. 233–50 Robert O. Payne, The Key of Remembrance: A Study of Chaucer’s Poetics (1963) C. David Benson, Chaucer’s Drama of Style (1986) W.A. Davenport, The Art of the ‘Gawain’-Poet (1978) J.J. Anderson, Language and Imagination in the ‘Gawain’-poems (2005) The Chaucer Review 47 (2013); special issue on manuscripts; form; aesthetics

Week 2: Genres Texts: The Dream of the Rood Deor Sir Isumbras Chaucer, The Nun’s Priest’s Tale

Initial Studies: John Frow, Genre (2006) Ardis Butterfield, ‘Medieval Genres and Modern Genre-Theory’, Paragraph 13 (1990), 184–201 Carol Braun Pasternack, ‘Stylistic Disjunctions in The Dream of the Rood’, ASE 13 (1984), 167–86, repr. in Old English Literature: Critical Essays, ed. Liuzza. (2002) A.C. Spearing, Readings in Medieval Poetry (1987), ch. 3 Folklore Genres, ed. Ben-Amos (1976) Paul Strohm, ‘Storie, Spelle, Geste, Romaunce, Tragedie: Generic Distinctions in the Middle English Troy Narratives’, Speculum 46 (1971), 348–59 Barbara Newman, Medieval Crossover: Reading the Secular against the Sacred (2013), ch. 1 Melissa Furrow, Expectations of Romance: The Reception of a Genre in Medieval England (2009)

Week 3: History and Historicisms Texts: Beowulf Ælfric, Life of St Edmund Chaucer, ‘Lak of Stedfastnesse’ Selected poems by Thomas Wyatt

Initial studies: J.G.A. Pocock, ‘Texts as Events’, in The Politics of Discourse, ed. Zwicker and Sharpe (1987), pp. 21–34 Roberta Frank, ‘The Beowulf Poet’s Sense of History’, in The Wisdom of Poetry, ed. Benson and Wenzel (1982), repr. in Heaney, Beowulf (2002) Fred C. Robinson, ‘The Tomb of Beowulf’, in his The Tomb of Beowulf and other Essays on Old English (1993), pp. 3–19, repr. in Heaney, Beowulf (2002) Renée R. Trilling, The Aesthetics of Nostalgia: Historical Representation in Old English Verse (2009), ch. 1 R.M. Liuzza, ‘Beowulf: Monuments, Memory, History’, in Readings in Medieval Texts, ed. Treharne and Johnson (2005), pp. 91–108 Paul Strohm, ‘The Textual Environment of Chaucer’s ‘Lak of Stedfastnesse’, in his Hochon’s Arrow (1992) Kenneth Muir, Life and Letters of Sir Thomas Wyatt (1963) Susan Brigden, Thomas Wyatt: The Heart’s Forest (2012) John Stevens, Music and Poetry in the Early Tudor Court (1961), chs 9–10

15

Chris Stamatakis, Sir Thomas Wyatt and the Rhetoric of Rewriting: ‘Turning the Word’ (2012), Prologue Maura Nolan, ‘Historicism after Historicism’, in The Post-Historical Middle Ages, ed. Scala and Federico (2009); see also the Introduction to this book

Week 4: Reading and hermeneutics Texts: Ælfric, Preface to Genesis Selected Exeter Book riddles Chaucer, The Clerk’s Tale; The Parliament of Fowls Extracts from The Romance of the Rose and ME Romaunt of the Rose; plus Rose debate material from Debating the ‘Roman de la Rose’: A Critical Anthology, ed. McWebb and Richards (2007, repr. 2011), and/or The Debate of ‘The Romance of the Rose’, ed./trans. David F. Hult (2010)

Initial Studies: Mark Griffith, ‘Ælfric’s Preface to Genesis: Genre, Rhetoric and the Origins of the ars dictaminis’, ASE 29 (2000), 215–34 See reading on riddles from Michaelmas Term, week 1 Ruth Evans et al., ‘The Notion of Vernacular Theory’, in The Idea of the Vernacular: An Anthology of Middle English Literary Theory, 1280–1520 (1999) David Wallace, Chaucerian Polity (1997), ch. 10 Alastair Minnis, Magister Amoris: The ‘Roman de la Rose’ and Vernacular Hermeneutics (2001), ch. 2 A.C. Spearing, The Medieval Poet as Voyeur (1993), ch. 10, ‘The Romaunt of the Rose’ Carolyn Dinshaw, Chaucer’s Sexual Poetics (1989), esp. Introduction Rita Copeland, Rhetoric, Hermeneutics, and Translation in the Middle Ages (1991), ch. 7

Week 5: Narrative and intertext Texts: Beowulf and its Scandinavian contexts [cf. G.N. Garmonsway and J. Simpson, ‘Beowulf’ and its Analogues (1968, repr. 1980)] Orpheus narratives, incl. Middle English Orfeo; Henryson, Orpheus and Eurydice; passages from versions of Ovid and Boethius

Initial Studies: Robert E. Bjork and John D. Niles, ed, A ‘Beowulf’ Handbook (1996), chs 7, 8, 10, 11 Andy Orchard, A Critical Companion to ‘Beowulf’ (2003), chs 3–4 J.R.R. Tolkien, ‘Beowulf: The Monsters and the Critics’, PBA 22 (1936), 245–95; repr. Seamus Heaney, Beowulf: A New Verse Translation, ed. Donoghue, Norton Critical Edn (2002) John Leyerle, ‘The Interlace Structure of Beowulf’, University of Toronto Quarterly 37 (1967), 1–17; repr. in Heaney, Beowulf (2002) Reading OE Texts, ed. O’Brien O’Keeffe (1997): essays by Lapidge and Scragg Magnús Fjalldal, ‘Beowulf and the Old Norse Two-Troll Analogues’, Neophilogus 97 (2013), 541–53 John B. Friedman, Orpheus in the Middle Ages (1970) Seth Lerer, ‘Artifice and Artistry in Sir Orfeo’, Speculum 60 (1985), 92–109 R.M. Liuzza, ‘Sir Orfeo: Sources, Traditions, and the Poetics of Performance’, JMRS 21 (1991), 269–84 Roland Barthes, ‘From Work to Text’, in his Image, Music, Text (1977)

16

Week 6: Current debates A discussion of critical debates in our field and how it is being shaped. Reading to be agreed during Hilary Term. B-Course:

This course is intended to develop the scholarly skills essential for work in the medieval period and to introduce ways of thinking about English language and literature in relation to their material form and survival in manuscripts and early printed books. Candidates intending to apply for permission to proceed to doctoral work in the Faculty of English are required to attend this course, and to be assessed on it. MPhil. candidates will also find this course a valuable training in basic research methods and disciplines.

Course in Transcription, Palaeography, Codicology and the History of the Book

This course will be taught by Daniel Wakelin. The classes on transcription, palaeography, codicology and the history of the book will meet thrice weekly at 9.00 a.m. across weeks 2-7 of Michaelmas and weeks 1-6 of Hilary terms. There will also be a ‘study day’ on textual editing early in week 7 of Michaelmas. (This day will only be compulsory for students from the MSt. in English 650-1550.) There will also be optional visits to the Bodleian for ‘hands on’ classes with manuscripts.

The course will be examined by a short examination in transcription and palaeography in week 8 of Hilary term and then by a coursework essay or editing project submitted a couple of weeks after the end of Hilary term. The transcription test will have passages in Old English, earlier Middle English (1100-1350), later Middle English (1350-1550) and medieval Latin, of which four, students will have to transcribe and date any two. The coursework should show expertise in any aspect of the history of the book or textual transmission; it should be an essay or, if one wishes, an edition of a text. While the classes will focus on scripts, manuscripts and texts from or circulating in Great Britain in English, there will be a Latin passage as an optional question on the transcription test, and it will be permissible to focus the coursework on materials in any language from the British Isles.

There is no set book to buy; however, closer to the test many students find Jane Roberts, A Guide to Scripts Used in English Writings up to 1500 (The British Library, 2005), to be useful for private study in transcription and palaeography, and as a reference book thereafter. Those who would value a brief introduction to manuscript studies and their connections to literary, historical and art-historical scholarship might find interesting Gale R. Owen-Crocker, ed., Working with Anglo-Saxon Manuscripts (Exeter UP, 2009), and Kathryn Kerby-Fulton, Maidie Hilmo and Linda Olson, Opening Up Middle English Manuscripts (Cornell UP, 2012).

The course will not assume prior knowledge of manuscript studies. Instead, useful preliminary work is to practise reading works in Old English and/or Middle English, as best suit one’s interests, in the original languages and spelling. For convenience and variety of sources, it can be helpful to begin with anthologies such as Bruce Mitchell and Fred C. Robinson, ed., A Guide to Old English, 8th edn (Wiley-Blackwell, 2011), J.A. Burrow and Thorlac Turville-Petre, ed., A Book of Middle English, 3rd edn (Wiley-Blackwell, 2013) or R.D. Fulk, ed., An Introduction to Middle English (Broadview, 2012). You need some familiarity with the ‘look’ of these languages – likely spellings, likely words, likely content – as a preliminary to transcribing manuscripts in them. Students are welcome to e-mail Daniel Wakelin on [email protected] for suggestions to suit their level of previous experience.

17

M.ST. IN ENGLISH LITERATURE, 1550-1700 Convenors: Professor Peter McCullough, Lincoln College: [email protected] Dr Emma Smith, Hertford College: [email protected]

The class meets on Tuesdays, 11.00am-1pm, in Seminar Room A, St Cross Building

This course examines some key moments in the literary, cultural and political history of our period, showing means of exploring them in depth and ways in which they raise larger themes in current criticism. Naturally no such course can be comprehensive and we recognize that you will have widely varying backgrounds in the period; this course aims to help you to deepen your understanding and to orient you in the resources that will be necessary for your dissertation research. Through a close analysis of the texts’ language and genre and their contemporary production and reception, we shall show how they helped to shape, rather than just reflect, their culture and opened up new imaginative spaces. You should try to get as much reading as possible done in advance: the term is short and the summer is the time to get reading done, especially of long works like the Arcadia. Feel free to email the course convenors, Peter McCullough and Emma Smith, for advice.

Each of you will be asked to present a brief position paper during one of the classes, with the aim of directing part of the discussion. These will be handed in for feedback but will not form part of your course assessment. We shall meet in the week before term begins to fix presentations for each week.

Week 1: Humanism, Courts, and Reformation (Dr Helen Moore) Thomas More, Utopia. Many modern translations are available but you are pointed towards the 1551 version by Ralph Robinson, reprinted in Three Early Modern Utopias, ed. Susan Bruce (Oxford University Press, 1999). There are parallel-text Latin (1516) and English versions: Edward Surtz, S.J., and J. H. Hexter, eds. Utopia, vol. 4 of The Yale Edition of the Complete Works of St. Thomas More (Yale University Press, 1965) and Thomas More, Utopia: Latin Text and English Translation, ed. George M. Logan, Robert M. Adams, and Clarence H. Miller (Cambridge University Press, 1995). David Weil Baker, Divulging Utopia: Radical Humanism in Sixteenth-Century England (Amherst, 1999), ch. 4. Clare Carroll, ‘Humanism and English Literature in the Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries’, in Jill Kraye (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Renaissance Humanism (Cambridge, 1996), pp. 246-68. Terence Cave (ed.), Thomas More's Utopia in Early Modern Europe: Paratexts and Contexts (Manchester, 2009). Brian Cummings, The Literary Culture of the Reformation: Grammar and Grace (Oxford, 2002). Stephen Greenblatt, Renaissance Self-Fashioning from More to Milton (Chicago and London, 1980), chapter 1. Arthur F. Kinney, Humanist Poetics: Thought, Rhetoric, and Fiction in Sixteenth-Century England (Amherst, 1986), ch. 2. Diarmaid MacCulloch, Tudor Church Militant: Edward VI and the Protestant Reformation (London, 2000), chs. 1-2. Quentin Skinner, review of Surtz’s edition of the Utopia, Past and Present, no. 38 (Dec. 1967), pp. 153-168: a classic statement of a new model of intellectual history.

Week 2: The Poetics of Fiction (Dr Helen Moore)

18

Sir Philip Sidney, The Countess of Pembroke's Arcadia, ed. Maurice Evans (Harmondsworth, 1987). This title, confusingly, has been given to three different texts – the initial five-‘act’ version (Old Arcadia); the unfinished revised version, published in 1590 (New Arcadia); and the compound version of the two published in 1593 which is the Evans edition above. You should also read the Defence of Poetry, which is available in Sidney’s The Defence of Poesy and Selected Renaissance Literary Criticism, ed. Gavin Alexander (Penguin, 2004); in Miscellaneous Prose of Sir Philip Sidney, ed. Katherine Duncan-Jones and Jan van Dorsten (Oxford, 1973); and in An apology for poetry, or, The defence of poesy, ed. Geoffrey Shepherd, 3rd edition, ed. R.W. Maslen (Manchester, 2002). Arthur F. Kinney, Humanist Poetics: Thought, Rhetoric, and Fiction in Sixteenth-Century England (Amherst, 1986), ch. 7.

Week 3: Drama on stage and page (Dr Emma Smith) Shakespeare, Hamlet. Please compare the play in the complete works Oxford edition edited by Stanley Wells and Gary Taylor, with the 2-volume Arden 3 text edited by Ann Thompson and Neil Taylor. Look at the Enfolded Hamlet (hamletworks.net) as well as the two quartos and the Folio text in a facsimile or online (http://www.bl.uk/treasures/shakespeare/homepage.html and http://firstfolio.bodleian.ox.ac.uk and http://quartos.org). Bring along any examples of any other noteworthy textual interventions you find.

Lukas Erne, Shakespeare as Literary Dramatist (2nd ed, 2013): read the introduction and chapters 8 and 9 on Hamlet. Zachary Lesser and Peter Stallybrass, ‘The First Literary Hamlet and the commonplacing of professional plays’, Shakespeare Quarterly 59 (via JSTOR) (2008) Zachary Lesser, Hamlet after Q1: An Uncanny History of the Shakespearean Text (2014) Kirk Melnikoff, ‘Nicholas Ling’s Republican Hamlet (1603)’ in Shakespeare’s Stationers: Studies in Cultural Bibliography ed Maria Straznicky (2012) Emma Smith, ‘To Buy or Not to Buy: Hamlet and Consumer Culture’, Shakespeare Studies 2012 Andrew Sofer ‘Dropping the Subject: the skull on the Jacobean Stage’ in his The Stage Life of Props Tiffany Stern, ‘Sermons, Plays and Note-Takers: Hamlet Q1 as a “Noted” Text’, Shakespeare Survey, 66 W.B. Worthen, Shakespeare and the Authority of Performance chapter 1 (1997) You might be interested to look at the essays in the special issue of Shakespeare Quarterly 2011: ‘Surviving Hamlet’

Week 4: Elizabethan Literary Criticism: theory and practice (Dr John Pitcher) This class will focus on (1) selected critical writing from the later part of the reign of Elizabeth I, and (2) instances of how writing might be understood and analysed in detail and in different ways by Elizabethan writers and readers. For (1), please read these three critical essays from the anthology, Sidney’s ‘The Defence of Poesy’ and Selected Renaissance Literary Criticism, ed. Gavin Alexander (Penguin Classics, 2004):Sir Philip Sidney, The Defence of Poesy, George Puttenham, The Art of English Poesy, and Samuel Daniel, A Defence of Rhyme. A sound primer on this large subject is the Introduction in English Renaissance Literary Criticism, ed. Brian Vickers (Oxford, 1999). For (2) please read the Introduction and Chapters 4, 5 and 6 of Renaissance Figures of Speech, ed. Sylvia Adamson, Gavin Alexander and Katrin Ettenhuber (Cambridge, 2007). We will apply the methods of analysis you find in these chapters (on puns, prosopoeia and ekphrasis respectively) to a

19

very popular and well-received poem of the period, Samuel Daniel’s 1592 Complaint of Rosamond (read this in the collection of Daniel edited by Arthur Sprague).

Week 5: Religious Literary Culture (Prof Peter McCullough) We will discuss the sermon preached at the court of James VI & I by Lancelot Andrewes on Christmas Day, 1609, as a specimen of performed religious prose and a site for the period’s rich and contested culture of biblical interpretation. First read Galatians 4 (the source of Andrewes’s text for his sermon) in the following versions of the Bible in English: Geneva, Douai-Rheims, and Authorized (‘King James’, 1611), paying particular attention to the marginal annotations and (in the Douai-Rheims) the ‘notes’ to the whole chapter. These are not replicated in free-access web Bible resources. All versions, with complete paratexts hyperlinked, are available on The Bible in English, via the Bodleian’s OXLIP+ interface. For the tradition of English Bible translation that culminated in 1611, see Helen Moore and Julian Reid, Manifold Greatness: The Making of the King James Bible (Oxford, 2011), and David Norton, The King James Bible (Cambridge, 2011). Then read Peter McCullough (ed.), Lancelot Andrewes: Selected Sermons and Lectures (Oxford University Press, 2005), Introduction, and A Sermon Preached . . . on Christmas Day. ANNO 1609. (pp. 162-77) with its headnote and annotations (pp. 403-14).

Week 6: Early Modern Violence: a critical argument (Dr Margaret Kean) Read John Milton’s poem, Samson Agonistes (1671), and his prose tract The Tenure of Kings and Magistrates (1649). Laura Knoppers, ed., The 1671 Poems (2008), vol.2 of The Complete Works of John Milton (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008-). You must use this volume for the introduction and notes – what does it tell you about current scholarly approaches to early modern studies in general, and Milton in particular? This will be a key section of our class discussion. [you might find it helpful to compare another earlier editorial approach, eg. John Carey Milton: Complete Shorter Poems (1968, 1997: Longman)]. N.H. Keeble & Nicholas McDowell, eds. Vernacular Regicide and Republican Writings (2013), vol. 6 of The Complete Works of John Milton (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008-). [You might wish to contrast this with the previous standard multivolume edition of Milton’s Prose Works from Yale.] Sharon Achinstein ‘Samson Agonistes and the Drama of Dissent’ MS 33 (1997). 133-58. Janel Mueller ‘The Figure and the Ground: Samson as Hero of London Nonconformity, 1662-1667’ in Grahan Parry and Joad Raymond, eds Milton and the Terms of Liberty (Cambridge: D.S. Brewer, 2002) 137-62. Victoria Kahn Wayward Contracts: the crisis of political obligation in England, 1640-1674 (Princeton: Princeton UP, 2004), chp 10 ‘Critique’, 252-78. Julia R. Lupton ‘Samson Dagonistes’ in Citizen Saints: Shakespeare and Political Theology’ (Chicago: Chicago UP, 2005), 181-204. -- John Carey ‘A Work in Praise of Terrorism’ TLS, Sept 6 2002, 16-17 Alan Rudrum ‘Milton Scholarship and the Agon over Samson Agonistes’ HLQ 65 3-4 (2002), 465-88. Feisal Mohamed ‘Confronting Religious Violence in Milton’s Samson Agonistes’ PMLA 120.2 (2005), 327-40.

Week 7: Literature of the Stuart Restoration (Prof Paulina Kewes) Primary Charles II, The Declaration of Breda (1660).

20

John Dryden, Astraea Redux (1660), in Dryden: Selected Poems, ed. Paul Hammond and David Hopkins (London, 2007). Abraham Cowley, Ode Upon the Blessed Restoration and Returne of His Sacred Majestie Charls the Second (1660). George Morley, Bishop of Worcester, A sermon preached at the magnificent coronation of the most high and mighty King Charles the IId King of Great Britain, France, and Ireland, Defender of the Faith, &c.: at the Collegiate Church of S. Peter Westminster the 23d of April, being S. George's Day, 1661(London, 1661). John Ogilby, The Entertainment of His Most Excellent Majestie Charles II . . . (London, 1662). [see The Entertainment of His Most Excellent Majestie Charles II in His Passage Through the City of London to His Coronation, facsimile with Introd. by R. Knowles (Binghamton, N.Y: Medieval & Renaissance Texts & Studies, 1987).] A chosen text from Gerald MacLean (ed.), The Return of the King: An Anthology of English Poems Commemorating the Restoration of Charles II (Electronic Text Center, University of Virginia Library). http://cowley.lib.virginia.edu/MacKing/MacKing.html

Week 8: Poetic Form and the Arts in Dryden (Prof Peter McCullough) Poems: ‘Ode: to the Pious Memory of . . . Anne Killigrew’ (1686), ‘To Sir Godfrey Kneller’ (1694), ‘An Ode on the Death of Mr Henry Purcell’ (1696). Be sure to read these, with attention to annotations, in the Longman ‘Annotated English Poets’ series, ed. Paul Hammond and David Hopkins (5 vols., 2000-5). Prose: Epistle Dedicatory to The Vocal and Instrumental Musick of ‘The Prophetess’ (1691) (California Dryden, vol. XVII, 324-6); Preface to Albion and Albanius: an Opera (1685) (California Dryden, vol. XV); Abraham Cowley, ‘Preface’ to Pindaric Odes in Works. Criticism: Dianne Dugaw, ‘”The Rationall Spirituall Part”: Dryden and Purcell’s Baroque King Arthur’, in Lewis and Novak, eds., Enchanted Ground John Hollander, ‘The Odes to Music’, in Bernard Schilling, ed., Dryden: a Collection of Critical Essays (1963), repr. from Hollander, The Untuning of the Sky (1961) Jean Hagstrum, The Sister Arts: The Tradition of Literary Pictorialism and English Poetry from Dryden to Gay (1958) Harold Love, ‘Constructing Classicism: Dryden and Purcell’, in Hammond and Hopkins, ed., Tercentenary Essays Roger Luckett, ‘The Fabric of Dryden’s Verse’, in James Winn, Critical Essays on John Dryden (1997) Christopher Ricks, ‘Dryden’s Triplets’, in Steven N. Zwicker, The Cambridge Companion to John Dryden (2004) Mark Van Doren, The Poetry of John Dryden (1920)

Secondary Paulina Kewes & Andrew McRae, Introduction to Literature of the Stuart Successions, ed. Kewes & McRae (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2016): to be supplied in typescript. Kevin Sharpe, Rebranding Rule The Restoration and Revolution Monarchy, 1660-1714 (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 2014). Paulina Kewes, ‘Acts of Oblivion, Acts of Remembrance: Rhetoric, Law, and National Memory in Early Restoration England’, in Ritual, Routine, and Regime: Institutions of Repetition in Euro-

21

American Cultures, 1650-1832, ed. Lorna Clymer (Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2006), pp. 103-31. Carolyn A. Edie, ‘Right Rejoicing: Sermons on the Occasion of the Stuart Restoration, 1660’, Bulletin of the John Rylands University of Manchester Library, 62 (1972), 61-86. N. H. Keeble, The Restoration: England in the 1660s (Oxford: Blackwell, 2002). David R. Evans, ‘Charles II’s “Grand Tour”: Restoration Panegyric and the Rhetoric of Travel Literature, Philological Quarterly, 72 (1993), 53-71. Gerard Reedy S.J., ‘Mystical Politics: The Imagery of Charles II’s Coronation’, in Paul J. Korshin (ed.), Studies in Change and Revolution: Aspects of English Intellectual History 1640-1800 (Menston: The Scholar Press, 1972), pp. 19-42. Jessica Munns, ‘Accounting for Providence: Contemporary Descriptions of the Restoration of Charles II’, in Dan Doll and Jessica Munns (eds), Recording and Reordering: Essays on the Seventeenth- and Eighteenth-Century Journal (Lewisburg, PA: Bucknell UP, 2006), pp. 102-121. Tim Harris, ‘The Restoration in Britain and Ireland’, in Michael Braddick (ed.), The Oxford Handbook of the English Revolution (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2015).

See also the Stuart Successions database and bibliographies available at http://stuarts.exeter.ac.uk/.

Studying at Oxford Studying the early modern period in Oxford has the additional excitement that the institution and its architecture and libraries are part of the subject. Do remember that however much writing can now be accesssed via the internet, Oxford’s libraries, galleries and bookshops are a quite unique opportunity, so get used to getting away from the computer screen while here. Your college may well have a library with a significant collection of early modern materials. From its refoundation in the seventeenth century the Bodleian Library aimed to build up a comprehensive collection ranging beyond Western European languages to Hebrew, Arabic, Persian and other languages. The Ashmolean Museum, founded in 1683, has been developed in its latest rebuilding as a fascinating collection on cross-cultural exchanges, while its original building, the world’s oldest surviving purpose-built museum building, is now a Museum of the History of Science. For help in decoding the architecture see Geoffrey Tyack, Oxford: An Architectural Guide (Oxford University Press, 1998). Take some time to look at the portraits in the frieze of the Bodleian’s Upper Reading Room, a conspectus of the early modern intellectual world: see M. R. A. Bullard, ‘Talking Heads: The Bodleian Frieze, its Inspiration, Sources, Designer and Significance’, Bodleian Library Record, 14:6 (April, 1994), pp. 461-500. For more on this subject see the ‘Research Resources’ and ‘Resources in Oxford’ sections of the Centre for Early Modern Studies website (www.cems.ox.ac.uk); and for a walking tour of early science in Oxford, see http://www.mhs.ox.ac.uk/features/walk/. The relevant volumes of the standard history of the university, T.H. Aston (gen.ed.), The History of the University of Oxford (Oxford University Press, 1984- ), 3: The Collegiate University, ed. James McConica, and 4: Seventeenth-Century Oxford, ed. Nicholas Tyacke, contain a mass of information which can give a concrete context for your studies; Mordechai Feingold’s essay on ‘The Humanities’, on pp. 211-357 of vol. 4, is an excellent survey. Notes on further reading: The New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature, gen. ed. George Watson, vols. 1 (1600-1660) and 2 (1660-1800) (Cambridge University Press, 1974, 1971) is still an invaluable resource for research in depth; coverage of secondary materials is inevitably dated but it can be good to have a longer time-scale. For the period’s history, useful works include Susan Brigden, New Worlds, Lost Worlds: the Rule of the Tudors, 1485-1603 (London, 2000) and Christopher Hill, The Century of Revolution, 1603-1714

22

(2nd edn., London, 1980), which is dated but crams a lot in. C. S. Lewis, English Literature in the Sixteenth Century: Excluding Drama (Oxford, 1954), ch. 1, ‘New Learning and New Ignorance’, is still worth reading as a polemical introduction to the period. On language, see Manfred Görlach, Introduction to Early Modern English (Cambridge, 1991). Innumerable companions and handbooks are available. There is a useful amount of historical contextualization in David Loewenstein and Janel Mueller (ed.), The Cambridge History of Early Modern English Literature (Cambridge University Press, 2002), and early modern subjects are well treated in the Oxford Handbooks series. But you are encouraged to focus on primary texts and individual research into their contexts; in each class we shall explore particular online and printed resources, with the aim of helping to focus your dissertation research. At some point anyone working in the period needs to experience major continental works like Ariosto’s Orlando Furioso and Montaigne’s Essays, though they are not part of this syllabus.

For information about the 1550-1830 Michaelmas Term B-Course, see page 63.

Hilary Term B-Course Early Modern Textual Cultures: Writing, Circulating, Reading (Dr Adam Smyth) This course continues the work begun in your general bibliography course in Michaelmas Term by focussing on the specific circumstances of the production, use, and circulation of texts and books, in print and manuscript, in the early modern period, and the challenges these pose to the modern literary scholar, textual critic, and editor. We will meet in 10th week, Michaelmas Term, for c.30 minutes, to outline the term ahead and what work is expected over the Christmas vacation. No preparation will be necessary for this meeting. Your B-Course will be assessed by an essay, due in 10th week of Hilary Term, in which you will be expected to produce either an edition of an early modern text, or a bibliographical essay on a focussed topic, chosen with our help. Although there is no necessity to submit your title until 6th week of Hilary Term, the earlier you clarify your ideas, the more time you will have to develop them, and it is worth thinking about this during Michaelmas Term. Your course tutors will help you develop your essay topic in the early weeks of Hilary Term. You will be expected to read 100-150 pages of specified material for each class, which will form the basis of discussion in the first hour. Each student will be expected to deliver a short (10 minute) presentation, on the subject of their own B-course essay, during the course of the term; these presentations, and a Q&A session following them, will take up the second hour.

Items marked with an asterisk are particularly recommended.

Week 1: Manuscript culture We will start by thinking about early modern manuscript culture: how were handwritten texts composed, copied, altered, circulated, read? How public were these texts? What kinds of communities and coteries consumed them? How much control did authors have over circulation? How did texts move between readers? How stable were manuscripts?

* Robert Darnton, ‘Seven Bad Reasons Not to Study Manuscripts,’ in Harvard Library Bulletin 4:4 (Winter 1993-94), 37-42 * Harold Love, Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-Century England (Clarendon Press, 1993), reprinted as The Culture and Commerce of Texts: Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-Century England (University of Massachussets Press, 1998), esp. pp. 3-90

23

* Henry Woudhuysen, Sir Philip Sidney and the Circulation of Manuscripts (Clarendon Press, 1996), esp. pp. 1-21 * Victoria Burke, ‘Let’s Get Physical: Bibliography, Codicology, and Seventeenth-Century Women’s Manuscripts,’ in Literature Compass 4.6 (2007), 1667-8 * Arthur F. Marotti, Manuscript, Print, and the English Renaissance Lyric (Cornell University Press, 1995), esp. ‘Social Textuality in the Manuscript System,’ pp. 135-208 Peter Beal, In Praise of Scribes: Manuscripts and their Makers in Seventeenth-Century England (Clarendon, 1998) Peter Beal, A Dictionary of English Manuscript Terminology: 1450 to 2000 (Oxford University Press, 2009) - useful and fascinating to browse S. P. Cerasano and Steven W. May (eds), In the Prayse of Writing: Early Modern Manuscript Studies (British Library, 2012) James Daybell and Peter Hinds (eds), Material Readings of Early Modern Culture: Texts and Social Practices, 1580-1730 (Palgrave, 2010)

Week 2: Textual transmission: print, manuscript, orality How, and with what consequences, did texts move between different media? What relationship existed between these different forms of publication? How was the act of writing in manuscript changed by the culture of print? Is early modern literary scholarship built around print-centric assumptions? How do we respond – as readers, textual scholars, literary critics, editors – to the fact that many early modern texts exist in multiple, variant forms?

* David McKitterick, Print, Manuscript and the Search for Order, 1450-1830 (Cambridge University Press, 2003), esp. pp. 1-21 * Arthur F. Marotti, Manuscript, Print, and the English Renaissance Lyric (Cornell University Press, 1995), esp. chapter 9, ‘Print and the Lyric,’ pp. 209-90 * Harold Love, Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-Century England (Clarendon Press, 1993), reprinted as The Culture and Commerce of Texts: Scribal Publication in Seventeenth-Century England (University of Massachussets Press, 1998), esp. chapter 7, ‘The ambiguous triumph of print,’ pp. 284-312 Julia Crick and Alexandra Walsham (eds), The Uses of Script and Print, 1300-1700 (Cambridge University Press, 2004) Arthur F. Marotti and Michael D. Bristol (eds), Print, Manuscript, Performance: The Changing Relations of the Media in Early Modern England (Ohio State University Press, 2000) Alexandra Gillespie (ed.), ‘Manuscript, Print and Early Tudor Culture,’ in Huntington Library Quarterly Special Edition 67 (2004) Walter J. Ong, Orality and Literacy (1982, new edition Routledge, 2002) Andrew Pettegree, ‘The Book Before Print,’ in The Book in the Renaissance (Yale University Press, 2010) Wendy Wall, The Imprint of Gender: Authorship and Publication in the English Renaissance (Cornell, 1994)

Week 3: Editing early modern texts Building on our sense of the mobility of early modern texts, we’ll talk through a number of short examples of texts, both manuscript and print, that present particular challenges for editors. How might we respond to variants? To revisions (by author, or scribe, or reader)? To errors? To what degree should editors convey (and how?) the materiality of the text? What role do we assign to authorial 24

intention? To reception? What potentials and problems does digital editing present? Is editing necessarily an interpretative intervention – and if so, is this a problem?

* W. W. Greg, ‘Rationale of Copy-Text,’ in Studies in Bibliography 3 (1950-1), 19-36. See also Harold Love, Scribal Publication, pp. 313-56, for a critique based on manuscript editing * Goldberg, Jonathan. “‘What? in a names that which we call a Rose’: The Desired Texts of Romeo and Juliet,’ in Crisis in Editing: Texts of the English Renaissance, ed. Randall McLeod (AMS Press, 1988), pp. 173-202 * Random Cloud, ‘FIAT fLUX,’ in Crisis in Editing: Texts of the English Renaissance, ed. Randall McLeod (AMS, 1988), pp. 61-172 * Leah S. Marcus, Unediting the Renaissance: Shakespeare, Marlowe, Milton (Routledge, 1996), esp. pp. 1-38 * Michael Hunter, ‘How to Edit a Seventeenth-Century Manuscript: Principles and Practice,’ in The Seventeenth Century, 10, 277-310 Michael Ruddick (ed.), The Poems of Sir Walter Raleigh: A Historical Edition (Renaissance English Text Society 1998) – an intriguing response to the textual chaos of Raleigh’s manuscripts verse. Read the introduction, in particular. Random Cloud, ‘“The Very Names of the Persons”: Editing and the Invention of Dramatick Character,’ in Staging the Renaissance: Reinterpretations of Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama, ed. by David Scott Kastan and Peter Stallybrass (Routledge, 1991), pp. 88-96 G. Thomas Tanselle, Introduction to Scholarly Editing (Book Arts Press, 2002), Part 1, pp. 12-22 Jerome J. McGann, A Critique of Modern Textual Criticism (University of Virginia Press, 1983) Erick Keleman, Textual Editing and Criticism: An Introduction (Norton, 2009), esp. pp. 73-120 Paul Werstine, ‘Editing Shakespeare and Editing Without Shakespeare: Wilson, McKerrow, Greg, Bowers, Tanselle, and Copy-Text Editing,’ in TEXT 13 (2000), 27-53 Margaret J.M. Ezell, Social Authorship and the Advent of Print (Johns Hopkins University Press, 1999) G. Thomas Tanselle Textual Criticism since Greg: A Chronicle, 1950-2000 (Bibliographical Society of the University of Virginia, 2005): six lucid chapters on the major shifts in textual scholarship since Greg. These chapters originally appeared in Studies in Bibliography (respectively, 1975 (28: 167- 229); 1981 (34:23-65), 1986 (39: 1-46), 1991 (44: 83-143), 1996 (49:1-60), and 2001 (54: 1-80)): you can read them via JSTOR or on the website of the Bibliographical Society of the University of Virginia (http://etext.lib.virginia.edu/bsuva/sb)

Week 4: Agents of book-making: authors, stationers, publishers, printers, sellers How clearly can we define the roles of author, stationer, publisher, printer, bookseller? What range of activities did they perform? How much did they overlap? How did these categories shift over time? How useful is biography as a variable for thinking about print culture? Is the history of print becoming the history of individual agents? Or is there an emerging emphasis on the always- collaborative nature of textual production?

* Zachary Lesser, Renaissance Drama and the Politics of Publication: Readings in the English Book Trade (Cambridge University Press, 2004), pp. 1-52 * Margaret Ezell, Social Authorship and the Advent of Print (Johns Hopkins University Press, 1999), pp. 1-40 * Dip into Henry R. Plomer et al., A Dictionary of Printers and Booksellers, either 1557-1640 (Bibliographical Society, 1910), or 1641 to 1667 (Bibliographical Society, 1907) – and think about (i) networks of printers and sellers (how do individuals connect to other individuals, and with what

25

consequences?); (ii) the degree to which biography is a helpful variable for thinking about book production. Helen Smith, ‘The Publishing Trade in Shakespeare’s Time,’ in Andrew R. Murphy (ed.), A Concise Companion to Shakespeare and the Text (Wiley, 2007), pp. 17-34 Marta Straznicky, Shakespeare’s Stationers: Studies in Cultural Bibliography (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2013). Read esp. the introduction, and sample other chapters. Marcy L. North, ‘Ignoto and the Book Industry,’ in The Anonymous Renaissance: Cultures of Discretion in Tudor-Stuart England (University of Chicago Press, 2003), pp. 56-88. Joseph Loewenstein, Ben Jonson and Possessive Authorship (Cambridge University Press, 2002) Peter Blayney, The Bookshops in Paul's Cross Churchyard (London, 1990).

Week 5: Censorship and licensing We’ll think about the mechanics of licensing and censorship, across different genres of writing, focusing in particular on the Stationers’ Company, the Church and the Licensers. What happened to books that transgressed these codes? What were the mechanics of censorship, and how effective were such acts?

* Peter W. M. Blayney, ‘The Publication of Playbooks,’ in A New History of Early English Drama, eds John D. Cox and David Scott Kastan (New York: Columbia University Press, 1997), pp. 389-415 * Zachary Lesser, Renaissance Drama and the Politics of Publication: Readings in the English Book Trade (Cambridge University Press, 2004), pp. 26-51, ‘Speculation in the book trade’ * Cyndia Susan Clegg, ‘The Stationers’ Company of London,’ in The British Literary Book Trade, 1475-1700, eds James K. Bracken and Joel Silver, Dictionary of Literary Biography, Vol. 170 (Gale Research, 1996), pp. 275-291 * Richard McCabe, ‘Elizabethan Satire and the Bishops’ Ban of 1599,’ in Yearbook of English Studies 11 (1981), 188-93 Edward Arber, A Transcript of the Registers of the Company of Stationers of London, 1554-1640 AD, 4 vols (privately printed, 1875-94; rpt. Peter Smith, 1950) – useful if you could spend some time wandering around this text. Cyndia Susan Clegg, Press Censorship in Elizabethan England (Cambridge University Press, 2004) Cyndia Susan Clegg, Press Censorship in Jacobean England (Cambridge University Press, 2007) Cyndia Susan Clegg, Press Censorship in Caroline England (Cambridge University Press, 2011) Helen Smith, ‘Grossly Material Things’: Women and Book Production in Early Modern England (Oxford University Press, 2012), pp. 87-134, ‘“A free Stationers wife of this companye”: Women and the Stationers’ Joseph Lowenstein, The Author’s Due: Printing and the Prehistory of Copyright (University of Chicago Press, 2002), pp. 1-88 John Feather, ‘The Origins of Copyright, 1475-1640,’ and ‘From Custom to Statute, 1640-1710’ in Publishing, Piracy and Politics: An Historical Study of Copyright in Britain (London: Mansell, 1994), 10-36, 37-63

Week 6: Readers and reading practices Building on our MT discussion of reading, we’ll ask how we might attempt to recover the reading practices of early modern readers. What is the archive for recovering this apparently silent, private act? We’ll think in particular about annotations and commonplace books. The history of reading is still a relatively new field: what methodological problems / blind-spots / opportunities can we detect?

26

* Anthony Grafton and Lisa Jardine, ‘How Gabriel Harvey Read His Livy,’ Past and Present, 129, (1990), 30–78. A paradigmatic article. Is it time to shift paradigms? * William H. Sherman, Used Books: Marking Readers in Renaissance England (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2008), esp. pp 3-52 * Peter Stallybrass, ‘Books and Scrolls: Navigating the Bible,’ in Jennifer Andersen and Elizabeth Sauer (eds), Books and Readers in Early Modern England (University of Pennsylvania Press, 2002), 42-79 * Peter Beal, ‘Notions in Garrison: The Seventeenth-Century Commonplace Book,’ in New Ways of Looking at Old Texts: Papers of the Renaissance English Text Society, 1985-1991, ed. W. Speed Hill (RETS, 1993), pp. 131-47 * Peter Stallybrass and Roger Chartier, ‘Reading and Authorship: The Circulation of Shakespeare, 1590-1619,’ in A Concise Companion to Shakespeare and the Text, ed. Andrew R. Murphy (Wiley, 2007), pp. 35-56 Adam Smyth, ‘“Shreds of holinesse”: George Herbert, Little Gidding, and Cutting Up Texts in Early Modern England,’ in English Literary Renaissance 42.3 (Autumn 2012), 452–481 Jennifer Richards and Fred Schurink (eds), The Textuality and Materiality of Reading in Early Modern England [Special Issue], in Huntington Library Quarterly 73.3 (2010), 345-552: several compelling articles giving a good sense on the variety of approaches to the subject. Heidi Brayman Hackel, Reading Material in Early Modern England: Print, Gender and Literacy (Cambridge University Press, 2005) Kevin Sharpe, Reading Revolutions: The Politics of Reading in Early Modern England (Yale University Press, 2000).

27

M.ST. IN ENGLISH LITERATURE, 1700-1830 Convenors: Professor Ros Ballaster, Mansfield College: [email protected] Professor Timothy Michael, Lincoln College: [email protected]

We look forward to meeting you in October. In Michaelmas Term, you will take the 8-week core A- course under the supervision of the programme convenors. You will be taking two further courses in the first term, so you should read as much as possible before you arrive. Unless designated supplementary, the readings listed below are required. We also recommend that you purchase two anthologies and read around in them as much as possible: Eighteenth-Century Poetry: An Annotated Anthology, eds. David Fairer and Christine Gerrard (2nd edn, 2003), and Romanticism: An Anthology, ed. Duncan Wu (3rd edn, 2006, or 4th edn, 2012).

A-Course

MICHAELMAS TERM 2015 Literature: Contexts and Approaches, 1700–1830 This course seeks to examine literature, literary criticism, and scholarship in the period. We will consider arguments and assertions about writing and authors, as they were rehearsed from the late seventeenth to the early nineteenth century and as they have been described, summarized, and reconceived in critical studies of more recent years. We will be discussing the status and reach of English literature across the whole period 1700–1830, and all classes will encourage close attention to literary styles, forms, and genres.

Week 1: Civility, circulation, and self-interest Joseph Addison on The Royal Exchange, Spectator no. 69 (in Erin Mackie (ed.), The Commerce of Everyday Life: Selections from the Tatler and The Spectator (1998), pp. 203–6) Jonathan Swift, ‘A Description of a City Shower’, in The Essential Writings of Jonathan Swift, ed. Claude Rawson and Ian Higgins (Norton Critical Edition, 2009) Joseph Addison, ‘The History of a Shilling’, Tatler no. 249 (in Mackie, The Commerce of Everyday Life, pp. 183–8) Bernard Mandeville, The Fable of the Bees (1714, 1723) (Liberty Press, 1988)

Recommended Supplementary Reading: Colin Nicholson, Writing and the Rise of Finance (2004); Lawrence Klein, ‘Coffee-house civility, 1660–1714: an aspect of post-courtly culture in England’, Huntington Library Quarterly, 59:1 (1997), 30–51; Eve Tavor Bannet, ‘“Secret History”: Or, Talebearing Inside and Outside the Secretorie’, Huntington Library Quarterly, 68:1-2, (2005), 375-96; reprinted in The Uses of History in Early- Modern England, ed. Paulina Kewes (2006); Jonathan Lamb, ‘The Crying of Lost Things’, English Literary History, 71:4 (2004), 949-967.

Week 2: Satire and Authorship Jonathan Swift, ‘A Beautiful Young Nymph Going to Bed’ (1734), ‘To A Lady, who desired the Author to write some Verses upon her in the Heroic Style’ (1733), and ‘Verses on the Death of Dr Swift’ (1739), in The Essential Writings of Jonathan Swift (Norton Critical Edition), ed. Claude Rawson and Ian Higgins (2009) Alexander Pope, ‘Epistle to Miss Blount’, and An Epistle to Dr. Arbuthnot (1735), in John Butt, ed., The Poems of Alexander Pope: A One-Volume Edition of the Twickenham Pope (1965 and reprinted)

28

Mary Wortley Montagu, ‘Verses Address’d to the Imitator of the First Satire of the Second Book of Horace’ (1733) and ‘The Reasons that Induced Dr. S to write a Poem call’d the Lady’s Dressing room’ (1734), in Lady Mary Wortley Montagu: Essays and Poems and Simplicity, A Comedy, ed. Robert Halsband and Isobel Grundy (1977)

Recommended Supplementary Reading: Ian Jack, Augustan Satire: Intention and Idiom in English Poetry (1952); Dustin Griffin, Satire: A Critical Reintroduction (1994), and Swift and Pope: Satirists in Dialogue (2010); Joseph M. Levine, Between Ancients and Moderns: Baroque Culture in Restoration England (1999); Claude Rawson, ‘Swift’, in Michael O’Neill (ed.), The Cambridge History of English Poetry (2010); Catherine Ingrassia, Authorship, Commerce and Gender in Early Eighteenth-Century England: A Culture of Paper Credit (1998); Pat Rogers, Hacks and Dunces: Pope, Swift, and Grub Street (1980); Pat Rogers, ‘A Drama of Mixed Feelings: the Epistle to Arbuthnot’, in Essays on Pope (1993); Helen Deutsch, ‘Pope, Self, and World’, in Pat Rogers (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Alexander Pope (2007); Brean Hammond, The Rise of Professional Imaginative Writing in England, 1670–1740: Hackney for Bread (1997); Jill Campbell, ‘The Scriblerian Project’, in Ros Ballaster (ed.), The History of British Women’s Writing: 1690-1750, (2010)

Week 3: Literary Loneliness Ann Finch, ‘A Nocturnal Reverie’ (1713), in Eighteenth-Century Poetry: An Annotated Anthology ed. Fairer and Gerrard Thomas Parnell, ‘A Night-Piece on Death’ (1722), in Eighteenth-Century Poetry: An Annotated Anthology Thomas Gray, Elegy Written in a Country Churchyard (1751), in The Poems of Gray, Collins and Goldsmith, ed. Roger Lonsdale (Longman Annotated Poets, 1969) Anna Laeititia Barbauld, ‘A Summer Evening’s Meditation’ (1773), in Eighteenth-Century Poetry: An Annotated Anthology

Recommended Supplementary Reading: William Empson, Some Versions of Pastoral (1986), chap. 1: ‘Proletarian Literature’; Vincent Newey, ‘The Selving of Thomas Gray’, Paul Williamson, ‘Gray’s Elegy and the Logic of Expression’, and Richard Terry, ‘Gray and Poetic Diction’, in Thomas Gray: Contemporary Essays, eds. W. B. Hutchings and William Ruddick (1993); John Sitter, Literary Loneliness in Mid- Eighteenth-Century England (1982); Christopher Miller, The Invention of Evening (2006); Marshall Brown, Preromanticism (1991), chap. 3; David Fairer, English Poetry of the Eighteenth Century (2003), chap. 6

Week 4: The Essay Joseph Addison, The Spectator nos. 1 and 10 (1711) David Hume, ‘Of Essay-Writing’ (1742) Samuel Johnson, The Rambler numbers 2 and 23 (1750) Jane Collier, An Essay on the Art of Ingeniously Tormenting (1753) (Broadview Press, ed. Audrey Bilger, 2003) William Hazlitt, ‘On Reading Old Books’ in The Plain Speaker (1821), ‘On Familiar Style’, in Table Talk (1821-22), ‘The Letter-Bell’, in The Monthly Magazine (1831) Charles Lamb, ‘Imperfect Sympathies’, ‘The Old and the New Schoolmaster’, and ‘Detached Thoughts on Books and Reading’ in Essays of Elia (1823)

29

Recommended Supplementary Reading: Erin Mackie (ed.), introduction to The Commerce of Everyday Life: Selections from the Tatler and The Spectator (1998); Denise Gigante (ed.), The Great Age of the English Essay (2008); W. K. Wimsatt, The Prose Style of Samuel Johnson (1941); David Womersley (ed.), introduction to Samuel Johnson: Selected Essays (2003); Thomas McFarland, Romantic Cruxes: The English Essayists and the Spirit of the Age (1987); David Bromwich, Hazlitt: The Mind of a Critic (1983); Tom Paulin, The Day-Star of Liberty: William Hazlitt’s Radical Style (1998); Carl H. Klaus, The Made-up Self: Impersonation in the Personal Essay (2010); David Russell, ‘“Our Debt to Lamb”: The Romantic Essay and the Emergence of Tact’, ELH, 79 (2012), 179–209.

Week 5: Oddity and Longevity: Laurence Sterne The Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy, Gentleman (1759-67)—NB: use the Penguin Classics edition, ed. Melvyn New and Joan New (2003)

Recommended Supplementary Reading: Tom Keymer, Sterne, the Moderns, and the Novel (2002); Ian Campbell Ross, Laurence Sterne: A Life (2001); David A. Brewer, The Afterlife of Character, 1726-1825 (2005), ch. 5; John Mullan, Sentiment and Sociability: The Language of Feeling in the Eighteenth Century, ch. 4 (1988); Fred Parker, Scepticism and Literature: An Essay on Pope, Hume, Sterne and Johnson (2003); Melvyn New (ed.), Tristram Shandy: Contemporary Critical Essays (1992); Thomas Keymer (ed.), Laurence Sterne’s Tristram Shandy: A Casebook (2006); Thomas Keymer, ‘Sterne and Romantic Autobiography’, in Keymer and Jon Mee (eds.), The Cambridge Companion to English Literature 1740–1830 (2004)

Week 6: Epic subjectivity William Wordsworth, The Prelude (1805 text)—NB: the best paperback editions of the 1805 (in 13 books) are William Wordsworth, ed. Stephen Gill (Oxford Twenty-First Century Authors, 2010), and Wordsworth’s Poetry and Prose, ed. Nicholas Halmi (Norton Critical Edition, 2013)

Recommended Supplementary Reading: William Hazlitt, ‘William Wordsworth’ in The Spirit of the Age (1825); Stephen Gill, ed., William Wordsworth’s Prelude: A Casebook (2006); Stephen Gill, Wordsworth: The Prelude (1991), and Wordsworth’s Revisitings (2011), chapter 3; Herbert Lindenberger, On Wordsworth’s Prelude (1963), chap. 1 and appendix 1; Geoffrey Hartman, Wordsworth’s Poetry 1787–1814 (1964), chapter 3 (NB Hartman quotes from the 1850 version of The Prelude); Paul Fry, Wordsworth and the Poetry of What We Are (2008), chap. 7

Week 7: Idealism and scepticism S. T. Coleridge, Biographia Literaria (1817), chap. 14 [available in Coleridge’s Poetry and Prose, ed. Nicholas Halmi, Paul Magnuson, Raimonda Modiano (Norton Critical Edition, 2003] Thomas Love Peacock, Nightmare Abbey (1818), ed. Lisa Vargo (Broadview Press, 2007) Thomas Love Peacock, ‘Four Ages of Poetry’ (1819) [in Duncan Wu (ed.), Romanticism: An Anthology (3rd ed., 2006)] P. B. Shelley, ‘Defence of Poetry’ (1820) [also in Wu (ed.), Romanticism]

Recommended Supplementary Reading: Paul Hamilton, Coleridge’s Poetics (1983), chap. 1; William Keach, Shelley’s Style (1984), chap. 1; Kenneth Neill Cameron, Shelley: The Golden Years (1975), chap. 5; Marilyn Butler, Peacock

30

Displayed: A Satirist in his Context (1969); Gary Dyer, British Satire and the Politics of Style 1789- 1832 (1997), chap. 4; Carl Dawson, His Fine Wit: A Study of Thomas Love Peacock (1970); David Bromwich (ed.), Romantic Critical Essays (1987); Steven Jones, Satire and Romanticism (2000); Appendices A–D in Vargo’s Broadview edition of Nightmare Abbey.

Week 8—Heroism, Mock-Heroic, Mock-Epic Alexander Pope, The Rape of The Lock (1714) George Gordon, Lord Byron, Don Juan, Cantos I and II (1819)—NB: the best paperback edition is The Major Works, ed. Jerome McGann (Oxford World’s Classics, 2000)

Recommended Supplementary Reading: David Fairer, English Poetry of the Eighteenth Century (2002), chap. 3; Richard Terry, Mock-Heroic from Butler to Cowper: An English Genre and Discourse (2005); Claude Rawson, Satire and Sentiment 1660–1830 (2000), chaps. 3–5; Ritchie Robertson, Mock-Epic Poetry from Pope to Heine (2009); Jerome McGann, Don Juan in Context (1976); Anne Barton, Byron: Don Juan (1992); W. H. Auden, ‘Don Juan’, in The Dyer’s Hand (1968); Nicholas Halmi, ‘The Very Model of a Modern Epic Poem’, European Romantic Review, 21 (2010), 589–600

General reading and useful reference works: M. H. Abrams, The Mirror and the Lamp: Romantic Theory and the Critical Tradition (1953) Walter Jackson Bate, From Classic to Romantic: Premises of Taste in Eighteenth-Century England (1946) Marshall Brown (ed.), Romanticism, vol. 5 of The Cambridge History of Literary Criticism (2000) [available online through SOLO] James Chandler (ed.), The Cambridge History of English Romantic Literature (2009) [available online through SOLO] William Doyle, The French Revolution: A Very Short Introduction (2001) David Fairer, English Poetry of the Eighteenth Century (2003) Christine Gerrard (ed.), A Companion to Eighteenth-Century Poetry (2006) [available online through SOLO] Paul Langford, A Polite and Commercial People: England 1727–1783 (1989) Iain McCalman (gen. ed.), An Oxford Companion to the Romantic Age: British Culture 1776–1832 (1999) [available online through SOLO] Charles Mahoney (ed.), A Companion to Romantic Poetry (2011) [available online through SOLO] H. B. Nisbet and Claude Rawson (eds.), The Eighteenth Century, vol. 4 of The Cambridge History of Literary Criticism (1997) [available online through SOLO] Claude Rawson, Satire and Sentiment, 1660–1830: Stress Points in the English Augustan Tradition (2000) John Richetti (ed.), The Cambridge History of English Literature 1660–1780 (2005) [available online through SOLO] Nicholas Roe (ed.), Romanticism: An Oxford Guide (2005) James Sambrook, The Eighteenth Century: The Intellectual and Cultural Context (1993) W. A. Speck, Literature and Society in Eighteenth-Century England: Ideology, Politics and Culture, 1680–1820 (1998) Jane Stabler, Burke to Byron, Barbauld to Baillie, 1790–1830 (2002) David Womersley (ed.), A Companion to Literature from Milton to Blake (Blackwell, 2000) [available online through SOLO] Duncan Wu (ed.), A Companion to Romanticism (1999) [available online through SOLO]

31

For information about the 1550-1830 Michaelmas Term B-Course, see page 63.

Hilary Term B-Course Convenor: Professor Kathryn Sutherland ([email protected]) Textual Cultures 1700-1830

This series of six classes will continue work established in the general bibliography course in Michaelmas Term by focusing on aspects of the production, use, and circulation of a variety of works in print and manuscript in the years 1700-1830, a period in which the conditions for writing, publishing, and reading, and the formats of publication underwent enormous changes.

Week 1: Verse Miscellanies and Anthologies

Week 2: Letter-writing

Week 3: Editing Shakespeare

Week 4: Authorship, copyright, reprint series

Week 5: Theatrical Ephemera

Week 6: Reading Satirical Prints

Verse Miscellanies and Anthologies Online: the Digital Miscellanies Index catalogues the contents of verse miscellanies (defined as collections containing at least some verse texts by more than one author) published between 1700 and 1780: http://digitalmiscellaniesindex.org/. Other useful resources for the study of poetry in print and manuscript include the Union First Line Index of English Verse, http://firstlines.folger.edu/; and the Poetry of the Gentleman’s Magazine database, http://www.gmpoetrydatabase.org/db/. Jennifer Batt, ‘“It Ought Not to be Lost to the World”: The Transmission and Consumption of Eighteenth-Century Lyric Verse’, Review of English Studies 62 (2011), 414–32. ——, ‘Eighteenth-Century Verse Miscellanies’, Literature Compass 9 (2012), 394-405. A very useful overview of scholarship in this area. Barbara M. Benedict, Making the Modern Reader: Cultural Mediation in Early Modern Literary Anthologies. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 1996. Thomas Bonnell, The Most Disreputable Trade: Publishing the Classics of English Poetry, 1765– 1810. Oxford: Oxford UP, 2008. Chantal Lavoie, Collecting Women, Poetry and Lives 1700–1780. Lewisburg, PA: Bucknell UP, 2009. Michael F. Suarez SJ, 'The Production and Consumption of the Eighteenth-Century Poetic Miscellany', in Books and their Readers in Eighteenth-Century England: New Essays, ed. by Isabel Rivers (London: Continuum, 2001), pp. 217-51. Available online via SOLO.

Letter-writing Online: Early Modern Letters Online: http://emlo.bodleian.ox.ac.uk/home and Electronic Enlightenment: http://ezproxy-prd.bodleian.ox.ac.uk:2190/index.html (access via SOLO) Eve Tavor Bannet, Empire of Letters: Letter Manuals and Transatlantic Correspondence, 1680–1820. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005. Bigold, Melanie, Women of Letters, MS Circulation and Print Afterlives in the Eighteenth Century: Elizabeth Rowe, Catherine Cockburn and Elizabeth Carter. Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2013. Claire Brant, Eighteenth-Century Letters and British Culture. Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2006. Mary Farvret, Romantic Correspondence: Women, Politics and the Fiction of Letters. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1993. 32

Gary Schneider, The Culture of Epistolarity: Vernacular Letters and Letter Writing in Early Modern England, 1500–1700. Newark: University of Delaware Press, 2005.

Susan Whyman, The Pen and the People: English Letter Writers, 1660–1800. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2009.

Editing Shakespeare Required reading in advance of the class:

Samuel Johnson, ‘Preface’ to The Plays of William Shakespeare (1765, ESTC T138601 or N12071). Access via ECCO; alternatively, the Oxford World’s Classics edition of Johnson’s Major Works includes the ‘Preface’ to Shakespeare. Lewis Theobald, ‘Introduction’ to Shakespeare Restored (1726, ESTC T136611). Access via ECCO. The main part of the work is focused on the text of Hamlet, while the substantial appendix deals with a range of other plays; browse through and consider the kinds of emendations Theobald offers and the evidence and reasoning he provides to support them.

Further reading:

Margreta De Grazia, Shakespeare Verbatim: The Reproduction of Authenticity and the 1790 Apparatus. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1991. Available online via SOLO. Simon Jarvis, Scholars and Gentlemen: Shakespearean Textual Criticism and Representations of Scholarly Labour, 1725-1765. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1995. Andrew Murphy, Shakespeare in Print: A History and Chronology of Shakespeare Publishing. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 2003. Available online via SOLO. Marcus Walsh, Shakespeare, Milton, and Eighteenth-Century Literary Editing: The Beginnings of Interpretative Scholarship. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1997. Available online via SOLO.

Authorship, copyright, reprint series Primary Sources on Copyright (1450-1900), http://copy.law.cam.ac.uk/cam/index.php an extremely useful selection of texts. Browse according to your interests. Bullard, Paddy, and McLaverty, James, (eds), Jonathan Swift and the Eighteenth-Century Book (CUP, 2014), esp. the introduction Feather, John, Publishing, Piracy and Politics: An Historical Study of Copyright in Britain (London: Mansell, 1994), pp. 64-96 (‘Defining the Law 1710-1800’) Raven, James, ed., The Practice and Representation of Reading in England (CUP, 1996) Rose, Mark, Authors and Owners: The Invention of Copyright (Harvard University Press, 1993) St Clair, William, The Reading Nation in the Romantic Period (CUP, 2004) Woodmansee, Martha, The Author, Art, and the Market: Rereading the History of Aesthetics (Columbia University Press, 1994)

Theatrical Ephemera Online: John Johnson Collection: johnjohnson.chadwyck.co.uk John Barrell (ed.), Exhibition Extraordinary!! Radical Broadsides of the mid 1790s. Nottingham: Trent Editions, 2001. Christopher Baugh, ‘Scenography and Technology’, in Jane Moody and Daniel O’Quinn (eds.), The Cambridge Companion to British Theatre, 1730–1830. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2009; 43–56. Jacky Bratton, New Readings in Theatre History. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003. Graham Hudson, The Design and Printing of Ephemera in Britain and America 1720–1920. London: British Library, 2008. 33

Robert Hume, ed., The London Theatre World, 1660–1800. Carbondale, Illinois: Southern Illinois University Press, 1980.

W.B. Worthen and Peter Holland (eds.), Theorizing Practice: Redefining Theatre History. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2003.

Reading Satirical Prints Online: Prints from the Curzon Collection: Images of Napoleon and British Fears of Invasion, 1789 – 1815: http://www2.odl.ox.ac.uk/gsdl/cgi- bin/library?site=localhost&a=p&p=about&c=politi04&ct=0&l=en&w=iso-8859-1 Christiane Banerji and Diana Donald, (trans. and eds.), Gillray Observed: The Earliest Account of his Caricatures in London und Paris. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999 David Bindman, Hogarth and his Times: Serious Comedy. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1997 Tim Clayton, The English Print, 1688–1802. New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 1997. Diana Donald, The Age of Caricature: Satirical Prints in the Age of George III. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1996. Vic Gatrell, City of Laughter: Sex and Satire in Eighteenth-Century London. London: Atlantic Books, 2006. Marcus Wood, Radical Satire and Print Culture 1790–1822. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1994.

34

M.ST. IN ENGLISH LITERATURE, 1830-1914

Convenors: Dr Michèle Mendelssohn, Mansfield College: ([email protected]) Dr David Russell, Corpus Christi College

The aim of the A-Course is to introduce students to important critical debates within Victorian studies. Classes will draw on both primary and critical texts. Each class will open with one or two presentations by students, who are asked to engage critically with the material, not just to summarize it. Access to the materials for the classes is provided via two routes: either via the urls below; or as scanned documents via weblearn https://weblearn.ox.ac.uk/portal/hierarchy/humdiv/engfac/grad Please follow the links from -> Information for Students -> M.St. and M.Phil. Resources (including reading lists), -> MSt 1830-1914. The journal articles are all available via SOLO if you prefer to access them that way.

1. The changing shape of Victorian studies. (MM and DR leading) We shall begin by looking at a range of recent issues of the major Victorian journals and discussing which kinds of work are currently dominant (e.g. thing theory, finance and economics-related criticism, gender studies), what their distinctive attributes are, and what might be their predictable strengths and weaknesses. We’ll also be discussing where the major fault-lines lie (formalism v. cultural materialism, different kinds of history, Englishness v. cosmopolitanism and/or trans-Atlantic studies). Students will be asked to do some preparatory scoping of the most influential journals, including Victorian Studies, Journal of Victorian Culture, Victorian Poetry, Victorian Literature and Culture, and to undertake some initial taxonomic work.

We will also look at brief extracts (to be tabled) from: Lytton Stratchey, Eminent Victorians (1918) Walter Houghton, The Victorian Frame of Mind, 1830-70 (1963) Christopher Ricks, The New Oxford Book of Victorian Verse (1987) Kate Flint (ed.), The Cambridge History of Victorian Literature (2012)

Optional extra reading: Roundtable on Richard Price’s British Society, 1680-1880 (‘When Did the Victorian Age Begin?’), JVC 11.1 (2006) On-line via Project Muse

2. The idea of culture. (DR leading) Thomas Carlyle, From Past and Present (1843): ‘Democracy’ Matthew Arnold, Culture and Anarchy (1869): chs. 1, 3, and at least the start of 4. [Available as ebook via SOLO]: Arnold, Matthew, ed. Culture and Anarchy [Electronic Resource]. Ed. Jane Garnett. Oxford: OUP, 2006. OR http://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/4212 Mill, Autobiography (1873) extract from Chapter 5. A Crisis in My Mental History. [Start of chapter to ‘…extend in modifying or superseding them’ (p. 165) http://oll.libertyfund.org/titles/242 Stefan Collini, from Public Moralists: Political Thought and Intellectual Life in Britain, 1850-1930 (OUP, 1991): “The Culture of Altruism” [print] Raymond Williams, from Culture and Society, 1780-1950 (Columbia UP 1958): “Introduction”, Chs. 3, “Mill on Bentham and Coleridge” and 6, JH Newman and Matthew Arnold” [print] and from Keywords: A Vocabulary of Culture and Society (OUP, 1976), “Criticism” and “Culture” [print]

35

3. The private and the public sphere. (MM leading) John Ruskin, ‘Of Queens’ Gardens’, Sesame and Lilies (1894), ch. II. short extracts from Charles Dickens, Little Dorrit (1857) and Oscar Wilde, An Ideal Husband (1895) [print – as one document] Catherine Gallagher, extract from The Industrial Reformation of English Fiction (1985) in debate with Raymond Williams [print] Amanda Vickery, ‘Golden Age to Separate Spheres?: A Review of the Categories and Chronology of English Women's History', The Historical Journal 36.2 (1993), 383-414 [print] Kathy Peiss, ‘Going Public? Women in Nineteenth-Century Cultural History’, American Literary History 3.4 (1991), 817-28 [print]

4. Politics. (DR leading) Elaine Hadley, Living Liberalism: Practical Citizenship in Mid-Victorian Britain (Chicago, 2010): ch. 2 [print] Nicholas Shrimpton, 'The Chronology and Political Contexts of the Palliser Novels' - Appended to all the latest editions of Trollope's Palliser series (OUP, World's Classics). [print] Oscar Wilde, ‘The Soul of Man under Socialism’ (1891) http://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/1017

5. National, transnational and global literatures. (MM leading) George Eliot, from Daniel Deronda. Edinburgh: William Blackwood and Sons, 1884 (first published in 1876): Chapters 16, 42, 51 [print] Freedman, Jonathan. The Temple of Culture: Assimilation and Anti-Semitism in Literary Anglo- America. Oxford: Oxford UP, 2000. – Chapter 1: The Jew in the Museum, pp15-54 [Available as ebook via SOLO] John Plotz, “The Semi-Detached Provincial Novel.” Victorian Studies, 53:3 (Fall 2011), 405-16. [print] Julia Sun-Joo Lee, The American Slave Narrative and the Victorian Novel. New York: Oxford UP, 2010. – Chapter on “The Slave Narrative in Jane Eyre” [Available as ebook via SOLO]

6. Gender and Sexualities. (MM leading) George Eliot, from “Silly Novels by Lady Novelists” Westminster Review, (Oct 1856): 442-461. [print] John Stuart Mill, from The Subjection of Women (1860): Chapter 1 http://oll.libertyfund.org/titles/mill-on-liberty-and-the-subjection-of-women-1879-ed Mona Caird, from ‘Marriage’, Westminster Review 130 (August 1880) [print] Ouida, ‘The New Woman’, North American Review 159 (May 1894) [print] John Addington Symonds, from A Problem in Greek Ethics: an Inquiry in to the Phenomenon of Sexual Inversion Addressed Especially to Medical Psychologists and Jurists. London: Privately Printed, 1908 [print] I (Introduction) to VIII (Myths of paiderastia) XVII (Relation of paiderastia to the fine arts) to XIX (Homosexuality among Greek women) Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, Epistemology of the Closet (1990)– Introduction and Chapter 4: The Beast in the Closet: James and the Writing of Homosexual Panic [print]

7. Faith, doubt and science. (DR leading) Extracts from Eliot’s translation of Strauss; Tennyson; Gaskell; Hardy [print]

36

Gowan Dawson and Bernard Lightman (eds), Victorian Science and Literature, 8 vols (London: Pickering and Chatto, 2011-12)—Suzy Anger and James Paradis, Intro. to Vol. 2 (Victorian Science as Cultural Authority) J. R. Lucas, ‘Wilberforce and Huxley: A Legendary Encounter’, http://users.ox.ac.uk/~jrlucas/legend.html John Henry Newman, From The Idea of a University (1852, 1873) New Haven, CT: Yale UP, 1996 [print] Discourse 6. Knowledge Its Own End; Discourse 7. Knowledge Viewed in Relation to Professional Skill; Discourse 8. Knowledge Viewed in Relation to Religion

Optional extra reading: George Levine (ed.), The Joy of Secularism: 11 Essays for How We Live Now (Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 2011)—esp. Bruce Robbins, ‘Enchantment, No Thank You’ [print]

8. Art, materialism and things. (MM leading) Walter Pater, ‘Leonardo da Vinci’, in Studies in the History of the Renaissance (1873) [print] John Ruskin, From The Stones of Venice (1851-3) [print] Vol. 2, chap. 6: The Savageness of Gothic Architecture Eds. E. T. Cook and Alexander Wedderburn. Lodon: George Allen, 1903-1912. Elaine Freedgood, The Ideas in Things: Fugitive Meaning in the Victorian Novel (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006)—chapter on Jane Eyre and mahogany [print] John Plotz, ‘Can the Sofa Speak?’: A Look at Thing Theory’, Criticism 47/1 (2005), 109-18 [print]Oscar Wilde, The Picture of Dorian Gray (1890-91), ch. 11. http://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/174

Optional extra reading: Bill Brown, ‘Thing Theory’, Critical Inquiry 28/1 (2001), 1-22 [print]

For information about the 1830-1914 Michaelmas Term B-Course, see page 65.

B-Course Hilary Term Dr Daniel Tyler ([email protected])

The strand-specific portion of the B-course will pick up where the methodological introduction left off. It will meet twice in Michaelmas term (in Week 7 and 8) and continue in Weeks 1-6 in Hilary Term: the final two meetings will be reserved for student presentations of essay topics. Readings will be provided in Michaelmas

1. Introduction to nineteenth-century manuscripts. Daniel Tyler. 2. Presenting Print and Its Meanings. Seamus Perry. 3. [Week One in HT] 'B list to C list': Byron, Conrad and the manuscripts of celebrity. Chris Fletcher. 4. Dickens and Serialisation. Clive Hurst. 5. Wildean Ephemer. Michèle Mendelssohn 6. Victorian Periodicals. Sally Shuttleworth. 7-8. Student presentations

37

M.ST. IN ENGLISH LITERATURE, 1900-PRESENT Convenors: Dr David Dwan, Hertford College: ([email protected]) Dr Marina Mackay, St Peter’s College: ([email protected])

A-Course This course will explore significant texts, themes and critical approaches in our period, drawing on Faculty expertise. You should read as much in the bibliography over the summer—certainly the primary literary texts listed in the seminar reading for each week. Each week two or more members of the group will present papers based on the material. The allocation of presenters will be made at the introductory meeting in week 0.

Week 1: Models of Modernity (Dr Dwan and Dr Mackay) How can we tell the story of literature from 1900 to the present? The nature of the overview will vary according to which authors, which literatures, and which modes of writing. This seminar, without pretending to offer a complete picture, will consider three influential accounts of modernity.

Seminar reading: Perry Anderson, ‘Modernity and Revolution.’ New Left Review, 144 (1984), 96-113. Rita Felski, ‘Modernism and Modernity: Engendering Literary History’, in Lisa Rado, ed., Rereading Modernism (New York: Garland, 1994), 191-208 Friedman, Susan Stanford. ‘Definitional Excursions: The Meanings of Modern/ Modernity/ Modernism’, Modernism / Modernity, 8 (2001), 493-513 Copies of these texts will be distributed at the meeting in week 0, but if you can obtain them before the start of term, please read them.

Week 2: Colonial Contact Zones (Professor Elleke Boehmer) The seminar will consider some of the ways in which what we now call modernist writing registered the impact of empire, in particular the incursion of the stranger, on the colonial metropolis. Was modernism a response to a far more intensive and disruptive contact with other cultures than Europe had registered hitherto?

Seminar reading: W.B Yeats, Collected Poems --- , Introduction to Rabindranath Tagore, Gitanjali (1912) T.S. Eliot, The Waste Land (1922) Virginia Woolf, Mrs Dalloway (1924)

Further reading: Edward Said, Culture and Imperialism (1993) (especially chapters 1-3) Michael Levenson (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Modernism, 2nd edn. Laura Doyle and Laura Winkiel (eds.) Geomodernisms: Race, Modernism, Modernity (2005) Mark Wollaeger (ed.), Global Modernism (2011)

Week 3: Modernist Narrative (Ms Jeri Johnson) Seminar reading: James Joyce, Ulysses (1922) Virginia Woolf, Mrs Dalloway (1925)

38

Week 4: Theatre and Revolution (Dr Kirsten Shepherd-Barr) This session explores what constitutes a theatrical revolution. We will consider the impact of realism and naturalism in the 1880s and 1890s as important forerunners to theatrical innovations in the twentieth century, asking how these were revolutionary then and and how they are critically understood now. We will take three plays as case studies and look at how the initial responses to them compare with later critical assessments and analyses, for instance in the different perspectives on ‘1956 and all that’. We will also think about methodological challenges inherent in studying theatrical revolution, such the approach of reconstructing past performances and the need to take full account of the dual nature of theatre as both text and performance.

Seminar reading: Samuel Beckett, Waiting for Godot (1955) Sarah Kane, Blasted (1995) John Osborne, Look Back in Anger (1956) You will also be given copies of some of the initial reviews of the three plays.

Further reading: John Russell Taylor, Anger and After: A Guide to the New British Drama (London: Methuen1962), introduction, chapters 1-2 Christopher Innes, Modern British Drama 1890-1990 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992), pp. 98-112 Graham Saunders, “Love Me or Kill Me”: Sarah Kane and the Theatre of Extremes (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2002), pp. 1-70 Dan Rebellato, 1956 and All That: The Making of Modern British Drama (London: Routledge, 1999), pp. 1-36, and the rest of book if you have time. For further theatrical context see Michael Billington, State of the Nation (London: Faber, 2007)

Week 5: Keywords and Contested Signs (Dr Michael Whitworth) How can we focus the cultural history of the period using the history of linguistic signs? What are the strengths and weaknesses of such an approach? What methodological questions does it raise? In this session we will be studying entries from Raymond Williams’s classic study and from more recent projects in a similar vein, and reading criticisms of these works.

Seminar reading: Cuddy-Keane, Melba, Adam Hammond, and Alexandra Peat. Modernism: Keywords (Oxford: Wiley- Blackwell, 2014). Leary, John Patrick. ‘Keywords for the Age of Austerity’ https://theageofausterity.wordpress.com/ Williams, Raymond. Keywords (1976, or, ideally, the expanded 1983 edition).

Further reading: If you can obtain the following easily, then read them; copies will be provided in term time: Empson, William. ‘Compacted Doctrines’ (1977). Argufying: Essays on Literature and Culture, ed. John Haffenden (London: Chatto & Windus, 1987), 185–6. A review of Williams, first published in the New York Review of Books. Skinner, Quentin. ‘The Idea of a Cultural Lexicon.’ Essays in Criticism 29 no.3 (July 1979), pp.205- 24.

39

Week 6: Formalisms vs Historicisms (Dr Kate McLoughlin) Seminar reading: Hope Mirlees, Paris: A Poem [1918] in Collected Poems, ed. Sandeep Parmar (Manchester: Carcanet, 2011) (a facsimile is accessible at http://hopemirrlees.com/mirrlees-resources/) Theodor W. Adorno, ‘Punctuation Marks’ [1956] in Notes to Literature, Vol. 1 (New York: Columbia University Press, 1991), 91-97 Rita Felski, ‘Context Stinks!’, Context? special issue of New Literary History, 42 (2011), 573-91 Jean E. Howard ‘The New Historicism in Renaissance Studies’ in Renaissance Historicism: Selections from English Literary Renaissance, ed. Arthur F. Kinney and Dan Collins (Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1987), 3-33. Marjorie Levenson, ‘What is New Formalism?’, PMLA, 122 (2007), 558-69. (long version at http://sitemaker.umich.edu/pmla_article/home). Terry Eagleton, excerpt from ‘Conclusion: Political Criticism’ in Literary Theory: an Introduction, 1st ed. (Oxford: Blackwell, 1983), 204 (starting, ‘My intention’…) -209. John Bender and David E. Wellbery, ‘Rhetoricality: On the Modernist Return of Rhetoric’ in The Ends of Rhetoric: History, Theory, Practice, ed. John Bender and David E. Wellbery (Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 1990), 3-39.

Further reading: http://hopemirrlees.com/ Bruce Bailey, ‘A Note on The Waste Land and Hope Mirrlees’ Paris’, T. S. Eliot Newsletter (Fall 1974), 3-4 Julia Briggs, ‘Modernism’s Lost Hope: Virginia Woolf, Hope Mirrlees and the Printing of Paris’, Reading Virginia Woolf (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 2006), pp. 80-95 ___, ‘Hope Mirrlees and Continental Modernism’, Gender in Modernism: New Geographies, Complex Intersections, ed. Bonnie Kime Scott (Urbana and Chicago, IL: University of Illinois Press, 2007), pp. 261-303

Week 7: Embodiment (Dr Patrick Hayes) This seminar will consider some recent debates about the relationship between literature and philosophy. Such debates stretch back to Plato’s Republic, and often turn on questions about the value (or otherwise) of literature as an embodied form of discourse. This longstanding discussion has been reanimated by some of Coetzee’s recent work, which explores the relationship between the human and the animal with particular intensity.

Seminar reading: J.M. Coetzee, ‘The Philosophers and the Animals’, ‘The Poets and the Animals’, in Elizabeth Costello (2003); Disgrace (1999) A copy of the following article will be circulated to you during term: Cora Diamond, ‘The Difficulty of Reality and the Difficulty of Philosophy’, Journal of Literature and the History of Ideas, 1.2 (2003)

Further reading: Stanley Cavell, Philosophy and Animal Life (2008) Cora Diamond, The Realistic Spirit (1991) Raimond Gaita, The Philosopher’s Dog (2002) Cary Wolfe, What is Posthumanism? (2009)

40

Week 8: Late styles (Dr David Dwan) This seminar aims to explores different and sometimes rival conceptions of ‘lateness’ in contemporary poetry - the poet’s reflections on his/her own aging; the maturity of his/her own distinctive voice or style; the lateness of a cultural movement or what we might call mannerism; the cultural practices of an epoch defined by a sense of its own lateness - or what we used to call postmodernism. How do these issues bear upon poetic form and our broader understanding of the function or final cause of poetry?

Seminar reading: Seamus Heaney, District and Circle (London: Faber, 2006) Paul Muldoon, Songs and Sonnets (London: Enitharmon, 2012)

Further Reading: Theodor Adorno, ‘Late Style in Beethoven’, Essays on Music, trans. Susan Gillespie (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2002) Edward Said, from On Late Style (London: Bloomsbury, 2006)

For information about the Post-1900 Michaelmas Term B-Course, see page 66.

Hilary Term B-Course

The strand-specific portion of the B-course will pick up where the methodological introduction left off. It will meet twice for introductory sessions in Michaelmas term (in Week 7 and 8) and continue in Weeks 1-6 in Hilary Term: the final four meetings will be reserved for student presentations of essay topics.

Readings will be provided in Michaelmas.

1. The Institution of Literature (1). Peter McDonald. 2. Reading Paratexts. Michael Whitworth 3. (Week One in HT). Using Publishers’ Archives. Michael Whitworth 4. Periodicals as Research Materials. Michael Whitworth 5. The Institution of Literature (2). Peter McDonald. 6. Ulysses and the Problem of the Text. Jeri Johnson 7-10. Student Presentations (1hr in week 4, 2 x 1 hr in week 5, 1 hr in week 6)

Depending on numbers, it may not be necessary to use all the student presentation slots, or it may be necessary to add an extra one in 6th week.

41

M.ST. IN ENGLISH AND AMERICAN STUDIES

Convenors: Professor Christine Gerrard [email protected] Dr Rachel Malkin [email protected]

Details of the A-Course are below. If students wish to take the B-Course, the expectation is that they will opt for the post-1900 course in each term. However, if their research interests lie in another period, they should contact their convenors and arrange to be included in the most relevant B-Course.

If students do not wish to take the B-Course option, they should choose 4 C-Course options. They will be examined on 3 of these 4 courses. For further information, please see the Handbook.

For students in the English and American strand, the principal subject of the MSt thesis must be an American writer.

A-Course

Professor Christine Gerrard, Dr. Rachel Malkin, and Dr. Lloyd Pratt

Week 1: The American Exceptionalists

Melville, Herman. Moby-Dick. 1851. Chicago: Northwestern University and Newberry Library, 1988. Arvin, Newton. Herman Melville. 1950. New York: Grove Press, 2002. ----. “Individualism and American Writers.” The Nation (October 14, 1931). ----. “Religion and the Intellectuals.” Partisan Review (January 1950). ----. “Our Country and Our Culture.” Partisan Review (May 1952). Bercovitch, Sacvan. The Puritan Origins of the American Self. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1975. Chase, Richard. The American Novel and Its Tradition. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1957. Fiedler, Leslie. Love and Death in the American Novel. New York: Stein and Day, 1960. Kazin, Alfred. On Native Ground: A Study in Modern American Prose Literature. 1942. New York: Harcout, Brace & Company, 1992. Lawrence, DH. Studies in Classic American Literature. 1923. New York: Penguin, 1990. Lewis, R. W. B. The American Adam: Innocence, Tragedy, and Tradition in the Nineteenth Century. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1955. Marx, Leo. The Machine in the Garden: Technology and the Pastoral Ideal in America. New York: Oxford University Press, 1964. Matthiessen, F. O. American Renaissance: Art and Expression in the Age of Emerson and Whitman: New York: Oxford University Press, 1941. Miller, Perry. Errand into the Wilderness. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1956. Trilling, Lionel. The Liberal Imagination: Essays on Literature and Society. 1950. New York: NYRB Classics, 2008. Winter, Yvor. Primitivism and Decadence: A Study of American Experimental Poetry. New York: Arrow Editions, 1937.

Week 2: The Early Atlantic Novel

Lennox, Charlotte. The Female Quixote. 1752. Ed. Margaret Dalziel. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989.

42

Tenney, Tabitha Gilman. Female Quixotism: Exhibited in the Romantic Opinions and Extravagant Adventures of Dorcasina Sheldon. 1801. Ed. Cathy Davidson. New York: Oxford University Press, 1992. Frost, Linda. “The Body Politic in Tabitha Gilman Tenney’s Female Quixotism.” Early American Literature 32.2 (1997): 113-34. Giles, Paul, Transatlantic Insurrections: British Culture and the Formation of American Literature 1730-1860. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 2001. Bannet, Eve Tavor. “Quixotes, Imitations, and Transatlantic Genres.” Eighteenth-Century Studies 40.4 (2007): 553-69. Samuels, Shirley. Romances of the Republic: Women, the Family, and Violence in the Literature of the Early American Nation. New York: Oxford University Press, 1996.

Week 3: Emerson, Thoreau, and Carlyle: The Non-Fiction Essay as Criticism

Carlyle, Thomas. Sartor Resartus. 1833. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2008. Emerson, Ralph Waldo. “Nature” (1836) in Collected Works of Emerson. Vol. 1. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1971. Thoreau, Henry David. Walden. 1854. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2004. Arsić, Branka. Bird Relics: Grief and Vitalism in Thoreau. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2015. ----. On Leaving: A Reading in Emerson. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2010. Cameron, Sharon. Impersonality: Seven Essays. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2007. Cavell, Stanley. Conditions Handsome and Unhandsome: The Constitution of Emersonian Perfectionism. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1988. ----. The Senses of Walden. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1992. Tamarkin, Elisa. Anglophilia: Deference, Devotion, and Antebellum America. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2007.

Week 4: Whitman and Wordsworth: Poetry and Autobiography

Whitman, Walt, “Song of Myself.” Leaves of Grass and Other Writings. 1855. Ed. Michael Moon. New York: Norton, 2002. 26-78. ----. http://whitmanarchive.org/published/LG/ Wordsworth, William. “The Two-Part Prelude of 1799.” The Prelude: 1799, 1805, 1850. Ed. M. H. Abrams, Jonathan Wordsworth, Stephen Gill. New York: Norton, 1979. Blasing, Mutlu Konuk. “Walt Whitman, a Kosmos, of Manhattan the Sun.” The Art of Life: Studies in American Autobiographical Literature: Austin: University of Texas Press, 1977. Fletcher, Angus. A New Theory for American Poetry: Democracy, the Environment and the Future of Imagination. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2004. Gill, Stephen. William Wordsworth: The Prelude. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1991. Larson, Kerry C. “Song of Myself.” A Companion to Walt Whitman. Ed. Donald C Cummings. Oxford: Blackwell Publishing, 2005. Online. Lawrence, D. H. Studies in Classic American Literature. 1923. New York: Penguin, 1990. Milnes, Tim. The Prelude: A Reader’s Guide to Essential Criticism. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 2009. Moon, Michael. Disseminating Whitman: Revision and Corporeality in Leaves of Grass. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1991. Schmidgall, Gary. Containing Multitudes: Walt Whitman and the British Literary Tradition. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2014. Ziff, Larzer. Literary Democracy. New York: Penguin, 1982.

43

Week 5: The American Gothic

Brown, Charles Brockden. Edgar Huntly; or, Memoirs of a Sleep-Walker. 1799. Ed. Philip Barnard and Stephen Shapiro. New York: Hackett Publishing, 2006. Poe, Edgar Allan Poe. “The Tell-Tale Heart”, “William Wilson”, “The Imp of the Perverse”, “The Fall of the House of Usher” and “The Black Cat”. The Selected Writings of Edgar Allan Poe. Ed. G. R. Thompson. New York: Norton, 2004. Herdman, John. The Double in Nineteenth-Century Fiction: The Shadow Life. New York: MacMillan, 1991. Luciano, Dana. “The Gothic Meets Sensation.” A Companion to American Fiction, 1780-1865. Ed. Shirley Samuels. Oxford: Wiley, 2004. 314-29. Rosenthal, Bernard, ed. Critical Essays on Charles Brockden Brown. Boston: G. K. Hall, 1981. Kennedy, J. Gerald. Poe, Death, and the Life of Writing. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1987. Edmundson, Mark. Nightmare on Main Street: Angels, Sadomasochism, and the Culture of Gothic. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1997. Ginsberg, Lesley. “Slavery and the Gothic Horror of Poe’s ‘The Black Cat.’” Ed. Robert K. Martin and Eric Savoy. American Gothic: New Interventions in a National Narrative. Iowa City: University of Iowa Press, 1998. 99-128. Goddu, Teresa A. Gothic America: Narrative, History, and Nation. New York: Columbia University Press. 1997.

Week 6: Midcentury Criticism and the Novel

Lionel Trilling. The Middle of the Journey. 1947. New York: NYRB Classics, 2002. Lionel Trilling. The Liberal Imagination. 1950. New York: NYRB Classics, 2008. (Esp. “Preface,” “Reality in America,” “Manners, Morals, and the Novel,” “The Princess Casamassima,” “The Meaning of a Literary Idea.”) America and the Intellectuals: A Symposium. New York: Partisan Review, 1953. Originally published as “Our Country and Our Culture” in Partisan Review (1952.) Anderson, Anderson. “Character and Ideology: The Case of Cold War Liberalism.” New Literary History 42.2 (Spring 2011): 209-29. Belleto, Steven. “Inventing Other Realities: What the Cold War Means for Literary Studies.” Uncertain Empire: American History and the Idea of the Cold War. Ed. Joel Isaac and Duncan Bell. New York: Oxford University Press, 2012. 75-88. Belletto, Steven and Daniel Grausam, eds. American Literature and Culture in an Age of Cold War: A Critical Reassessment. Iowa City: University of Iowa Press, 2012. Bender, Thomas. “Lionel Trilling and American Culture.” American Quarterly 42.2 (June 1990): 324- 47. Dickstein, Morris. “Fiction and Political Fact.” Bookforum (June/July/Aug 2008): http://www.bookforum.com/inprint/015_02/2458 Grausam, Daniel. On Endings: American Postmodern Fiction and the Cold War. Charlottesville: University of Virginia Press, 2011. Hutchison, Anthony. Writing the Republic: Liberalism and Morality in American Political Fiction. New York: Columbia University Press, 2007. Jumonville, Neil, ed. The New York Intellectuals Reader. New York: Routledge, 2007

Kimmage, Michael. The Conservative Turn: Lionel Trilling, Whittaker Chambers, and the Lessons of Anticommunism. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard UP, 2009. Kirsch, Adam. Why Trilling Matters. New Haven: Yale University Press, 2011. Nadel. Alan. Containment Culture: American Narratives, Postmodernism, and the Atomic Age 44

Durham: Duke University Press, 1995. Piette, Adam. The Literary Cold War: 1945 to Vietnam. Edinburgh: University of Edinburgh Press, 2009. Rodden, John, ed. Lionel Trilling and the Critics: Opposing Selves. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1999. Schaub, Thomas Hill. American Fiction in the Cold War. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1991 Small, Helen, ed. The Public Intellectual. Oxford: Blackwell, 2002. Wegner, Philip. Life Between Two Deaths: US Culture in the Long Nineties. Durham: Duke University Press, 2009.

Week 7: Douglass and Morrison: The (Neo-) Slave Narrative

Douglass, Frederick. Narrative of the Life of Frederick Douglass, An American Slave, Written by Himself (1845) in The Frederick Douglass Papers. Series Two: Autobiographical Writings. Volume 1. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1999. Morrison, Toni. Beloved. 1987. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 2006. Gates, Henry Louis. The Signifying Monkey: A Theory of African American Literature. New York: Oxford University Press, 1988. Hartman, Saidiya. Scenes of Subjection: Terror, Slavery, and Self-Making in Nineteenth-Century America. New York: Oxford, 1997. Rushdy, Ashraf H. A. Neo-Slave Narratives: Studies in the Social Logic of a Literary Form. New York: Oxford University Press, 1999. Smith, Valerie. Not Just Race, Not Just Gender: Black Feminist Readings. New York: Routledge Press, 1998. Warren, Kenneth. What Was African American Literature? Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2011.

Week 8: American Literature in the World

TBD

For information about the Post-1900 Michaelmas Term B-Course, see page 66; for the Post- 1900 Hilary Term B-Course, see page 41.

45

M.ST. IN WORLD LITERATURES IN ENGLISH Convenors: Professor Elleke Boehmer, Wolfson College: [email protected] Dr Michelle Kelly: [email protected]

A Course:

The Colonial, the Postcolonial, the World: Literature, Contexts and Approaches

The A-Course comprises 8 1.5 hour seminars and is intended to provide a range of perspectives on some of the core debates, themes and issues shaping the study of world and postcolonial literatures in English. In each case the seminar will be led by a member of the Faculty of English with relevant expertise, in dialogue with one or more short presentations from students on aspects of the week’s topic. There is no assessed A-Course work, but students are asked to give at least one presentation on the course, and to attend all the seminars. You should read as much in the bibliography over the summer—certainly the primary literary texts listed in the seminar reading for each week. The allocation of presenters will be made at the meeting in week 0.

Michaelmas Term 2015

Week 1: Colonial Discourse (Elleke Boehmer) Rudyard Kipling, ‘Without Benefit of Clergy’, ‘Lispeth’, Collected Poems Extracts from Empire Writing, ed. Elleke Boehmer (OUP)

Further Reading: Brantlinger, Patrick. The Rule of Darkness: British Literature and Imperialism 1830-1914 (1988) Anne McClintock. “The Lay of the Land: Genealogies of Imperialism.” Imperial Leather: Race, Gender and Sexuality in the Colonial Contest (New York and London: Routledge, 1995). Edward Said, Culture and Imperialism (Cape, 1993) Nicholas Thomas, Colonialism’s Culture Patrick Williams and Laura Chrisman, Colonial Discourse and Postcolonial Theory (1993) Robert Young. “Hybridity and Diaspora.” Colonial Desire: Hybridity in Theory, Culture, and Race. (New York and London: Routledge, 1995)

Week 2: World Literature (Sowon Park) World Literature: A Reader, eds., Theo D’haen, Cesar Dominguez and Mads Rosendahl Thomsen (Routledge, 2013). See especially: chapter 19 Franco Moretti, ‘Conjectures on World Literature’ and ‘More Conjectures’; chap 25, Shu-mei Shih, ‘Global Literature and the Technologies of Recognition’. Memoirs of a Korean Queen, trans., Yang-hi Coe-Wall (1985). or, The Memoirs of Lady Hyegyong: The Autobiographical Writings of a Crown Princess of Eighteenth-Century Korea, trans., Ja-Hyun Kim Haboush (1996). Margaret Drabble, The Red Queen (2004).

Week 3: After Orientalism (Ankhi Mukherjee) Edward Said’s Orientalism, published in 1978, is a postcolonial classic and arguably the single most influential critical work or cultural event to define the purview of colonial discourse analysis. In this A-course seminar we will examine the status of Orientalism as a source book for the discipline of postcolonial studies that has, in the words of Spivak, "blossomed into a garden where the marginal

46

can speak and be spoken, even spoken for." Topics to be considered are: Orientalism as a political doctrine; Orientalism and the counter-history of the European literary tradition; Orientalism and literary humanism.

Primary Text: Said, Edward, Orientalism (1978)

Further Reading: Bhabha, Homi K., The Location of Culture (1994) --, ed., Nation and Narration (1990) Leask, Nigel, British Romantic Writers and the East: Anxieties of Empire (1992) Macfie, A. L., ed., Orientalism: A Reader (2000) Majeed, Javed. Ungoverned Imaginings: James Mill’s The History of British India and Orientalism (1992) Pratt, Mary Louise, Imperial Eyes: Travel Writing and Transculturation (1992) Said, Edward W., The World, the Text and the Critic (1983) Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty, In Other Worlds: Essays in Cultural Politics (1987) Suleri, Sara, The Rhetoric of English India (1992) Young, Robert. White Mythologies: Writing History and the West (1990)

Week 4: The Question of History (Patrick Hayes) This seminar will focus on recent questions about the kinds of insight and value that postcolonial studies seeks to derive from its regard for the past, especially the legacies of empire. Focus will be on divergent ways of thinking about history in the Caribbean – a context that has generated an unusually rich and complex response to this theme.

Texts: V.S. Naipaul, The Middle Passage (1960) Derek Walcott, Another Life (1973)

Readings: Ann Laura Stoler, 'Imperial Debris: Reflections on Ruins and Ruination', Cultural Anthropology 23.3 (2008) 191-219 Robert Young, 'Postcolonial Remains', New Literary History 43.1 (2012) 19-42

Week 5: Black Diaspora and Transatlantic Space (Lloyd Pratt) Du Bois, The Souls of Black Folk (1903) James Baldwin, “The Stranger in the Village” (1955) Saidiya Hartman, Lose Your Mother: A Journey along the Atlantic Slave Route (2007)

Readings: Edwards, Brent Hayes. “Prologue,” “Variations on a Preface,” and “Feminism and L’Internationalisme Noir: Paulette Nardal.” In The Practice of Diaspora: Literature, Translation, and the Rise of Black Internationalism (2003) Gilroy, Paul. “Preface” and “The Black Atlantic as a Counterculture of Modernity.” In The Black Atlantic (1993) Roach, Joseph. “Introduction: History, Memory, and Performance” and “Echoes in the Bone.” In Cities of the Dead: Circum-Atlantic Performance (1996)

47

Week 6: Land and Environment (Michelle Kelly) Amitav Ghosh, The Hungry Tide Jamaica Kincaid, A Small Place Dipesh Chakrabarty, ‘Postcolonial Studies and the Challenge of Climate Change.’ New Literary History 43.1 (2012): 1-18. Pablo Mukherjee, ‘Surfing the Second Waves: Amitav’s Ghosh’s Tidal Country.’ New Formations 59 (2006): 144-157.

Week 7: Magical Realism (Ben Holgate) Magical realism has been described as “the literary language of the emergent postcolonial world” (Homi Bhabha) and “an international commodity” that is “alive and well in postcolonial contexts” (Zamora and Faris). This seminar explores how the narrative mode has become an important factor in postcolonial literature over the past three decades, focusing on Salman Rushdie’s canonical magical- realist novel, Midnight’s Children (1981).

Primary Text Salman, Rushdie, Midnight’s Children (London: Jonathan Cape, 1981).

Further Reading: Maggie Ann Bowers, Magic(al) Realism. Abingdon: Routledge, 2004. Salman Rushdie, Imaginary Homelands, Essays and Criticism 1981-1991. London: Granta, 1991 Chris Warnes, Magical Realism and the Postcolonial Novel (2009) Lois Parkinson Zamora, and Wendy B. Faris, eds. Magical Realism: Theory, History, Community. Durham & London: Duke University Press, 1995. See especially: Introduction, and the Merivale, Slemon and Wilson essays.

Week 8: Classics in Anglophone Postcolonial Literature (Justine McConnell)

Primary Texts: Ralph Ellison, Invisible Man (1952) Wole Soyinka, The Bacchae of Euripides: A Communion Rite (1973) Derek Walcott, Omeros (1990)

Secondary:

Barbara Goff & Michael Simpson, ‘Intersections and Networks’, in Goff & Simpson, Crossroads in the Black Aegean: Oedipus, Antigone, and Dramas of the African Diaspora (OUP, 2007), 39-78. Emily Greenwood, Afro-Greeks: Dialogues between Anglophone Caribbean Literature and Classics in the Twentieth Century (OUP, 2010) Patrice Rankine, Ulysses in Black: Ralph Ellison, Classicism, and African American Literature (University of Wisconsin Press, 2006)

B-Course:

The B-course for the MSt in World Literature strand introduces students to the methodologies and theories of bibliography, manuscript studies, textual scholarship, and book history framed within the

48

broad concerns and methodologies of world literature book history and the emergence and institutionalisation of the categories of world and postcolonial literature within global and local literary spaces and the publishing industry. The course begins in Michaelmas with a general introduction to theories and methodologies of material textual scholarship (Material Texts 1900- present) alongside an introduction to manuscript study and archive use in world literature (Material Methodology), before moving on to specific discussion of the institutions of world literature (in late Michaelmas and Hilary), culminating in student presentations and feedback on the B-Course essay project in week 3-6 of Hilary.

In preparation for the world literature subject specific aspect of the B-Course, students are asked to familiarise themselves with the suggested reading listed below, ideally before the start of term and at least before week 7 of Michaelmas. Detailed seminar descriptions for Hilary are also included below.

MICHAELMAS TERM 2015

WEEK 1-6: Material Texts Post-1900

See course details under Material Texts Post-1900

WEEK 2-8: Material Methodology (Michelle Kelly)

An introduction to manuscript study and archive use in world literature, with weekly classes on the transcription, editing and use of manuscript materials. The course will focus on practical transcription skills, and will conclude with a compulsory examination on these methods in week 8. The course is a compulsory component of the B-Course for the MSt in World Literature.

WEEK 1, 7, 8: World Literature Book History

WEEK 1: Literary Activism Now (Friday 10am-6pm, St Hugh’s)

A one-day symposium about corporate literary culture and the public sphere involving academics, publishers and writers.

WEEK 7: Instituting World Literature I (Peter McDonald)

WEEK 8: OUP Archive visit (Martin Maw and Caroline Davis)

HILARY TERM 2015

WEEK 1: Analysing Sources in Anglophone Postcolonial Book History: Magazines, Courts, Schools (Asha Rogers)

WEEK 2: The Industry of Postcolonial/World Literature: Prizes, Festivals, Anthologies (Michelle Kelly)

Oxford Brookes Booker Archive (Caroline Davis)

WEEK 3: Instituting World Literature II (Peter McDonald)

WEEK 4-6: Student presentations

WORLD LITERATURE BOOK HISTORY: BACKGROUND READING

49

Pierre Bourdieu, The Field of Cultural Production: Essays on Art and Literature. Edited by Randal Johnson. Cambridge: Polity, 1993. Pascale Casanova, The World Republic of Letters. Trans. M.B. DeBevoise. Cambridge, MS: Harvard University Press, 2007. Robert Darnton, ‘What is the History of Books?’ in The Kiss of Lamourette. London: Faber and Faber, 1990, 107-135. David Finkelstein and Alistair McCleery, The Book History Reader. London: Routledge, 2006. ---- An Introduction to Book History. London: Routledge, 2013. Peter D. McDonald, “Ideas of the Book and Histories of Literature: after Theory?” PMLA 121.1 (2006): 214-228. D. F. McKenzie, Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999. John B. Thompson, Merchants of Culture: the Publishing Business in the Twenty-First Century. Cambridge: Polity, 2012.

EXAMPLES FROM WORLD LITERATURE BOOK HISTORY

BOOK LENGTH STUDIES Sarah Brouillette, Postcolonial Writers and the Global Literary Marketplace. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2011. Caroline Davis, Creating Postcolonial Literature: African Writers and British Publishers. London: Palgrave Macmillan, 2013. Robert Fraser, Book History Through Postcolonial Eyes: Rewriting the Script. London: Routledge, 2008. Isabel Hofmeyr, The Portable Bunyan: A Transnational History of the Pilgrim’s Progress. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2000. ---. Ghandi’s Printing Press: Experiments in Slow Reading. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2013. Graham Huggan, The Postcolonial Exotic: Marketing the Margins. London: Routledge, 2001. Peter J. Kalliney, Commonwealth of Letters: British Literary Culture and the Emergence of Postcolonial Aesthetics. New York: Oxford University Press, 2013. Gail Low, Publishing the Postcolonial. London: Routledge, 2011. Claire Squires, Marketing Literature: The Making of Contemporary Writing in Britain. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2007. Andrew van der Vlies, South African Textual Cultures: White, Black, Read All Over. Manchester: Manchester University Press, 2007.

EDITED COLLECTIONS

Bethan Benwell, James Proctor and Gemma Robinson, eds. Postcolonial Audiences: Readers, Viewers and Reception. New York and Abingdon: Routledge, 2012.

Andrew van der Vlies, ed. Print, Text and Book Cultures in South Africa. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press, 2012.

JOURNAL SPECIAL ISSUE: Journal of Commonwealth Literature 48.1 (2013)

50

M.ST. IN ENGLISH LANGUAGE Convenor: Professor Deborah Cameron, Worcester College: [email protected]

A-Course: Topics in English Language: History, Structure and Use Seminar leaders: Michaelmas term, Professor Simon Horobin (weeks 1-3) & Professor Lynda Mugglestone (weeks 4-6); Hilary term, Professor Deborah Cameron (weeks 1-6)

This core course, taught through 6 weekly sessions in each of Michaelmas and Hilary Terms, provides a broad context in which to place the more specific inquiries students will pursue in their chosen optional courses. The first term’s work focuses on tracing the historical development of the English language from the Middle Ages to the present day, with attention given to the causes and mechanisms as well as the facts of linguistic change over time. Seminars in Hilary Term will take up a series of issues and debates in the study of present-day English.

Michaelmas Term: Topics in the History of English

A note on reading: it is not expected that all the references listed for each session will be read by every student. Priority should be given to required readings (in the programme they are marked with asterisks); you are advised to begin your reading preparation before you arrive in Oxford. Fuller lists are provided to enable you to pursue particular interests, both on this A-course (where you may be asked to give a presentation on a specific topic) and for B or C-course assignments to which the readings listed may be relevant.

Required reading: Horobin, S. and J. Smith (2002), An Introduction to Middle English (Edinburgh, EUP) Smith, J. J. (2009), Old English: A Linguistic Introduction (Cambridge: CUP)

Also useful: Blake, N.F., ed. (1992), The Cambridge History of the English Language Volume II (Cambridge: CUP) [CHEL II] Görlach, M. (1994), The Linguistic History of English (Basingstoke: Palgrave) Hogg, R. (1992), A Grammar of Old English: Phonology (Oxford: Blackwell) Hogg, R, ed. (1992), The Cambridge History of the English Language Volume I (Cambridge: CUP) [CHEL I] Lass, R. (1997), Historical Linguistics and Language Change (Cambridge: CUP) ----- (1994), Old English: A Historical Linguistic Companion (Cambridge: CUP) McMahon, A. (1994), Understanding Language Change (Cambridge: CUP) Momma, H. and M. Matto, eds (2008), A Companion to the History of the English Language (Oxford: Blackwell) Mugglestone, L. ed. (2006), The Oxford History of English (Oxford: OUP) Samuels, M.L. (1972), Linguistic Evolution with special reference to English (Cambridge: CUP) Smith, J. J. (2007), Sound Change and the History of English (Oxford: OUP) Smith, J. J. (1996), An Historical Study of English: Function, Form and Change (London: Routledge)

Programme

Week 1: Change in Writing Systems

51

The nature of writing systems and the relationship between speech and writing; the origins of the alphabet and its adoption for writing English in the Middle Ages; dialect and standardisation in the history of English spelling.

Required reading: CHEL vols I and II, ‘Old English Dialects’ and ‘Middle English Dialectology’. Cook, V., (2004), The English Writing System (London: Hodder), chapter 1. Scragg, D.G. (1974), A History of English Spelling (Manchester: Manchester UP). Smith, J. J. (1996), An Historical Study of English: Function, Form and Change (London: Routledge), chapter 4.

Week 2: Change in the Sound System Theories of sound change; problems of evidence; sound changes in Old and Middle English.

Required reading: CHEL vols. I and II, ‘Phonology and Morphology’. McMahon, A. (1994), Understanding Language Change (Cambridge: CUP), chapters 2 and 3. Smith, J. J. (2007), Sound Change and the History of English (Oxford: OUP), chapters 1 and 2. Smith, J. J. (1996), An Historical Study of English: Function, Form and Change (London: Routledge), ch 5.

Week 3: Change in the Lexicon Inheritance, Borrowing, Word Formation, Semantic Change.

Required reading: CHEL vols. I and II, ‘Semantics and Vocabulary’. Durkin, P (2009), The Oxford Guide to Etymology (Oxford: OUP) Hughes, G (2000), A History of English Words (Oxford: Blackwell) McMahon, A (1994), Understanding Language Change (Cambridge: CUP), chapter 7. Smith, J. J. (2006), An Historical Study of English: Function, Form and Change (London: Routledge), ch 6.

Week 4. Writing Early Modern English This week will explore the changing identity of English in the early Modern period, looking at aspects of linguistic self-consciousness (spelling reform, lexical purism) as well as identifiable patterns of linguistic change and variation. It will focus, in particular, on the perceived need to translate or rewrite earlier works into an English now seen as markedly different. Such translations through time enable detailed consideration of the nature of early Modern English, and the patterns of both gain and loss in evidence since late ME. You should try and read extensively in at least three of the core text books before you arrive.

John Dryden, Fables, Ancient and Modern (London, 1700) Benson, L. (ed.) The Riverside Chaucer.

Core text books: Barber, Charles. (1997) Early Modern English (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press). Gorlach, Manfred. (1991). Introduction to Early Modern English (Cambridge; Cambridge University Press).

52

Nevalainen, Terttu (2006) An Introduction to Early Modern English. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. ---- ‘Early Modern English’, in Mugglestone, L. (ed.) (2012), The Oxford History of English. Lass, Roger (ed). The Cambridge History of the English Language 1476-1776. Vol. 3 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999)

Week 5. Change and anxiety: prescriptive and descriptive approaches. This week will focus on the eighteenth century, and in particular on the rise of reference books, a new generic designation which emerges at the close of this period. It will examine the backdrop of anxieties about change, variation, and standardization, looking at language attitudes in contemporary writings on phonology, lexis, grammar, and morphology, via the works of writers such as Jonathan Swift, Thomas Sheridan, Samuel Johnson, and Robert Lowth., as well as at processes of codification and representation in grammars and dictionaries. You should try and read extensively in the texts marked by * before you arrive.

*Tieken Boon von Ostade, Ingrid (2009). An Introduction to Late Modern English (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press). *Beal, Joan C. (2004). English in Modern Times 1700-1945 (London: Arnold) *Goerlach, Manfred (2001). Eighteenth-Century English (Cambridge; Cambridge University Press) * Hickey, Raymond (2010) (ed.) Eighteenth-Century English Ideology and Change (Cambridge: CUP) Kolb, G. and De Maria, R. (2005). Johnson on the English Language. The Yale Edition of the Works of Samuel Johnson XVIII (New Haven: Yale University Press). Leonard, S. (1962). The Doctrine of Correctness in English Usage, 1700-1800 (New York: Russell and Russell). Tieken-Boon van Ostade, I.M. (2011) The Bishop’s Grammar. Robert Lowth and the Rise of Prescriptivism (Oxford: OUP).

Week 6. Standards and standardization This week will explore the complex nature of modern ‘standard English’, using a range of approaches, and examining in detail the reality of language practice across a range of registers, both private and public, and in script, print, as well as in electronic discourses. It will focus, in particular, on the evidence of on-going change and variability, and at how we might determine exactly what ‘standard English’ is. [Works marked with asterisks should be read before the start of the course]

*Milroy, J and Milroy, L. (2012). Authority in language: Investigating Standard English (Milton Park: Routledge). * Bex, T. and J. Watts (eds.) (1999) Standard English. The Widening Debate (London: Routledge) Bex, T. (1996). Variety in Written English; Texts in Society, Society in Text (London: Routledge). Crowley, T. (2003) Standard English and the Politics of Language. Honey, J. (1997). Language is Power. The Story of Standard English and its Enemies (London: Faber & Faber). * Baron, N. (2001). Alphabet to Email. How Written English Evolved and Where It’s Heading (London: Routledge). --- (2008). Always On: Language in an Online and Mobile World (New York: Oxford University Press). *Crystal, D. (2001) Language and the Internet (Cambridge: CUP) --- (2006). The Fight for English: How Language Pundits Ate, Shot and Left (Oxford: OUP).

53

Hilary Term: Topics in the study of present-day English (PDE)

In this second part of the A-Course we will consider some questions of current interest to researchers of PDE. In the first half we look at two key trends: on one hand the global spread and diversification of the English language (the study of late modern or present-day English is in principle the study of ‘Englishes’ rather than ‘English’), and on the other the levelling out of sharp dialect differences in the place where English has been spoken natively for longest (i.e., England). In the second half we focus on a number of other linguistic developments which can be related to the social conditions of the 20th and 21st centuries (e.g. mass education/literacy, new information and communication technologies, changing gender relations and the growth of youth culture). In addition to being significant in their own right, the topics addressed in this core course are directly relevant to the C-options being offered this term (so the A-course reading may also help with the assessed work you ultimately do for your option).

Useful reference sources:

1. Aarts, Bas and MacMahon, April (eds) (2006) The Handbook of English Linguistics. Malden: Wiley-Blackwell (available via SOLO as an electronic resource)

We won’t be reading anything from this collection specifically, but it offers a series of overview chapters dealing with PDE phonology, lexis, morphology, syntax, etc. which you might find helpful as general background/context for the more specific questions we will address—especially if you have not studied the structure of PDE before. The same Blackwell Handbook series includes other titles containing relevant material—Discourse Analysis, Language and Globalization, Language Variation and Change, and World Englishes.

2. Britain, David (ed) (2007) Language in the British Isles. Cambridge: CUP.

Another useful collection of overview chapters dealing with the English varieties spoken in the UK’s constituent nations (and the Republic of Ireland), the Celtic languages of Britain, British Black English, etc. (Make sure you use this edition edited by Britain; the first edition is out of date.)

3. Kortmann, Bernd & co-editors: Varieties of English Vols 1-4. Berlin: de Gruyter.

The four volumes in this series deal with English in (1) the British Isles, (2) the Americas and the Caribbean, (3) Australasia and the Pacific, (4) Africa and Asia.

4. Brown, Keith (ed) (2006) The Encyclopedia of Language and Linguistics. London: Elsevier (available via Solo as an e-resource). This part of the course will range quite widely. If you encounter terms and concepts in reading which you aren’t familiar with, this is a good source for looking them up.

Useful web resource: Studying varieties of English https://www.uni-due.de/SVE/ (offers bibliographies, timelines, maps)

54

Programme

Note: I have starred the most important readings, but ideally you should try to cover all the references listed for each week: the number varies, but this reflects differences in the length of the readings and their level of difficulty. It may be helpful to divide up unstarred readings to ensure that they can all be reported on by someone.

Week 1: English and Englishes in the age of globalization English began to spread beyond England, and then beyond the British Isles, many centuries ago, through the usual ‘three Cs’ (conquest, commerce, colonization). In this case, ‘commerce’ included the Atlantic slave trade, and in many parts of the world (e.g. parts of Africa, Asia and the Indian subcontinent) it led on to full-blown imperialism. But since the fall of empire English has not only continued to be used in territories Britain formerly ruled, it has also been adopted as an important second/additional language in other places (e.g. northern Europe, Japan, the former French colony of Rwanda). Meanwhile, changing patterns of migration have produced increased linguistic diversity and language contact in Britain itself (and other ‘inner circle’ nations where English is the majority L1). In this session and the next we will consider the effects of this history in producing the diverse forms of English we observe around the world today. This first session will focus particularly on theoretical debates about how to model the formation and development of ‘new Englishes’ in situations of language contact.

Reading

Smith, Jennifer (2012) English and Englishes, in Seargeant, Philip and Swann, Joan (eds) English in the World: History, Diversity, Change. Milton Park: Routledge.

Schneider, Edgar (2003) The dynamics of new Englishes: from identity construction to dialect birth. Language 79(2): 233-82. https://www.let.rug.nl/nerbonne/teach/varieties-eng/papers/schneider-lang- 2003.pdf

Sebba, Mark (2000) "Writing Switching" in British Creole. In K. Jones and M. Martin-Jones (eds.) Multilingual Literacies: Reading and writing different worlds, pp. 171-187. Amsterdam, John Benjamins. https://www.academia.edu/1363429/Writing_switching_in_British_Creole (note that you need an academia.edu account to download this yourself—they are free and can be useful).

Week 2: English and Englishes (cont’d) For this week’s session, each class participant will choose a variety of English spoken outside Britain to research, and make a 10-15 minute presentation describing its history, current status and main linguistic features (full instructions for this exercise will be provided separately).

Week 3: Dialect variation in present-day British English It is widely agreed that since World War II, social changes (e.g. increased geographical and social mobility, mass education, mass media, de-industrialization and the breakdown of traditional close-knit local communities) have led to dialect ‘levelling’ (i.e. the loss of sharp regional dialect differences) in Britain (and other societies which have experienced the same social shifts). In this session we will look at some of the evidence for this view, and consider some of the larger questions addressed in research on present-day English dialects, such as whether the media play a role in linguistic change

55

and whether contemporary conditions are leading to dialect diversification (through the formation of new varieties) as well as levelling.

Reading (Note: these references are listed in chronological order and will probably make most sense if read in that order. The key readings are starred).

Williams, Ann & Kerswill, Paul. 1999. Dialect levelling: change and continuity in Milton Keynes, Reading and Hull. In Paul Foulkes & Gerard Docherty (eds.). Urban voices. Accent studies in the British Isles. London: Arnold. 141– 162. http://www.ling.lancs.ac.uk/staff/kerswill/pkpubs/WilliamsKerswill1999UrbanVoices.pdf

*Kerswill, Paul. 2003. Dialect levelling and geographical diffusion in British English. In D. Britain and J. Cheshire (eds.). Social Dialectology. In honour of Peter Trudgill. Amsterdam: Benjamins. 223- 243. http://www.ling.lancs.ac.uk/staff/kerswill/pkpubs/Kerswill2003DialectLevellDiffusion.pdf

*Cheshire, J., Kerswill, P., Fox, S. and Torgersen, E. 2011. Contact, the feature pool and the speech community: the Emergence of Multicultural London English. Journal of Sociolinguistics 15/2: 151- 196. (available via Oxford e-journals)

*Stuart-Smith, Jane, Price, Gwylim, Timmins, Claire and Gunter, Barrie (2013). Television can also be a factor in linguistic change: evidence from an urban dialect’. Language 89(3): 501-36. http://www.linguisticsociety.org/files/501-536.pdf

Trudgill, Peter (2014) Diffusion, drift and the irrelevance of media influence. Journal of Sociolinguistics 18(2). http://ezproxy-prd.bodleian.ox.ac.uk:2111/doi/10.1111/josl.12053/epdf

Week 4: Register variation Registers are language varieties whose features are conditioned by the situation of use (purpose, topic, genre, medium) rather than by the demographic characteristics of the user (regional provenance, social class, gender, ethnicity, age). Two claims that have been made about PDE are (1) that there has been a lessening of formality over time which is causing many kinds of writing to become more speech-like (the ‘informalization’ thesis); and (2) that there has been an increase, especially in writing, in features like complex nominal constructions which are associated with ‘information compression’ (i.e. a high ratio of content to word-length). These might appear to be contradictory claims, but both could be true depending which registers you examine (e.g. (1) might be true of writing in online (especially synchronous) environments and (2) of scientific writing or news reporting). This week we will consider some work which has investigated the properties of different registers of English, focusing particularly on some of the written registers to which the claims outlined above may apply.

Reading

Biber, Douglas and Conrad, Susan (2003) ‘Register variation: a corpus approach’, in D. Schiffrin et al (eds) The Handbook of Discourse Analysis. Malden, MA: Blackwell, pp.175-96. [this is available via SOLO as an e-book as well as a print book].

Briones, Susana et al. (2003) Grammatical metaphors in scientific English. The ESPecialist. http://www.corpuslg.org/journals/the_especialist/issues/24_2_2003/ARTIGO1.PDF

56

Myketiak, Christie (2015) The co-construction of cybersex narratives Discourse & Society (available via Oxford e-journals) http://ezproxy- prd.bodleian.ox.ac.uk:2995/content/early/2015/05/07/0957926515579559.full.pdf+html (note: this article is not only about the formal characteristics of cybersex narratives, but that’s what you should pay attention to when you read it)

Bednarek, Monica (2007) Local Grammar and Register Variation: Explorations in Broadsheet and Tabloid Newspaper Discourse. Empirical Language Research Journal, Vol. 1. http://ejournals.org.uk/ELR/article/2007/1

Week 5: Questions of gender—pronouns, titles and forms of address The term ‘gender’ refers both to a social distinction and to a grammatical one. The grammatical category is a fairly marginal one in PDE, but it has nevertheless been of interest to scholars because shifts in the cultural understanding of gender as a social phenomenon may produce changes in the use of gender-marked linguistic terms, and ultimately in the system itself. In this session we will look at the effects of 20th and 21st century social developments on two areas of PDE usage where gender distinctions are made: personal pronouns and forms of address, including titles.

Reading (note: it looks like a lot, but many of these pieces are very short. Required references are starred, but try to do as much as possible)

Pronouns Bodine, Ann (1975) Androcentrism in prescriptive grammar, Language in Society 4(2):129-46.

*Curzan, Anne (2014) Fixing English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Ch. 5, ‘Non-sexist language reform and its effects’

Freeman, Tom (2015) ‘Everything you ever wanted to know about singular they’, The Stroppy Editor, 21 April. https://stroppyeditor.wordpress.com/2015/04/21/everything-you-ever-wanted-to-know- about-singular-they/

*Paterson, Laura L. (2011) Epicene pronouns in UK national newspapers: a diachronic study, ICAME Journal 36: 171-86. http://clu.uni.no/icame/ij35/Laura_Louise_Paterson.pdf

Rogers, Deborah (2014) ‘They has arrived at the pronoun party’, THES December. https://www.timeshighereducation.co.uk/comment/opinion/they-has-arrived-at-the-pronoun- party/2017278.article

Titles and address forms

Erickson, Amy (2014) Mistresses and marriage, or a short history of the Mrs. History Workshop Journal 78(1): 39-57 (and see also: http://www.newstatesman.com/cultural-capital/2014/09/mistress- miss-mrs-or-ms-untangling-shifting-history-women-s-titles)

*Mills, Sara (2003) Caught Between Sexism, Anti-sexism and `Political Correctness': Feminist Women's Negotiations with Naming Practices Discourse & Society 14 (1): 87-110.

57

*Kiesling, Scott (2004) Dude. American Speech 79(3): 281-305. http://www.pitt.edu/~kiesling/dude/dude.pdf

Zimmer, Ben (2009) Ms. New York Times. http://www.nytimes.com/2009/10/25/magazine/25FOB- onlanguage-t.html?_r=3&

Carey, Stan (2015) Mx: a new gender-neutral title. Macmillan Dictionaries blog. http://www.macmillandictionaryblog.com/mx-a-new-gender-neutral-title

‘University bans use of Mr and Ms in all correspondence’, http://www.thecollegefix.com/post/21034/ ‘OED adopts gender neutral honorific’ http://www.ibtimes.com/mr-mrs-or-mx-oxford-english- dictionary-adopts-gender-neutral-honorific-1907977

‘All the young dudes’, http://daily.jstor.org/young-dudes-generic-gender-terms-among-young- women/

‘Don’t suffix me, bro: rise of the dudebro’. http://www.visualthesaurus.com/cm/dictionary/dont- suffix-me-bro-rise-of-the-dudebro/

Week 6: (Un)popular innovations This week we’ll consider some relatively recent innovations in English which are associated with a transnational, US-led youth culture (how accurately is a question we will also consider). In most cases they have been negatively evaluated—regarded as evidence of affectation (and outside the US, Americanization), falling standards of literacy, the malign influence of new digital technologies and media, and the rise of what Naomi Baron dubs ‘whateverism’, meaning indifference to the rules governing ‘correct’ usage. (You will know from Part I that complaints of this general type are not new, but the specific forms they take reflect recent developments, e.g. people now complain about the influence of online social media instead of films and TV). For linguists, the questions are different: how are these innovations used and how should they be analysed, what functions do they fulfil and how are they spread? We will focus on recent developments in the English quotative, the use of like as a discourse marker, the apparent grammaticalization of the character / [slash] and the rise of the exclamation as if!

Reading (listed and best read in near-chronological order—most important refs starred)

*Dailey O’Cain, Jennifer (2000) Distribution of and attitudes to focuser like and quotative like. Journal of Sociolinguistics 4/1 60-80. (available via Oxford eJournals)

Buchstaller, Isabelle (2006) Diagnostics of age graded behaviour: the case of the quotative system. Journal of Sociolinguistics 10/1: 3-30 (available via Oxford eJournals)

*Dunham, Mercedes et al. (2012) Constant effects in the diffusion of ‘be like’, Journal of English Linguistics 40(4): 316-37. (Available via Oxford eJournals)

Cheshire, Jenny et al. (2011) as listed above under ‘Dialects’

58

*Curzan, Anne (2013) ‘Slash: not just a punctuation mark any more’, Chronicle of Higher Education 24 April. http://chronicle.com/blogs/linguafranca/2013/04/24/slash-not-just-a-punctuation-mark- anymore/

Brinton, Laurel (2014) The extremes of insubordination: exclamatory as if! Journal of English Linguistics 42(2): 93-113. http://ezproxy-prd.bodleian.ox.ac.uk:4065/content/42/2/93.full.pdf+html

B-Course: Research Methods for English Language

Michaelmas Term: Using corpora to investigate English usage Seminar leaders: Mr. Martin Wynne and Dr. Ylva Berglund Prytz

This course will introduce you to the methods of corpus linguistics, showing how these can be applied to questions about the structure and use of English. A number of English language corpora, online interfaces and software applications will be introduced, and you will be able to undertake your own corpus-based project.

Week 1: Introduction In this session we start looking at how to use corpora for linguistic research. We will make corpus searches and collate the results. We will discuss issues related to corpus composition, representativeness, and how to represent and examine quantitative results. It is expected that students are familiar with some basic concepts, outlined in McEnery, Xiao and Tono (2006): Units A1, A2, A3, A4.1-4.2

Suggested reading (* required reading): * McEnery, A., R. Xiao and Y. Tono, (2006). Corpus-based Language Studies: An Advanced Resource Book. Routledge. Units A1, A2, A3, A4.1-4.2 (unit A7 is also useful but not essential). Sinclair, J. (2005). ‘Corpus and Text: Basic Principles’. In Developing linguistic corpora: a guide to good practice. M. Wynne (ed). Oxford, Oxbow Books: 1-16. http://ota.oucs.ox.ac.uk/documents/creating/dlc/chapter1.htm Hommerberg, C. and G. Tottie (2007). Try to or Try and? Verb complementation in British and American English. ICAME Journal 31: 45-64. http://icame.uib.no/ij31/ij31-page45-64.pdf

Week 2: Beyond simple frequencies In this session we will look at how to move beyond simple concordances and word frequencies. We will explore collocation and other forms of evidence about usage which can be found in corpora, and loo at word-class tagging and other forms of annotation.

Suggested reading (* marks required reading): * Hommerberg, C. and G. Tottie (2007). Try to or Try And? Verb Complementation in British and American English. ICAME Journal 31: 45-64. http://icame.uib.no/ij31/ij31-page45-64.pdf * McEnery, A., R. Xiao and Y. Tono, Corpus-based Language Studies: An Advanced Resource Book (Routledge, 2006) . Units B3-B6 Hoffmann, S., S. Evert, N. Smith, D. Lee, Y. Berglund Prytz (2008) Corpus linguistics with BNCweb : a practical Guide. Frankfurt ; Oxford : Peter Lang

59

Leech, G. (2005). ‘Adding linguistic annotation’. In Developing linguistic corpora: a guide to good practice. M. Wynne (ed). Oxford, Oxbow Books: 17-29. http://ota.ox.ac.uk/documents/creating/dlc/chapter2.htm

Week 3: Working with spoken and historical data In this third session we will look at how to work with data that is not easily and readily available in corpus form with custom-made tools. We will discuss issues related to the creation and use of spoken and historical corpora and explore material with a stand-alone concordance program.

Suggested reading (* marks required reading): * Corpus of Early English Correspondence http://www.helsinki.fi/varieng/domains/CEEC.html (Read the brief introduction to the corpora. If interested, follow links for further information) * Meurman-Solin, A. (2001) ‘Structured Text Corpora in the Study of Language Variation and Change’ Literary and Linguistic Computing 16(1): 5-27 http://llc.oxfordjournals.org/content/16/1/5.full.pdf+html Davies, M. (2012). Some methodological issues related to corpus-based investigations of recent syntactic changes in English. In: Nevalainen, T. and E. C. Traugott. Oxford Handbook of the History of English. Oxford: Oxford University Press. [Available online via Solo] Hoffmann, S., S. Evert, N. Smith, D. Lee, Y. Berglund Prytz (2008) Corpus linguistics with BNCweb : a practical Guide. Frankfurt ; Oxford : Peter Lang Thompson, P. (2005) ‘Spoken Language Corpora’. In Developing linguistic corpora: a guide to good practice. M. Wynne (ed). Oxford, Oxbow Books: http://ota.ox.ac.uk/documents/creating/dlc/chapter5.htm Antconc Help Guide [unpublished]: http://www.laurenceanthony.net/software/antconc/releases/AntConc344/help.pdf

Week 4: Creating and analysing corpora In this final taught session we will move beyond simple searching and analysis of corpus data. We will look at statistical analyses of corpus data and explore questions relating to the creation and annotation of corpora. Depending on the interests of the students, we may also return to and engage further in issues from the first three sessions, and explore additional corpora and tools.

Suggested reading (* marks required reading): * McEnery, A., R. Xiao and Y. Tono, Corpus-based Language Studies: An Advanced Resource Book (Routledge, 2006). Units A6, A8, A9. * Stubbs, M. (1995). Collocations and semantic profiles: on the cause of the trouble with quantitative studies. Functions of Language 2(1): 23-55 http://www.uni- trier.de/fileadmin/fb2/ANG/Linguistik/Stubbs/stubbs-1995-cause-trouble.pdf Wynne, M. (ed). (2005) Developing linguistic corpora: a guide to good practice. Oxford, Oxbow Books http://ota.oucs.ox.ac.uk/documents/creating/dlc/

Weeks 5 & 6: Individual projects Students will work in the classroom with the tutors on individual corpus-based projects. Further reading will be recommended depending on the nature of the projects.

Further Reading Further recommendations may also be offered in the sessions.

60

Anderson, W. and J. Corbett (2009) Exploring English with On-Line Corpora: An Introduction Houndmills: Palgrave-Macmillan. Honkapohja, A., S. Kaislaniemi and V. Marttila. (2009). ‘Digital Editions for Corpus Linguistics: Representing manuscript reality in electronic corpora’. In: Corpora: Pragmatics and Discourse. Jucker, A.H, D. Schreier and M. Hundt (eds.). Amsterdam/New York: Rodopi. Preprint: http://www.helsinki.fi/varieng/domains/DECL/ICAME29ProceedingsArticleSubmitted.pdf Meurman-Solin, A. (2001) ‘Structured Text Corpora in the Study of Language Variation and Change’ Literary and Linguistic Computing 16(1): 5-27 http://llc.oxfordjournals.org/content/16/1/5.full.pdf+html Nevalainen, T. and S. M. Fitzmaurice (eds). (2011). How to Deal with Data: Problems and Approaches to the Investigation of the English Language over Time and Space. Studies in Variation, Contacts and Change in English, Volume 7 http://www.helsinki.fi/varieng/journal/volumes/07/ Newman, J. (2008) ‘Spoken corpora: rationale and application’ Taiwan Journal of Linguistics. 6.2 http://tjl.nccu.edu.tw/volume6-2/6.2-2%20Newman.pdf Xiao, R., and T. McEnery (2006). Collocation, Semantic Prosody, and near Synonymy: A Cross- Linguistic Perspective. Applied Linguistics 27(1): 103-129. http://applij.oxfordjournals.org/cgi/content/full/27/1/103

Hilary Term: research skills and dissertation writing In Hilary term further research methods sessions may be offered on the basis of need (i.e., depending on which areas students have chosen to work on for their dissertations). Schedule and reading TBA.

61

B-COURSE, 1550-1830 - MICHAELMAS TERM The B-Course, a distinctive feature of the Oxford English MSt/MPhil, introduces students to bibliography, manuscript studies, textual scholarship and book history. In providing a range of approaches to literary study that will almost certainly be new to you, the B-Course is very highly recommended. Those intending to continue to doctoral study, whether at Oxford or elsewhere, would need to give good reasons for not taking this course to the relevant course convenor.

In Michaelmas Term, the B-Course is divided into three subcourses: 1550-1830, 1830-1914, and post-1900, all of which are described in detail in this booklet. Students should select the B- course that best fits the period-based or thematic strand of the M.St. into which they have been accepted.

The course comprises a number of elements across Michaelmas and Hilary Terms. Some elements are strand-specific; some address more than one strand in joint sessions; and others are optional.

As well as providing training in research skills that support all written work, the B-Course includes two formal assessments of its own. Period-specific classes in both Michaelmas and Hilary lead to the submission of a 5000-7000 word essay at the end of Hilary Term. A period-specific class on manuscript transcription and palaeography is assessed by a transcription test. Further details about the B-Course assessments, including dates, are available in the MSt/MPhil Handbook.

Strand Michaelmas Term Hilary Term Palaeography and Codicology Palaeography and Codicology 650-1550 and (Professor Wakelin) (Professor Wakelin) first year Transcription (Professor Wakelin) Transcription (Professor Wakelin) MPhil Textual Criticism (various) Textual Criticism (various) Material Texts Transcription Early Modern Textual Cultures (Dr. Issues in 1550-1700 1550-1830 (Dr. West) Smyth) Editing (Professor (Professor 1700-1830 Sutherland) Transcription 1700-1830 B-course Sutherland) 1830-1914 Material Texts (Mr. Hurst) 1830-1914 B-Course Optional 1830-1914 (Professor 1900-present Transcription Sutherland) (Dr. Post-1900 B-Course American Material Texts Priestman) Post-1900 Material World (Dr Fletcher and Methodology World Literatures B-Course Literatures Dr Kelly) (Dr Kelly)

Hand-press printing workshop Hand-press printing workshop All (optional) (Richard Lawrence) (Richard Lawrence)

62

Overview

All courses listed run for the entire term

Students will usually take the B-Course classes in Michaelmas and Hilary that best fits the MSt. strand on which they are registered, but (subject to the strand and course convenors’ permission) they may choose to join another course if it is in the best interests of their research. Class times and locations are given in the Lecture List. Students on the American MSt strand should choose the Hilary Term B-course strand that best reflects their research area.

Further research skills courses that are relevant for B-Course work are run by the Bodleian Library, the English Faculty Library, and Oxford University Computer Services throughout the year. Masterclasses on manuscripts and rare books are run by the Bodleian Centre for the Study of the Book on Monday afternoons in Michaelmas.

B-COURSE: MATERIAL TEXTS, 1550-1830 Professor Kathryn Sutherland ([email protected]) The B-Course provides an introduction to bibliography (the physical and technical details of book- making), book history, editorial theory and practice, and textual scholarship as they apply to the study of literature. It includes both the study of books as singular physical objects and as texts that may exist in multiple physical states: as manuscript, print, and digital forms. Weekly two-hour classes during Michaelmas Term will provide a survey of the material conditions under which texts were produced from the beginnings of print culture in the west (around 1475) to the end of the hand-press period (around 1830). Topics introduced will include: the constituents of the book (paper, type, printing, format); how literary manuscripts become books and how we might read their material forms; theories of editing and textual transmission; changing ideas of authorship; the history of reading. Listed below are some general studies which you may find useful in preparing for this course. Many articles in periodicals are available online through SOLO, as are an increasing number of books. Those marked by an asterisk are highly recommended as preliminary reading before the course begins (*) or as essential handbooks throughout the course (**). Further reading lists will accompany each weekly seminar.

Seminars will be as follows: Week 1 What is the History of the Material Text? Week 2 Material Production and the Physical Constituents Week 3 of the Book (type, paper, composition, imposition, binding) Week 4 Bibliographic Description and the Science of the Book Week 5 Print and Meaning Week 6 Textual Criticism and Theories of Editing

Throughout the course, you should keep in mind the following questions: 1) How do we read and describe materiality? What significances do we attach to particular material features? Are there material features we tend to overlook? 2) To what degree is the process of production legible in the material text? 3) What relationships might we propose between material and literary form? 4) What does it mean to study the history of the book in the digital age?

63

Introductory Reading

Craig S. Abbott and William Proctor Williams, An Introduction to Bibliographical and Textual Studies (Modern Language Association, 2009) John Barnard, D. F. McKenzie, and M. Bell (eds), The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, Vol. 4, 1557-1695 (Cambridge University Press, 2002) Mark Bland, A Guide to Early Printed Books and Manuscripts (Wiley-Blackwell, 2010) Roger Chartier, The Order of Books: Readers, Authors, and Libraries in Europe Between the Fourteenth and Eighteenth Centuries (Polity, 1994) *Joseph A. Dane, The Myth of Print Culture: Essays on Evidence, Textuality, and Bibliographical Method (University of Toronto Press, 2003) Elizabeth Eisenstein, The Printing Revolution in Early Modern Europe (Cambridge University Press, 1983) – an abridged version of Eisenstein’s The Printing Press as an Agent of Change (2 vols., Cambridge University Press, 1979). Note that this founding narrative is generally now critiqued: see, for example, Adrian Johns, The Nature of the Book (Chicago University Press, 1998) *Lucien Febvre and Henri-Jean Martin, The Coming of the Book: The Impact of Printing, 1450-1800 (Verso Editions, 1976; latest edition, 1997) *David Finkelstein and Alistair McCleery (eds), The Book History Reader (Routledge, 2002). This contains a useful reading list. Peter L. Shillingsburg, Scholarly Editing in the Computer Age: Theory and Practice (3rd edn, Univ. of Michigan Press, 1996) Michael F. Suarez and Michael L. Turner (eds.), The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, vol. 6: 1695-1830 (Cambridge University Press, 2009)

Acquaint yourself with the standard processes of printing a book in the hand-press era (acquiring manuscript copy; casting off; composing; printing; proofing and correcting; binding). For this you should consult Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography (1972; reprinted by St Paul’s Bibliographies, 1995) **, pp. 1-185; or McKerrow, R. B., An Introduction to Bibliography for Literary Students (1928; reprinted by St Paul’s Bibliographies, 1994) ** You might supplement this by looking at Joseph Moxon, Mechanick exercises on the whole art of printing (1683–4), edited by Herbert Davis and Harry Carter, 2nd ed. (Oxford University Press, 1962; reprinted Dover Publications, 1978.)

Reading for the first class * Robert Darnton, ‘What Is the History of Books?’ in Daedalus, 111:3, (1982), 65-83 * Robert Darnton, ‘“What Is the History of Books” Revisited,’ in Modern Intellectual History 4.3 (2007), 495-508 * Paul Eggert, ‘Brought to Book: Bibliography, Book History and the Study of Literature’, The Library, 13 (2012), 3-32 *Walter W. Greg, ‘What is Bibliography?’ (1912) reprinted in Greg, Collected Papers, ed. J. C. Maxwell (Clarendon Press, 1966), pp. 75-88 *D. F. McKenzie, ‘The book as an expressive form’, in Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts (Cambridge University Press, 1999), pp. 9-30

The major journals in the field (to be consulted on a regular basis) The Library; Publishing History; Studies in Bibliography; TEXT later issues under its new title Textual Cultures; Word and Image

64

Regularly check the Bodleian Library Centre for the Study of the Book website for resources, national and international links, some online journals, regularly updated listings of lectures and conferences, etc.

B-COURSE: MATERIAL TEXTS, 1830-1914

Professor Kathryn Sutherland ([email protected]) The B-Course provides an introduction to bibliography (the physical and technical details of book- making), book history, editorial theory and practice, and textual scholarship as they apply to the study of literature. It includes both the study of books as singular physical objects and as texts that may exist in multiple physical states: as manuscript, print, and digital forms. Weekly two-hour classes during Michaelmas Term will provide a survey of the material conditions under which texts have been produced since 1830. Topics introduced will include: the constituents of the book (paper, type, printing, format); how literary manuscripts become books and how we might read their material forms; theories of editing and textual transmission; changing ideas of authorship; the history of reading. Listed below are some general studies which you may find useful in preparing for this course. Many articles in periodicals are available online through SOLO, as are an increasing number of books. Those marked by an asterisk are highly recommended as preliminary reading before the course begins (*) or as essential handbooks throughout the course (**). Further reading lists will accompany each weekly seminar.

Seminars will be as follows: Week 1 What is the History of the Material Text? Week 2 Book History Week 3 Constituents of the Printed Book Week 4 Print and Meaning Week 5 Textual Criticism and Theories of Editing Week 6 Going Digital (changing ideas of authorship, reading, production, collection, and preservation)

Throughout the course, you should keep in mind the following questions: 1 How do we read and describe materiality? What significances do we attach to particular material features? Are there material features we tend to overlook? 2 To what degree is the process of production legible in the material text? 3 What relationships might we propose between material and literary form? 4 What does it mean to study the history of the book in the digital age?

Introductory Reading Craig S. Abbott and William Proctor Williams, An Introduction to Bibliographical and Textual Studies (Modern Language Association, 2009) *Walter Benjamin, ‘Unpacking My Library: A Talk about Book Collecting’, and ‘The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction’, in Illuminations, ed. Hannah Arendt (Fontana, 1973) Maurice Blanchot, ‘The Absence of the Book’, in The Gaze of Orpheus and other literary essays, ed. P. Adams Sitney (Station Hill Press, 1981) Jay David Bolter and Richard Grusin, Remediation: Understanding New Media (MIT Press, 2002)

65

Marilyn Deegan and Kathryn Sutherland, Transferred Illusions: Digital Technology and the Forms of Print (Ashgate, 2009) *David Finkelstein and Alistair McCleery (eds), The Book History Reader (Routledge, 2002) This contains a useful Reading List. Jerome McGann, The Textual Condition (Princeton University Press, 1991) *D. F. McKenzie, Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts (Cambridge University Press, 1999) Peter L. Shillingsburg, Scholarly Editing in the Computer Age: Theory and Practice (3rd edn, Univ. of Michigan Press, 1996)

Acquaint yourself with the standard processes of printing a book after 1830 (acquiring manuscript/typescript copy; casting off; composing; printing; proofing and correcting; binding). For this you should consult Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography (1972; reprinted by St Paul’s Bibliographies, 1995) **, pp. 189-310. This is essential background reading for classes in Weeks 3 and 4.

Reading for the first class * Paul Eggert, ‘Brought to Book: Bibliography, Book History and the Study of Literature’, The Library, 13 (2012), 3-32 *Walter W. Greg, ‘What is Bibliography?’ (1912) reprinted in Greg, Collected Papers, ed. J. C. Maxwell (Clarendon Press, 1966), pp. 75-88 *D. F. McKenzie, ‘The book as an expressive form’, in Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts (Cambridge University Press, 1999), pp. 9-30

The major journals in the field (to be consulted on a regular basis) The Library; Publishing History; Studies in Bibliography; TEXT later issues under its new title Textual Cultures; Word and Image

Regularly check the Bodleian Library Centre for the Study of the Book website for resources, national and international links, some online journals, regularly updated listings of lectures and conferences, etc.

MATERIAL TEXTS Post-1900

Dr Chris Fletcher ([email protected]) and Dr Michelle Kelly ([email protected])

B-Course for 1900-present, World Literature in English, American Literature MSt Programmes

Michaelmas Term Course Details and Preliminary Reading

The B-Course begins with Material Texts, providing an introduction to bibliography (the physical and technical details of book-making) and book history as they apply to the study of literature. It includes both the study of books as singular physical objects and as texts that may exist in multiple physical states: as manuscript, print, and digital forms. Weekly two-hour classes during Michaelmas Term will be held in the Weston Library and will each week draw on material from the Bodleian Collections.

66

WEEK 1 Bibliography and its Uses (Kathryn Sutherland)

WEEK 2 How to Read a Book

An introduction to understanding the material qualities of the book, with examples from the Bodleian’s Special Collections. (Andrew Honey and Alex Franklin)

WEEK 3 The Non-Western Book Form

An insight into the material qualities of the non-western book, with examples from the Bodleian’s Special Collections. (Alasdair Watson and César Merchán-Hamann)

WEEK 4 Inside the Archive

Insights into the Bodleian’s archival holdings and holdings of printed ephemera, with a World and American focus. (Lucy McCann and Julie-Anne Lambert)

WEEK 5 Beginnings and Endings of the Book

Single session looking at the Bodleian’s copies of the Bay Psalm Book (the world’s most expensive book?), the archival remains of Agrippa: a Book of the Dead (the world’s most self-destructive book?), and the librarian’s pursuit of digital dystopias. (Chris Fletcher)

WEEK 6 Chasing the Traces

Hands on research workshop exploring and identifying questions of authorship, date, transmission and provenance in original eighteenth and nineteenth century manuscript verse miscellanies. (Mike Webb and Stephen Hebron)

Preliminary Reading

Listed below are some general studies which you may find useful in preparing for this course. Many articles in periodicals are available online through SOLO, as are an increasing number of books. Those marked by an asterisk are highly recommended as preliminary reading before the course begins (*) or as essential handbooks throughout the course (**).

Throughout the course, you should keep in mind the following questions:

67

1 How do we read and describe materiality? What significances do we attach to particular material features? Are there material features we tend to overlook? 2 To what degree is the process of production legible in the material text? 3 What relationships might we propose between material and literary form? 4 What does it mean to study the history of the book in the digital age?

Introductory Reading

Craig S. Abbott and William Proctor Williams, An Introduction to Bibliographical and Textual Studies (Modern Language Association, 2009)

*Walter Benjamin, ‘Unpacking My Library: A Talk about Book Collecting’, and ‘The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction’, in Illuminations, ed. Hannah Arendt (Fontana, 1973)

Maurice Blanchot, ‘The Absence of the Book’, in The Gaze of Orpheus and other literary essays, ed. P. Adams Sitney (Station Hill Press, 1981)

Jay David Bolter and Richard Grusin, Remediation: Understanding New Media (MIT Press, 2002)

Marilyn Deegan and Kathryn Sutherland, Transferred Illusions: Digital Technology and the Forms of Print (Ashgate, 2009)

*David Finkelstein and Alistair McCleery (eds), The Book History Reader (Routledge, 2002) This contains a useful Reading List.

Jerome McGann, The Textual Condition (Princeton University Press, 1991)

*D. F. McKenzie, Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts (Cambridge University Press, 1999)

Peter L. Shillingsburg, Scholarly Editing in the Computer Age: Theory and Practice (3rd edn, Univ. of Michigan Press, 1996)

Acquaint yourself with the standard processes of printing a book after 1830 (acquiring manuscript/typescript copy; casting off; composing; printing; proofing and correcting; binding). For this you should consult Philip Gaskell, A New Introduction to Bibliography (1972; reprinted by St Paul’s Bibliographies, 1995) **, pp. 189-310.

Reading for the first class

* Paul Eggert, ‘Brought to Book: Bibliography, Book History and the Study of Literature’, The Library, 13 (2012), 3-32

*Walter W. Greg, ‘What is Bibliography?’ (1912) reprinted in Greg, Collected Papers, ed. J. C. Maxwell (Clarendon Press, 1966), pp. 75-88

68

*D. F. McKenzie, ‘The book as an expressive form’, in Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts (Cambridge University Press, 1999), pp. 9-30

The major journals in the field (to be consulted on a regular basis) The Library; Publishing History; Studies in Bibliography; TEXT later issues under its new title Textual Cultures; Word and Image

Regularly check the Bodleian Library Centre for the Study of the Book website for resources, national and international links, some online journals, regularly updated listings of lectures and conferences, etc.

B-COURSE OPTION ISSUES IN EDITING: HILARY TERM 2015

This is an optional workshop, consisting of six weekly sessions, open to all those M.St. candidates working in an area of English, American, or World Literatures post-1550 who intend to offer a sample edition as the B-Course essay. Classes will consist of a weekly introduction to an aspect of editing (establishing the text, how to record variants, annotation, preparing an introduction, etc.) followed by discussion of practical issues and problems arising from the texts under preparation.

General bibliography Barney, Stephen, ed., Annotation and its Texts (New York and Oxford: OUP, 1991) Bornstein, George, ‘What Is the Text of a Poem by Yeats?’ in Palimpsest: Editorial Theory in the Humanities, ed. George Bornstein and Ralph G. Williams (Ann Arbor: Michigan Univ. Press, 1993) Briggs, Julia, ‘Between the Texts: Virginia Woolf’s Acts of Revision’, TEXT, 12 (1999), 143-65 Bushell, Sally, Text as Process: Creative Composition in Wordsworth, Tennyson, and Dickinson (Charlottesville: Univ. of Virginia Press, 2009) Cohen, Philip, ed., Devils and Angels: Textual Editing and Literary Theory (Charlottesville: Univ. of Virginia Press, 1991) Deegan, Marilyn, and Sutherland, Kathryn, ed., Text Editing, Print, and the Digital World (Farnham: Ashgate, 2009) Gabler, H. W., 'The Text as Process and the Problem of Intentionality', Text, 3 (1987), 107-16 Gaskell, Philip, From Write to Reader: Studies in Editorial Method (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1978) Greetham, D. C., Textual Scholarship: An Introduction (New York: Garland, 1992) Greg, W. W., ‘The Rationale of Copy-Text’, Studies in Bibliography, 3 (1950-1), 19-36 Hulle, Dirk Van, Textual Awareness: A Genetic Study of Late Manuscripts by Joyce, Proust, and Mann (Ann Arbor: Michigan Univ. Press, 2004) Jack, Ian, ‘Novels and those “Necessary Evils”: Annotating the Brontes’, Essays in Criticism, 32 (1982), 321-37 Johnson, Samuel, 'Preface' to The Plays of William Shakespeare (1765), in Johnson on Shakespeare, Yale Edition of the Works of Samuel Johnson, vol. 7 (New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1968) McGann, Jerome J., 'What Is Critical Editing?' Text, 5 (1991), 15-30; repr. in The Textual Condition (Princeton: Princeton Univ. Press, 1991) McKenzie, D. F., ‘The Book as an Expressive Form’, in Bibliography and the Sociology of Texts (1986; Cambridge: CUP, 1999) Schreilbman, Susan, Ray Siemens, and John Unsworth, ed., A Companion to Digital Humanities, (Oxford: Blackwell, 2004); available at http://www.digitalhumanities.org/companion/ 69

Stillinger, Jack, Multiple Authority and the Myth of Solitary Genius (New York: OUP, 1991) ______, Coleridge and Textual Instability: The Multiple Versions of the Major Poems (New York: OUP, 1994) Thompson, Ann, et al., Which Shakespeare? A User’s Guide to Editions (Milton Keynes: Open Univ. Publications, 1992)

Some representative scholarly and other editions (for consultation)

The Cambridge Edition of the Works of Jane Austen, general editor Janet Todd (Cambridge: CUP, 2005-9) Jane Austen’s Fiction Manuscripts: A Digital Edition, ed. Kathryn Sutherland (2010) www.janeausten.ac.uk The William Blake Archive http://www.blakearchive.org/blake The Works of Stephen Crane, ed. Fredson Bowers (Charlottesville: Univ. of Virginia Press, 1969-) Emily Dickinson, Dickinson Electronic Archives http://www.emilydickinson.org/ Marta Werner, ‘The Flights of A821’ http://www.altx.com/ebr/ebr6/6werner/6wern.htm Marta Werner, Emily Dickinson’s Open Folios (Ann Arbor: Michigan Univ. Press, 1996) Thomas Hardy, Tess of the D’Urbervilles, ed. Simon Gatrell and Juliet Grindle (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1988) The Cambridge Edition of the Works of Ben Jonson: a hybrid print and electronic edition (Cambridge: CUP, 2012) William Shakespeare: The Oxford Shakespeare, General Editor Stanley Wells (Oxford: OUP, 1982- 2005); The Arden Shakespeare: Complete Works, ed. Richard Proudfoot, Ann Thompson, et al. (London: Thomas Nelson and Sons, 1998); The Arden Shakespeare, Third Series (London: 1995- 2011); RSC Shakespeare, ed. Jonathan Bate and Eric Rasmussen (Basingstoke: Macmillan, 2007) The Cambridge Edition of the Works of Jonathan Swift (Cambridge: CUP, 2008-on going) and its electronic archive www.jonathanswiftarchive.org.uk

The Walt Whitman Archive http://www.whitmanarchive.org/

Women Writers’ Project http://www.wwp.northeastern.edu/

Term schedule

Week 1: Types of edition Week 2: Copytext and dealing with variants Week 3: Old Spelling/ New Spelling Week 4: Annotation Week 5: Layout Week 6: Writing the critical introduction and pulling it all together

70

B-COURSE: POST-1550 TRANSCRIPTION CLASSES These classes teach how to locate, transcribe, describe and understand manuscripts, with particular reference to the very extensive collections from all periods in the Bodleian Library. They are taught in Michaelmas Term and are held in addition to the main B-course class. Attendance at both is compulsory.

1550-1700: Early Modern Hands (Dr Philip West) A course of eight classes for M.St. students working in the period. The main aims of the course are to enable students to read secretary hand fluently, and to describe its forms; to enable students to transcribe hands using semi-diplomatic conventions; and to explain scribal features of early modern manuscript writing. Students will learn how to find and use manuscripts in Oxford. There will be a transcription test at the end of Michaelmas term.

1700-1830 and 1830-1914: Handwriting, 1700-1900 (Mr Clive Hurst) A course of eight classes for MSt students working in this period. You will be presented with examples of literary hands which will be transcribed in class; there will be three pieces of formal transcription to present during the term, and a final test transcription in the last class. The course is to familiarise you with contemporary hands to enable you to use primary resources more effectively, and to introduce you to some of the problems encountered in editing texts.

1900-present: Material Methodology: Modern manuscript research (Dr Judith Priestman) The purpose of this part of the M.St. course is to familiarize postgraduates with some of the techniques and methodologies involved in researching primary sources, principally manuscripts and archives. Students are taught basic document analysis (how to spot a forgery; date paper &c) and offered one practical session in the Bodleian’s Conservation workshops, but the main emphasis of the course is on transcribing and editing manuscripts, where transcription is understood to be a tool for analysing an author’s compositional technique. A transcription test is set in Week 8, which students are required to pass, as set out in the current edition of the Exam Regulations.

World Literatures: Material Methodology (Dr Michelle Kelly) An introduction to manuscript study and archive use in world literature, with weekly classes on the transcription, editing and use of manuscript materials. The course will focus on practical transcription skills, and will conclude with a compulsory examination on these methods in week 8. The course is a compulsory component of the B-Course for the M.St. in World Literature.

71

C-COURSE DESCRIPTIONS - MICHAELMAS TERM

You may select any C-Course

THE AGE OF ALFRED Dr Francis Leneghan ([email protected]) King Alfred of Wessex (871-99) has been credited with not only with the invention of English prose but of the Anglo-Saxon kingdom and even the idea of “Englishness”. But recent scholarship has questioned the extent of the king’s personal involvement in the so-called ‘Alfredian renaissance’. This course interrogates these issues by exploring the burgeoning vernacular literary culture associated with Alfred’s court and its wider impact on English writing and society in the ninth and tenth centuries. Texts will be studied in Old English, so some prior knowledge of the language will be required. Key texts will include the Old English translations of the following works:

 Gregory the Great, Pastoral Care  Boethius, The Consolation of Philosophy  St Augustine, Soliloquies  Psalms 1-50  Orosius, Seven Books of History Against the Pagans

We will also look at other important contemporary vernacular works such as Alfred’s Lawcode (Domboc), Wærferth’s translation of Gregory’s Dialogues, Bald’s Leechbook and The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle (MS A), while considering continental influences on Alfredian writing.

Editions and translations: Aykerman, J. Y. et al. The Whole Works of King Alfred the Great: With Preliminary Essays, Illustrative of the History, Arts, and Manners, of the Ninth Century, 2 vols (London, 1858). [Full translations of the OE Orosius, Laws (with Alfred’s Preface), Boethius, and Soliloquies; readable as a pdf on solo]. Bately, Janet M., ed. The Old English Orosius, EETS, ss. 6 (Oxford, 1980). Browne, Bishop G. F. King Alfred’s Books (London, 1920). [Translation of excerpts from Soliloquies, Dialogues, Orosius, Pastoral Care, Bede, Boethius]. Carnicelli, Thomas A., ed. King Alfred’s Version of St. Augustine’s ‘Soliloquies’ (Cambridge, MA, 1969). Godden, Malcolm and Susan Irvine, eds, The Old English Boethius, 2 vols (Oxford, 2010). ———— ed. and transl. The Old English Boethius with Verse Prologues and Epilogues Associated with King Alfred (Harvard, 2012). Hargrove, Henry L. transl. King Alfred's Old English Version of St. Augustine’s Soliloquies, Turned into Modern English (New York, 1904). Hecht, Hans, ed., Bischof Wærferths von Worcester Übersetzung der Dialoge Gregors des Grossen, Bibliothek der Angelsächsischen Prosa, 5 (Liepzig: 1900; repr. Darmstadt:, 1965). Keynes, Simon and Michael Lapidge. Alfred the Great: Asser’s ‘Life of King Alfred’ and Other Contemporary Sources (London, 1983). [Translation of excerpts from Boethius, Soliloquies, Laws (without preface), Preface to Pastoral Care, Alfred’s Will]. Liebermann, Felix (ed.). 1903. Die Gesetze der Angelsachsen, Volume 1: Text und Übersetzung. Halle: Max Niemeyer. [Alfred’s Laws (with Preface – Einleitung)] O’Neill, Patrick P. ed. King Alfred’s Old English Prose Translation of the First Fifty Psalms (Cambridge, MA, 2001).

72

Swanton, Michael, trans. Anglo-Saxon Prose (London, 1993). [Translations of Orosius (Ohthere and Wulfstan), Preface to Pastoral Care, Preface to Soliloquies] Sweet, Henry, ed. and transl. King Alfred’s West-Saxon Version of Gregory’s Pastoral Care, 2 vols, Rolls Series (London, 1887-89).

Recommend preliminary reading: Abels, Richard. Alfred the Great: War, Kingship and Culture in Anglo-Saxon England (London, 1998). Bately, Janet M. The Literary Prose of King Alfred’s Reign: Translation or Transformation? (London, 1980). ————. ‘Did King Alfred Actually Translate Anything? The Integrity of the Alfredian Canon Revisited’, Medium Ævum 78 (2009), 189-215. Discenza, Nicole G. and Paul E. Szarmach. (eds). A Companion to Alfred the Great, Brill Companions to the Christian Tradition 58 (Leiden: Brill, 2014). Foot, Sarah. ‘The Making of Angelcynn: English Identity Before the Norman Conquest’, Transactions of the Royal Historical Society, 6th ser. 6 (1996), 25-49. Frantzen, Allen J. King Alfred (Boston, 1986). Godden, Malcolm. ‘Did King Alfred Write Anything?’, Medium Ævum 76 (2007), 1-23. ————. ‘The Alfredian Project and its Aftermath: Rethinking the Literary History of the Ninth and Tenth Centuries’, Proceedings of the British Academy 162 (2009), 93-122. ————. ‘Alfredian Prose: Myth and Reality’, Filologia Germanica 5, (2013), 131-58. Karkov, Catherine E. The Ruler Portraits of Anglo-Saxon England (Woodbridge, 2004), pp. 23-52. Pratt, David. The Political Thought of King Alfred the Great (Cambridge, 2007). ————. ‘Problems of Authorship and Audience in the Writings of King Alfred the Great’, in Lay Intellectuals in the Carolingian World, ed. P. Wormald and J. L Nelson (Cambridge, 2007), pp. 162- 91. Waite, Greg. Annotated Bibliographies of Old and Middle English Literature Volume VI: Old English Prose Translations of King Alfred’s Reign (Cambridge, 2000). Whitelock, Dorothy. ‘The Prose of Alfred’s Reign’, in Continuations and Beginnings: Studies in Old English Literature, ed. E. G. Stanley (London, 1966), pp. 67-103.

THE LANAGUAGE OF MIDDLE ENGLISH LITERATURE Professor Simon Horobin ([email protected]) This course will provide students with the necessary linguistic background to appreciate the stylistic practices of major Middle English writers such as Chaucer, Langland and the Gawain-poet. Following an introduction to key features of orthography, phonology, grammar and lexicon, students will examine language use, style, register and variety to consider how these writers exploited the resources of Middle English to achieve specific literary and stylistic effects.

Blake, N.F., The Cambridge History of the English Language Volume II 1066-1476 (Cambridge, 1992) - The English Language in Medieval Literature (London, 1977) Burnley, David, The History of the English Language: A Source Book. 2nd edition. (Longman, 2000) - The Language of Chaucer. (London, 1989) - Chaucer's Language and the Philosopher's Tradition. (Cambridge, 1979)

73

Butterfield, Ardis, The Familiar Enemy: Chaucer, Language and Nation in the Hundred Years War (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2009) Cannon, Christopher, The Making of Chaucer's English: A Study of Words. (Cambridge, 1998) Horobin, Simon, Chaucer’s Language 2nd edition (Basingstoke, 2013) - The Language of the Chaucer Tradition (Cambridge, 2003) Horobin, Simon and Jeremy Smith, An Introduction to Middle English (Edinburgh, 2002) Machan, Tim William, English in the Middle Ages (Oxford, 2003) Sandved, A.O., Introduction to Chaucerian English (Cambridge, 1985) Smith, Jeremy J., An Historical Study of English: Function, Form and Change (London, 1996) Wogan-Browne, J. et al. (eds), The Idea of the Vernacular (Exeter, 1999)

OLDER SCOTS LITERATURE Professor Sally Mapstone ([email protected]) This course will focus on the Scottish literature composed between c.1375 and c.1550. The options for study are diverse, and range from major historical works such as Barbour’s Bruce and Hary's Wallace, to the writings of the makars Henryson, Dunbar, Douglas, and Lyndsay. There will be the opportunity to concentrate on the wealth of anonymous writing from the period and to examine the development of popular genres including romance, tale collection and dream vision. Manuscript and print context and book history are also possibilities for study within this option.

Reading lists on individual texts will follow once you have chosen the particular authors and texts on which you wish to focus.

Texts Fourteenth-early sixteenth centuries Most people will wish to start with fifteenth-century Scottish poetry, but be aware that there is much beyond James I, Henryson, Dunbar, and Douglas (on all of whom see below), quite a lot of it anonymous. P. Bawcutt and F. Riddy (eds), Longer Scottish Poems vol.I (1987), contains, amongst other things, selections from Henryson, Dunbar, and Douglas, and complete texts of the alliterative poems Rauf Coilyear and The Buke of the Howlat. (On alliterative writing in Scots see F. Riddy, ‘The Alliterative Revival’ in Jack (ed.) History of Scottish Literature (below).) The Mercat Anthology of Early Scottish Literature, ed. R.D.S. Jack and P.A.T. Rozendaal (1997) has amongst other things, the fabliau The Freiris of Berwick.

Tale collections are also a popular genre in Older Scots. See, for instance, Colkelbie Sow and The Talis of the Fyve Bestes, ed. G. Kratzmann (New York and London, 1984) and The Thre Prestis of Peblis, ed. T.D. Robb, STS, n.s. 8 (Edinburgh and London, 1920)

Romances In addition to Rauf Coilyear (above), see for example Lancelot of the Laik, in Lancelot of the Laik and Sir Tristram, ed. A. Lupack, TEAMS (Kalamazoo, 1994) and Golagros and Gawane, ed. R. Hanna, STS, 5th ser. 7 (2008) or in Sir Gawain: Eleven Romances and Tales, ed. T. Hahn, TEAMS (1995). A recent and valuable new edition is R. Purdie (ed.), Shorter Scottish Medieval Romances, STS, 5th Ser. 11 (2013) On the genre in Scots, see R. Purdie, ‘Medieval Romance in Scotland’, in Bawcutt and Hadley Williams (eds), Companion (below).

74

Those interested in early Scottish historical literature should read Barbour’s Bruce, 3 vols, ed. M. McDiarmid and J. Stevenson, STS, 4th Ser. (1981-5), there is an edition with translation, ed. A. A. M. Duncan (Canongate paperback, 1997); and Hary’s Wallace, 2 vols. ed. M. McDiarmid, STS, 4th Ser. (1968-9) or ed. A. McKim (Canongate paperback, 2003) A valuable critical account is R. James Goldstein, The Matter of Scotland (1993).

James I, The Kingis Quair ed. J. Norton-Smith (1971, 2nd edn. 1981) or M.P. McDiarmid (1973); also available in J. Boffey (ed.), Fifteenth-Century English Dream Visions: an Anthology (2003) and L.J. Mooney and M-J Arn (eds), The Kingis Quair and Other Prison Poems (2005).

Robert Henryson Read the Fables and the Testament of Cresseid, and make every attempt to do so in the edition by D. Fox (1981; p/b, 1986; h/b has far fuller and more useful intro). There is also a recent (2010) good TEAMS edition by D. Parkinson. D. Gray (ed.), Selected Poems of Robert Henryson and William Dunbar (1998) has all the Fables and the Testament as does the less good J. Tasioulas (ed.), The Makars (1999). A good critical starting-point is still D. Gray, Robert Henryson (Leiden, 1979). See also S. Mapstone, ‘Robert Henryson’, in L. Scanlon (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Medieval English Literature (2009).

William Dunbar The major editions are The Poems of William Dunbar, 2 vols ed. P. Bawcutt (1998) and Selected Poems ed P. Bawcutt (1996), which is very extensive. The edition by J. Kinsley (1979) is preferable to that by W.M. Mackenzie (1932); there are also Selections, ed. Kinsley (1958) and (with Henryson) ed. Gray (1998) and Tasioulas (1999). Criticism should start with P. Bawcutt, Dunbar the Makar (Oxford, 1992). See also S. Mapstone (ed.), William Dunbar, ‘The Nobill Poyet’ (East Linton, 2001).

Gavin Douglas The standard edition of the Palice of Honour is in The Shorter Poems of Gavin Douglas, ed. P. Bawcutt, Scottish Text Society, 4th Ser. 3 (1967, rev. 2003). See also the separate edition (ed.) David Parkinson (1992). The standard edition of the Eneados is Virgil’s Aeneid Translated into Scots by Gavin Douglas, Bishop of Dunkeld, 4 vols, ed. D.F.C. Coldwell, STS 3rd Ser (1957-61). Also of use is Selections from Gavin Douglas, ed. D.F.C. Coldwell (Oxford, 1964); and Poetic Works of Gavin Douglas, 4 vols, ed. J. Small (Edinburgh, 1874). The best starting-point for criticism is P. Bawcutt, Gavin Douglas, A Critical Study (Edinburgh, 1976) and P. Bawcutt, ‘William Dunbar and Gavin Douglas’ in Jack (ed.) History of Scottish Literature, below.

Sir David Lyndsay The standard edition is The Works of Sir David Lindsay, 4 vols, ed. D. Hamer, STS, (1931-6); now very useful for the poetry in Sir David Lyndsay, Selected Poems, ed. J. Hadley Williams (2000)Concentrate on Lyndsay’s Dreme; Complaynt; Testament of the Papyngo; Squyre Meldrum and (if nothing else) Ane Satyre of the Thrie Estaitis. There is a good paperback edition of the Satyre by Roderick Lyall (1989). Useful first criticism is C. Edington, Court and Culture in Renaissance Scotland: Sir David Lindsay of the Mount (1994).

Historical and Political Background J. Brown (ed.), Scottish Society in the Fifteenth Century (1977) M. Brown, James I (1994)

75

J.M. Burns, The True Law of Kingship: Concepts of Monarchy in Early Modern Scotland (1996) J. Cameron, James V (1999) G. Donaldson, Scotland: James V to James VII (1965) A. Grant, Independence and Nationhood, Scotland,1306-1469 (1984, repr. 1991) M. Lynch, Scotland: A New History (1991) N. Macdougall, James III: a Political Study (1992) N. Macdougall, James IV (1989, repr. 1994) L. Macfarlane, William Elphinstone and the Kingdom of Scotland 1431-1514 (1985, repr. 1995) D. McRoberts, Essays on the Scottish Reformation 1513-1625 (1962) R. Mason, Kingship and the Commonweal: Political Thought in Renaissance and Reformation Scotland (1998) R. Nicholson, Scotland, the Later Middle Ages (1974) A. Thomas, Princelie Majestie: The Court of James V of Scotland 1528-1542 (2005) J. Wormald, Court, Kirk, and Community, Scotland, 1470-1625 (1981, repr. 1991)

Literary and Cultural Background and Comparative Studies Several of the collections here also contain useful studies of individual authors. * indicates useful overall guides to the subject, which are useful starting-points.

A.J. Aitken, M.P. McDiarmid and D.S. Thomson (eds), Bards and Makars, Scottish Language and Literature: Medieval and Renaissance (Glasgow, 1977) *P. Bawcutt and J. Hadley Williams (eds), A Companion to Medieval Scottish Poetry (2006) J.J. Blanchot and C. Graf (eds), Actes du 2e Colloque de Langue et de Littérature Ecossaises (Moyen Age et Renaissance) (Strasbourg, 1978) M.P. Bruce and K.H. Terrell (eds), The Anglo-Sottish Border and the Shaping of Identity, 1300-1600 (2012) G. Caie, R. Lyall, S. Mapstone and K. Simpson (eds), The European Sun, Proceedings of the Seventh International Conference on Medieval and Renaissance Scottish Language and Literature (2001) *T. Clancy and M. Pittock (eds), The Cambridge History of Scottish Literature, vol. I (2006, esp. S. Mapstone, ‘Older Scots Literature and the Court’ S. Dunnigan, C. M. Harker and E. Newlyn (eds), Woman and the Feminine in Medieval and Early Modern Scottish Writing (2004) L. Ebin, Illuminator, Makar, Vates: Visions of Poetry in the Fifteenth Century (Lincoln and London 1988) D. Fox, ‘Middle Scots Poets and Patrons’, in J. Scattergood and J.W. Sherborne (eds) English Court Culture in the Later Middle Ages (1983) D. Fox, ‘The Scottish Chaucerians’ in D.S. Brewer (ed.), Chaucer and Chaucerians (1966) L. Fradenburg, City, Marriage, Tournament: Arts of Rule in Late Medieval Scotland (1991) J. Goldstein, ‘Writing in Scotland, 1058-1560’, in D. Wallace (ed.) The Cambridge History of Medieval English Literature (1999) J. Hadley Williams and J.D. McClure (eds), Fresche Fontanis: Studies in the Culture of Medieval and Early Modern Scotland (2013) L.A.J.R. Houwen, A.A.MacDonald and S.L. Mapstone (eds.), A Palace in the Wild:

76

Essays on Vernacular Culture and Humanism in Late-Medieval and Renaissance Scotland (2000) *R.D.S. Jack, (ed) The History of Scottish Literature, vol.I (Aberdeen, 1988) I.W.A. Jamieson, ‘Some Attitudes to Poetry in Late Fifteenth-Century Scotland’, SSL, 15 (1980) C. Jones (ed.) The Edinburgh History of the Scots Language (1997) G. Kratzmann, Anglo-Scottish Literary Relations, 1430-1550 (Cambridge, 1980) R.J. Lyall and F. Riddy (eds), Proceedings of the Third International Conference on Scottish Language and Literature (Stirling and Glasgow, 1982), particularly Louise Fradenburg, ‘The Scottish Chaucer’ R.J. Lyall ‘Books and Book Owners in Fifteenth-Century Scotland’ in J. Griffiths and D. Pearsall (eds), Book Production and Publishing in Britain 1375 - 1475 (Cambridge, 1989; repr. 2007) R.J. Lyall, ‘The Court as a Cultural Centre’ in History Today, 34 (1984) pp 27-33 and in J. Wormald (ed.) Scotland Revisited (1991) R.J. Lyall, ‘Politics and Poetry in Fifteenth and Sixteenth Century Scotland’, SLJ, 3 (1976) J.D. McClure and M. Spiller (eds), Brycht Lanternis Essays on the Language and Literature of Medieval and Renaissance Scotland (Aberdeen, 1989) S. Mapstone, ‘Scotland’s Stories’, in J. Wormald (ed.), Scotland: A History (2005) S. Mapstone (ed.), Older Scots Literature (2005) S. Mapstone and J. Wood (eds), The Rose and the Thistle: Essays on the Culture of Late Medieval and Renaissance Scotland (1998) J. Martin, Kingship and Love in Scottish Poetry, 1424-1540 (Aldershot, 2008) A.J. Mill, Mediaeval Plays in Scotland (Edinburgh and London, 1927) N. Royan, ‘Scottish Literature’, in D. Johnson and E. Treharne (eds), Readings in Medieval Texts: Interpreting Od and Middle English Literature (2005) N. Royan, ‘Writing the Nation’, in A Companion to English Renaissance Literature and Culture, ed. M. Hattaway (2000) N. Royan and R. Purdie (eds), The Scots and Medieval Arthurian Legend (2005) N. Royan (ed.), ‘Langage Cleir Illumynate’: Scottish Poetry from Barbour to Drummond, 1375-1630 (2007) D. Strauss and H. Drescher (eds), Scottish Language and Literature, Medieval and Renaissance (Frankfurt, 1986) Studies in Scottish Literature, 26 (1991), particularly Sally Mapstone, ‘Was there a Court Literature in Fifteenth-Century Scotland?’ T. van Heinsbergen and N. Royan (eds), Literature, Letters and the Canonical in Early Modern Scotland (2002) J. H. Williams (ed.), Stewart Style 1513-1542: Essays on the Court of James V (1996) E. Wingfield, The Trojan Legend in Medieval Scottish Literature (2014)

TRAGICOMEDY FROM THE GREEKS TO SHAKESPEARE Professor John Pitcher ([email protected]) In the Renaissance, poets and dramatists imitated classical writers and experimented with classical genres. Often they tried to outdo their predecessors by varying the form they had inherited (e.g. the ode, or the singing contest between shepherds); sometimes they acknowledged that they had done nothing more than give a new name to an old form. Only a very few of their literary forms (e.g. the sonnet) was entirely new. One form that seemed new and special to them, and which some of them claimed they had created afresh, was tragicomedy.

77

This is the form that this MSt C course in Michaelmas Term 2015 is devoted to—tragicomedy, the dramatic genre invented (seized on) by Euripides, re-invented in Renaissance Italy after the publication of Aristotle’s Poetics, and developed in the English public theatres in the early seventeenth century.

Students taking this course will be used to the concepts of tragedy and comedy, and they will have read and seen many examples in Shakespeare and other writers. They may be less familiar with Euripides, Tasso, Marston and Middleton, and with the early modern debates about the origins and characteristics of tragicomedy. The aim of this course is to set out, in broad terms, a narrative and a theoretical framework for the genre, providing opportunities to examine particular plays, their contexts in society (the city state of Athens or the elite court of the d’Este family), and the innovations introduced into tragicomedy, particularly in the course of the sixteenth century. The course ends with four of Shakespeare’s plays viewed from this generic perspective.

A note on translations and other reading: nine of the texts on the course are in Greek or Latin or Italian. The translations in the Penguin Classics, Worlds Classics and Loeb editions are all suitable, as are Lattimore’s versions of Euripides etc. Particular texts need detailed annotation (e.g. Halliwell’s commentary on Aristotle’s Poetics). Seventeenth century translations of Tasso and Guarini are valuable, in some cases crucial (e.g. Marston used the 1602 Dymoke version of Il Pastor Fido when writing The Malcontent), but they need to be supplemented with modern ones. Students taking the course will receive further guidance about translations just before the start of Michaelmas Term. Editions of some of the plays are very good (e.g. the Jernigan and Marchegiani edition and translation of Aminta); again, these will be recommended before the course begins. The secondary literature—a mix of newer with older criticism and scholarship—is only a beginning, and will need to be added to. This is especially true of critical writing on Shakespeare, which is vast.

Week 1 : What is Tragedy, and what is Comedy? Tragedy and mixed tragedy in antiquity, and tragicomedy in the Renaissance were self-reflexive in varying degrees. In this class particular attention will be paid to consciousness of genre. Students should familarise themselves with the essays in David Duff (ed.), Modern Genre Theory (1999), as well as the following: Sophocles, Oedipus the King Aristophanes, Frogs Aristotle, Poetics Hoy, Cyrus, The Hyacinth Room: An Investigation into the Nature of Comedy, Tragedy, and Tragicomedy (1964) Easterling, P.E. (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Greek Tragedy (1997) Silk, M.S., Aristophanes and the Definition of Comedy (2002) Joe Sachs’s essay on the Poetics in the Internet Encyclopaedia of Philosophy

Week 2: Mixed Tragedy—or why does Tragicomedy exist? Euripides’ experiments with tragedy—new gods, impossible escapes from what seems ineluctable, different moods and feelings—have been of special interest to modern classical scholars. Did Euripides invent tragicomedy in all but name, and did the ancient world chose to forget what he had done? Euripides, Alcestis, Iphigenia at Tauris and Iphigenia at Aulis Burnett, Anne Pippin, Catastrophe Survived (1971)

78

Knox, Bernard, Word and Action: Essays on the Ancient Theater (1979) Foster, Verna A., The Name and Nature of Tragicomedy (2004) Hirst, David L., Tragicomedy (1984)

Week 3: Pastoral Tragicomedy: boys, eclogues and satyrs During the sixteenth century, Italian writers and academics in ducal courts and in the universities read the newly rediscovered Poetics, and vehemently disputed the nature of tragedy. Out of this ferment (and Virgil’s Eclogues), Tasso created a new form, tragicomedy, the play of boys with girls with satyrs, and then Guarini perfected it—at least that’s what Guarini said happened. Is it true? Tasso, Aminta Guarini, Il Pastor Fido Virgil, Eclogues Allan H. Gilbert (ed.), Literary Criticism: Plato to Dryden (1940) Herrick, M. T., Tragicomedy: Its Origin and Development in Italy, France and England (1955) Bernard Weinberg, ‘The Quarrel over Guarini’s Pastor Fido’, in A History of Literary Criticism in the Italian Renaissance (2 vols. 1961), 2, 1074-1112 Louise George Clubb, Italian Drama in Shakespeare’s Time (1989) Maguire, Nancy Klein (ed.), Renaissance Tragicomedy: Exploration in Genre and politics (1987) Louise George Clubb, Italian Drama in Shakespeare’s Time (1989) Kahn, Victoria: ‘The Passions and the Interests in Early Modern Europe: The Case of Guarini's Il Pastor fido’, in (pp. 217-39) Paster, Rowe, , Floyd-Wilson, Mary (eds.), Reading the Early Modern Passions:, Philadelphia, PA (2004) Lyne, Raphael: ‘English Guarini: Recognition and Reception’, Yearbook of English Studies, 36:1 (2006,) 90-102

Week 4: Tragicomedy in England: (1) shepherds, boys and satyrs In the early 1580s, Sidney deplored the mongrel plays he saw acted in the public theatres, with their confusions of manners and form, and the players’ ignorance of what proper tragedy was. Serious attempts to bring Italian tragicomedy to the aid of the public stage began in England around 1600, in unusual circumstances, with even more unusual connections with satire and public criticism on court and state matters. John Marston, The Malcontent Samuel Daniel, The Queen’s Arcadia and Hymen’s Triumph Philip Sidney, A Defence of Poetry David Orr, Italian Renaissance Drama in England Before 1625 (1970) G. K. Hunter, ‘Italian Tragicomedy on the English Stage’, Renaissance Drama, 6 (1973), 123-148 James J. Yoch, ‘A Greater Power Than We Can Contradict: The Voice of Authority in the Staging of Italian Pastorals’, The Elizabethan Theatre, VIII (1982), ed. G. R. Hibbard, 164-87 Lucy Munro, Children of the Queen’s Revels (2005) Michele Marrapodi (ed.), Italian Culture in the Drama of Shakespeare and His Contemporaries (2007)

Week 5: Tragicomedy in England: (2) et in Arcadia ego Tragicomedy is sometimes defined simply as tragedy without death—promising the catastrophe but ultimately sparing the audience the tragic ordeal. How far the form might deal with the deathliness of ‘civilisation’ (control of desire, greed and calumny at court) and the loss of the Golden Age was a question the English public stage began to ask during the early seventeenth century. Samuel Daniel, ‘A Pastoral’ and ‘Ulysses and the Siren’

79

Thomas Middleton, The Witch John Fletcher, The Faithful Shepherdess and Philaster Lee Bliss, ‘Tragicomic Romance for the King’s Men, 1609-11: Shakespeare, Beaumont and Fletcher’ in A.R. Braunmuller (ed.), Comedy from Shakespeare to Sheridan (1986) Philip J. Finkelpearl, Court and Country Politics in the Plays of Beaumont and Fletcher (1990) Mukherji, Subha, and Lyne, Raphael (eds.), Early Modern Tragicomedy (2007)

Week 6 : Shakespeare’s versions of mixed comedy and tragicomedy It is often said that Shakespeare’s interest in tragicomedy begins inside his comedies and tragedies, and that he combines it with romance at certain points. Does it help to understand these combinations in terms of the ‘Guarini phenomenon’; did Italian tragicomedy help him to clarify what he wanted to say in his later plays? Much Ado About Nothing All’s Well that Ends Well King Lear The Winter’s Tale Robert Henke, Pastoral Transformations: Italian Tragicomedy and Shakespeare’s Late Plays (1997) John Jones, Shakespeare at Work (2005) Barbara A. Mowat, “‘What's in a Name?” Tragicomedy, Romance, or Late Comedy” in Richard Dutton and Jean E. Howard (eds.), A Companion to Shakespeare's Works 4 (2005)

DOCUMENTS OF THEATRE HISTORY Professor Tiffany Stern ([email protected]) Professor Bart Van Es ([email protected])

Some of the most exciting current work on Shakespeare and other Early Modern dramatists is grounded in an awareness of the material documents that surround plays and make them up. What was once thought the preserve of bibliographers and archivists has been taken up by the newly emerging ‘stage to page’ field, and observations about the nature of censorship, co-authorship, and revision, are being placed side-by-side with discoveries about acting, props, and company structure. Yet even now some scholars remain restricted in the range of documents that they use. All too often, critics restrict themselves only to the well-known Shakespeare quartos and his 1623 Folio. Those texts are immensely important, of course, but new criticism requires an understanding of the many, many other theatrical documents that survive – or can be traced – to shed crucial light on the material circumstances of the early modern stage. This course will familiarize students with just some of the documents that can enable us to rethink literary texts: manuscript plays; actors’ parts; scrolls; financial accounts (for playwriting, props and clothes); company information. In so doing, it will provide information about the way playwrights wrote and rewrote; the way prompters reorganized textual information; the way actors learnt plays; and the way props and other materials became essential parts of the play on the page as well as the stage. Each class will focus on a particular category of material for primary research, and each class will feature a play that can be analyzed in the light of those documents – or, on occasion, that is one of those documents. Our plays will be Anthony Munday et el’s The Book of Sir Thomas More, Robert Greene’s Orlando Furioso; John Marston’s The Malcontent; Christopher Marlowe’s Dr Faustus; and Ben Jonson’s Poetaster. The final class will turn to William Shakespeare. In the light of discoveries made in the previous five classes, we will explore how a knowledge of theatrical documents enables us to rethink the two texts of Shakespeare’s Othello. The course, then, sets out to equip students with current page-to-stage criticism, and a wide range of the approaches and resources crucial for independent graduate work. It will enable a richly nuanced 80

and complex sense of how a play came to be written, and how it was manifested on the stage and by whom, raising questions about what a ‘play’ actually is.

General Background Reading Gerard Eades Bentley, The Profession of Dramatist in Shakespeare’s Time (Princeton UP, 1986) Gerard Eades Bentley, The Profession of Player in Shakespeare’s Time (Princeton UP, 1986) John D. Cox and David Scott Kastan ed., A New History of Early English Drama (New York: Columbia UP, 1997) John Jones, Shakespeare at Work (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1995) Orgel Stephen, ‘What is a Text?’ Research Opportunities in Renaissance Drama, 24 (1981), 3-6 Stephen Orgel, ‘Acting Scripts, Performing Texts’, in Crisis in Editing ed. Randall McLeod (New York: AMS Press, 1994), 251-94 Tiffany Stern, Making Shakespeare (London: Routledge, 2004) Tiffany Stern, Documents of Performance in Early Modern England (Cambridge: CUP, 2009) Gary Taylor, ‘Revising Shakespeare’, TEXT, 3 (1997), 285-304 Bart van Es, Shakespeare in Company (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013)

Week 1: Surviving Documents: Plays Work in the first week will focus on a play manuscript, The Book of Sir Thomas More, which directly features the hands of several playwrights – perhaps including Shakespeare – as well as theatrical personnel and scribes. We will consider the play in facsimile and will ask what editors have made of it. Topics for presentations will include the following: 1) What does Sir Thomas More reveal about theatrical revision? 2) What does Sir Thomas More reveal about the nature of collaboration? 3) What questions do manuscript plays for the professional theatre raise about printed plays? 4) What problems do editors confront when faced with a manuscript– rather than a printed – play? 5) Have questions about Shakespearean attribution skewed our understanding of Sir Thomas More?

Primary Texts Facsimiles The Book of Sir Thomas Moore ed. John S. Farmer, Tudor Facsimile Texts, folio Series (1910; repr. New York, 1970) The Book of Sir Thomas More, ed. W. W. Greg for the Malone Society (Oxford, 1911) repr with supplement by Harold Jenkins (1961) Editions Anthony Munday and others, Sir Thomas More, ed. by Vittorio Gabrieli and Giorgio Melchiori, Revels Plays (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1988) Sir Thomas More, ed. John Jowett for Arden Shakespeare (London: Methuen, 2011) Sir Thomas More, ed. Gerard B. Wegemer and Stephen W. Smith in A Thomas More soure Book (Washington, DC, 2004), 66-156. Secondary Reading Michael A. Anderegg, ‘The Book of Sir Thomas More and its Sources’, Moreana, 14 (1977), 57-62 Grace Ioppolo, Dramatists and Their Manuscripts in the Age of Shakespeare, Jonson, Middleton and Heywood: Authorship, Authority, and the Playhouse (London: Routledge, 2006), pp. 55-60 John Jones, ‘The One Manuscript: Sir Thomas More’ in Shakespeare at Work (Oxford: OUP, 1995) John Jowett, ‘Addressing Adaptation: Measure for Measure and Sir Thomas More’ in Textual Performances ed. Lukas Erne and M. J. Kidnie (2004) Scott McMillin, The Elizabethan Theatre and the Book of Sir Thomas More (Ithaca and London: Cornell UP, 1997)

81

Eric Rasmussen, ‘Setting down what the Clown Spoke: Improvisation, Hand B and the Book of Sir Thomas More’, The Library, 6th series, 13 (1991), 126-36

Week 2: Surviving Documents: ‘Parts’ Work this week will focus on Robert Greene’s Orlando Furioso, famously sold to two theatrical companies, perhaps in two different forms. A printed text, perhaps corrupt, survives for it, as does a ‘good’ manuscript actor’s ‘part’ (the text an actor received, consisting of his lines and cues) for performance by the great actor Edward Alleyn. That part both provides a variant and reveals crucial information about early modern preparation and rehearsal. Questions for discussion and presentations include the following: 1) What does a comparison of play and part for Orlando Furioso tell us about textual circulation? 2) How does manuscript complicate print and vice versa? 3) How do actors’ ‘parts’ relate conceptually to whole plays? 4) What do cues and other features of parts tell us about plays and performance? 3) What might parts tell us about play construction?

Primary Text: Robert Greene, Orlando Furioso Text W. W. Greg, ed., Two Elizabethan Stage Abridgements: ‘The Battle of Alcazar’ and ‘Orlando Furioso’ (Oxford: Malone Society, 1922) ‘Part’ W. W. Greg, ed. ‘Part of Orlando’ Dramatic Documents from the Elizabethan Playhouses: Stage Plots, Actors’ Parts, Prompt Books, 2 vols (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1969), 1. This is an ‘elephant folio’! It is huge – don’t try to take it home! http://www.henslowe-alleyn.org.uk/essays/orlando.html Edition Robert Greene, Orlando Furioso in The Plays & Poems of Robert Greene, ed by J. Churton Collins, 2 vols (Freeport: Books for Libraries Press, 1905; repr. 1970) Secondary Reading David Carnegie, ‘Actors’ parts and the “Play of Poore”, Harvard Library Bulletin, 30 (1982), 5-24 Paul Menzer, ‘Introduction’, The Hamlets: Cues, Qs, and Remembered Texts (Associated University Presses, 2008) Simon Palfrey and Tiffany Stern, ‘Introduction’, and ‘The Actor’s Part’ Shakespeare in Parts (Oxford: OUP, 2007) Tiffany Stern, ‘Actors’ Parts’, Handbook on Early Modern Theatre ed. Richard Dutton (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2009), 496-512 Michael Warren, ‘Green’s Orlando: W. W. Greg Furioso’ in Textual formations and Reformations ed. Laurie E. Maguire, Thomas L. Berger (Newark: University of Delaware Press, 1998)

Week 3: Lost Documents: Scrolls in Printed Texts This week we’ll compare printed texts of a single play, John Marston’s The Malcontent. It was published three times in 1604, once in earlier form and twice in revised form including additions and a new induction by John Webster. Feel free to read the play in a modern edited edition – but be sure to look at both versions of the text on EEBO! We’ll be thinking, this week about scolls: discrete passages of play that circulated aside from the whole text, like songs, letters, proclamations, bills. Questions for your presentations might include: 1) What do the two versions of The Malcontent tell us about revision? 2) What do the two version of The Malcontent tell us about collaboration? 3) How do ‘scrolls’ relate conceptually to whole plays? 4) How might scrolls and/or variant texts complicate our dating of plays? 5) What do scrolls tell us about the manuscripts that actors and/or printers received? Primary Texts

82

Facsimiles on EEBO http://eebo.chadwyck.com/search/full_rec?SOURCE=pgthumbs.cfg&ACTION=ByID&ID=99847541 &FILE=../session/1367442916_12017&SEARCHSCREEN=CITATIONS&SEARCHCONFIG=var_s pell.cfg&DISPLAY=AUTHOR http://eebo.chadwyck.com/search/full_rec?SOURCE=pgimages.cfg&ACTION=ByID&ID=99847546 &FILE=../session/1367442916_12017&SEARCHSCREEN=CITATIONS&VID=12583&PAGENO= 3&ZOOM=&VIEWPORT=&SEARCHCONFIG=var_spell.cfg&DISPLAY=AUTHOR&HIGHLIGH T_KEYWORD= Editions John Marston, The Malcontent, ed. George K. Hunter, Revels (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1999) John Marston, The Malcontent, ed. W. David Kay for New Mermaids (London: A and C Black, 1998) Secondary Reading Charles Cathcart, ‘John Marston, "The Malcontent", and the King's Men’, Review of English Studies, 57 (2006), 43-63 Kevin A. Quarmby, ‘The Malcontent: a Play in Two Forms’, in The Disguised Ruler in Shakespeare and his Contemporaries (Surrey: Ashgate, 2012) Kiernan Ryan, ‘The Malcontent: hunting the letter’ in The Drama of John Marston: Critical Re- Visions ed. T. F. Wharton, T. F. (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000) Tiffany Stern, ‘Introduction’, ‘Prologues’, ‘Scrolls’ in Documents of Performance (Cambridge: CUP, 2009) Akihiro Yamada, Q1-3 of The Malcontent, 1604, and the Compositors (Tokyo: Kinokuniya, 1980)

Week 4: Beyond the play: Contextual Documents Philip Henslowe, who was financially responsible for the Admiral’s Men at the Rose theatre, and whose son-in-law Edward Alleyn was his theatre’s lead actor, has left telling contextual documents about early modern theatre. Using a play for which Henslowe paid for writing, props and revisions, Christopher Marlowe’s Dr Faustus, we will consider what contextual documents can reveal about plays. Presentations might consider such questions as: 1) What do financial lists reveal about the theatrical process, and what do they hide? 2) What do Henslowe’s diaries tell us about collaboration and can you trace the result in the two versions of Dr Faustus? 3) How does knowing more about Edward Alleyn affect our reading of Faustus (in one or other form)? 4) How can prop and costume lists help us analyze Dr Faustus? 5) How does the date of publication of the A and B texts of Dr Faustus modify our knowledge of the play’s relationship to Henslowe? Primary Texts Faustus: Facsimile 1604 http://eebo.chadwyck.com/search/full_rec?SOURCE=pgimages.cfg&ACTION=ByID&ID=V20862 1616 http://eebo.chadwyck.com/search/full_rec?SOURCE=pgimages.cfg&ACTION=ByID&ID=V21791 Faustus Editions Christopher Marlowe, Doctor Faustus A- and B-texts (1604, 1616): Christopher Marlowe and his Collaborator and Revisers ed. David Bevington and Eric Rasmussen (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1993) W. W. Greg, Marlowe’s Doctor Faustus 1604-1616. Parallel texts (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1950) Henslowe Facsimile Henslowe-Alleyn Digitisation Project: http://www.henslowe-alleyn.org.uk/index.html Henslowe Editions

83

R. A. Foakes, ed., Henslowe’s Diary, 2nd edition (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002) W. W. Greg, ed., Henslowe Papers: being Documents Supplementary to Henslowe's Diary (London: A. H. Bullen, 1907) Secondary Reading: S. P. Cerasano, ‘Henslowe’s “Curious” Diary’, Medieval and Renaissance Drama in England, 17, (2005), 72-85 S. P. Cerasano, ‘Philip Henslowe, Simon Forman, and the Theatrical Community of the 1590s’, Shakespeare Quarterly, 44 (1993), 145-158 Natasha Korda, ‘Household Property/Stage Property: Henslowe as Pawnbroker’, Theatre Journal, 48 (1996), 185-195 Fredson Bowers, ‘Marlowe's "Doctor Faustus": The 1602 Additions’, Studies in Bibliography, 26 (1973), 1-18 Eric Rasmussen, ‘Rehabilitating the A-Text of Marlowe's "Doctor Faustus"’, Studies in Bibliography, 46, (1993), 221-238

Week 5: Beyond the Play: Companies What does an understanding of the construction and make up of a theatre company tell us about plays? What can we learn by thinking about places of performance? This week we will look at the way specific performance conditions enjoyed by particular companies may have brought about particular kinds of play. Our primary text will be Ben Jonson’s Poetaster, first performed by the Children of the Chapel at Blackfriars in 1601-2. The play is relevant to our topic this week because it explicitly depicts and parodies rival authors, audiences, and companies. It is a central text in the so- called ‘Poets’ War’, attacking Marston and Dekker who were employed by the rival children’s company at St Paul’s. It also attacks adult companies, possibly including Shakespeare and the Chamberlain’s Men. The play exists in a quarto and folio version, with notable differences between them (as a result, partly, of censorship). Questions for presentations might include: 1) how important is company identity to an understanding of plays? 2) how distinct were the indoor and outdoor stages? 3) did playwrights have greater control when writing for children as opposed to adults? 4) how important is audience composition? 5) what was the effect of the differing arrangements for censorship for the adult and the children’s stage?

Primary Reading Ben Jonson, Poetaster, ed. by Tom Cain Revels Plays (Manchester, 1995) Ben Jonson, Poetaster, ed. by Gabriele Berhard Jackson, in Ben Jonson, Works, ed. David Bevington, Martin Butler, and Ian Donaldson, 7 vols (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2012), volume 2 Secondary Reading Edel Lamb, Performing Childhood in the Early Modern Theatre: The Childrens Playing Companies (1599-1613) (Palgrave MacMillan, Houndsmills, 2008) Lucy Munro, Children of the Queen’s Revels: A Jacobean Theatre Repertory (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2005), 1-53 Michael Shapiro, Children of the Revels: the Boy Companies of Shakespeare’s Time and their Plays (New York: Columbia University Press, 1977) Bart van Es, Shakespeare in Company (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013), 195-231 Andrew Gurr, Playgoing in Shakespeare’s London, 2nd edition (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996), 60-80

84

Week 6: Shakespeare and the Documents of Theatre History How does your experience of theatrical documents affect your understanding of Shakespeare? This class gives you the opportunity to apply what you have learned to a Shakespearean text. We’ll be considering Shakespeare’s Othello, which survives in two interestingly variant forms, both published after Shakespeare’s death. Questions you may wish to explore include: 1) What do the two versions of Othello reveal about Shakespeare’s revision process? 2) What does dividing Othello into ‘parts’ reveal about the construction or performance of the text? 3) What scrolls can you spot in Othello, and how has revision responded to them? 4) What properties or costumes does the play require, and how can we analyze Othello, in either form, through considering them? 5) What is Othello’s company context, and what light does that question throw on the text?

Primary Text Othello ed. E. A. J. Honigmann for Arden Shakespeare (2001) Othello ed. Michael Neill for Oxford Shakespeare (2006) The First Quarto of Othello ed. Scott McMillin (2001) Secondary Reading Thomas L. Berger, ‘The Second Quarto of Othello and the Question of. Textual “Authority”’, in Othello: New Perspectives, ed. Virginia Mason Vaughan (1991) Leah S. Marcus, ‘The Two Texts of Othello and Early Modern Constructions of Race’ in Textual Performances ed. Lukas Erne and M. J. Kidnie (2004) Lois Potter, ‘Introduction’, Othello in Performance (2002)

ROMANTIC TO VICTORIAN: WORDSWORTH’S WRITINGS 1787-1845 Professor Stephen Gill ([email protected])

William Wordsworth (1770-1850) published his first poem two years before the beginning of the Revolution in France: his last, as Queen Victoria’s Poet Laureate, just as preparations for the Great Exhibition were under way. He was the only one of the major Romantic poets to have experienced revolutionary France first hand and yet he lived long enough to discuss poetry with Tennyson and to share with Dickens concern over contemporary social attitudes.

This course will trace threads through Wordsworth’s poetry (and some prose) from Lyrical Ballads of 1798 to Poems (1845). The Prelude will of course figure largely, but attention will be given to the range of Wordsworth’s lyric poetry over his lifetime—from Romantic to Victorian. Diverse approaches will be taken—historical contextual, biographical, textual— but the emphasis will be on the poems themselves and careful reading and attention to artistic detail will be the core element of the seminar.

Reading the poems more than once, with care, is the only preparation required for the course, but it is essential. The edition used for the seminar will be William Wordsworth [21st Century Oxford Authors], ed. Stephen Gill (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2010). Read as much as possible in pages 3 to 302, with special attention given to both versions of The Prelude (1799 and 1805), and follow the notes at the back of the book. They are vital.

My biography, William Wordsworth: A Life (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989), remains the only one to cover the whole of Wordsworth’s poetic career. Further introductory material across all aspects of the work will be found in The Cambridge Companion to William Wordsworth, ed. Stephen Gill (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003); The Oxford Handbook to William Wordsworth, ed. Richard Gravil and Daniel Robinson (Oxford: 85

Oxford University Press, 2015; William Wordsworth in Context, ed. Andrew Bennett (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2015.

Further suggestions for secondary reading will of course be made for each seminar.

LITERATURE IN BRIEF Dr Freya Johnston ([email protected]) The soul of wit and the mother of obscurity, brevity in writing is also – according to Sydney Smith – what charity is to all other virtues.

Focusing mostly on prose from the seventeenth to the nineteenth centuries, this C-Course option examines various kinds of short or fragmentary work and its formal determinacy or indeterminacy. Brief ‘characters’ of people and manners, aphorisms, epigrams, maxims, anecdotes, table-talk and observations often advertised their immediate applicability to their readers; gathered together, these individual scraps might add up to very substantial, albeit perpetually incomplete, publications. As Samuel Johnson told James Boswell, ‘I love anecdotes. I fancy mankind may come, in time, to write all aphoristically, except in narrative; grow weary of preparation, and connection, and illustration, and all those arts by which a big book is made. If a man is to wait till he weaves anecdotes into a system, we may be long in getting them, and get but a few, in comparison of what we might get.’

From the mid-eighteenth century onwards, the fragmentary text evolved into something approaching a genre in its own right, often provoking readers’ sympathetic participation and fostering attempts at its completion or continuation. Such acts of collaborative writing, intervention, noting, and correcting are also in evidence at the edges and foot of the page; the final seminar of the course considers some ways in which marginalia might be thought of as forms of literary criticism and composition in their own right (this option will therefore also be useful for any students interested in working on authors’ responses to or revisions of other writers for their dissertations or B-course essays).

Most of the primary and secondary materials listed below can be found and read online if necessary; some critical works are included here because of their suggestive or helpful approach to related texts, rather than because they comment directly on the primary works under discussion each week. In any case, it is much more important to read and think about those primary texts than it is to do anything else by way of preparation. Each student will be expected to give one presentation in the course of the six classes.

1. Society in Miniature Joseph Hall, Characters of Virtues and Vices (1608) John Earle, Microcosmographie, or a Peece of the World discovered, in Essayes and Characters (1628) Jean de la Bruyère, The Characters, or the Manners of the Age … made English by several hands; with the Characters of Theophrastus (1699) George Eliot, Impressions of Theophrastus Such (1879)

Secondary reading: Kathryn Murphy, ‘The Anxiety of Variety: Knowledge and Experience in Montaigne, Burton, and Bacon’, in Yota Batsaki, Subha Mukherji, and Jan-Melissa Schramm, eds., Fictions of Knowledge: Fact, Evidence, Doubt (2011)

86

Jacques Bos, ‘Individuality and Inwardness in the Literary Character Sketches of the Seventeenth Century’, Journal of the Warburg and Courtauld Institutes, 61 (1998), 142-157 Benjamin Boyce, The Theophrastan Character in English to 1642 (1948) Bruce McIver, ‘John Earle: The Unwillingly Willing Author of Microcosmography’, English Studies (1991), 72:3, 219-229

2. Aphorisms, Maxims, Epigrams Richard Flecknoe, Epigrams of All Sorts (1670) Hermann Boerhaave, Boerhaave’s Aphorisms: Concerning the Knowledge and Cure of Diseases (1715) Charles Palmer, A Collection of Select Aphorisms and Maxims (1748) Johann Caspar Lavater, trans. Henry Fuseli, Aphorisms on Man (1788) Anon., Select Epigrams, 2 vols. (1797)

Secondary reading: James Doelman, ‘Epigrams and Political Satire in Early Stuart England’, Huntington Library Quarterly, 69 (2006), 31-46 Isobel Grundy, ‘Samuel Johnson: Man of Maxims?’, in Samuel Johnson: New Critical Essays, ed. Isobel Grundy (1984) Mary J. Muratore, ‘Deceived by Truth: The Maxim as a Discourse of Deception in La Princesse de Clèves’, Zeitschrift für französische Sprache und Literatur, 104 (1994), 29-37

3. Anecdotes and Observations Joseph Spence, Observations, Anecdotes and Characters of Books and Men, 2 vols. [mid-18th-c.; first publ. 1820], ed. James M. Osborn (1966) Hester Lynch Piozzi, Anecdotes of the Late Samuel Johnson, LL.D., During the Last Twenty Years of his Life (1786) Isaac Disraeli, A Dissertation on Anecdotes (1793) John Nichols, Literary Anecdotes of the Eighteenth Century, 9 vols. (1812-16)

Secondary reading: Sande Cohen, ‘A Critical Analysis of the Historiographic Anecdote’, in History Out of Joint: Essays on the Uses and Abuses of History (2006), pp. 126-50 Joel Fineman, ‘The History of the Anecdote: Fiction and Fiction’, in H. Aram Veeser, ed., The New Historicism (1989), pp. 49-76 Lionel Gossman, ‘Anecdote and History’, History and Theory, 42 (2003), 143-68 Marcel Hénaff and Jean-Louis Morhange, ‘The Anecdotal: Truth in Detail’, SubStance, 38 (2009), 97-111 Donald A. Stauffer, The Art of Biography in Eighteenth-Century England (1941)

4. Fragments, Extracts, Scraps Laurence Sterne, A Sentimental Journey through France and Italy (1768) Jane Austen, ‘Detached Pieces’, and ‘Scraps’ in Juvenilia (1780s-90s) Samuel Taylor Coleridge, ‘Kubla Khan; or, A Vision in a Dream: A Fragment’ (1797) Stevie Smith, ‘Thoughts about the Person from Porlock’ (1972)

Secondary reading: J. David Grey, ed., Jane Austen’s Beginnings: The Juvenilia and Lady Susan (1989)

87

Elizabeth W. Harries, The Unfinished Manner: Essays on the Fragment in the Later Eighteenth Century (1994) Anne Mellor, English Romantic Irony (1980) Seamus Perry, ‘Coleridge’s Literary Influence’, in The Oxford Handbook of Samuel Taylor Coleridge, ed. Frederick Burwick (2009), pp. 661-76

5. Table talk John Selden, Table Talk (1689) John Kidgell, Table-Talk. September 1745 (1747) William Hazlitt, Table-talk; or, Original Essays (1824) ------, Conversations of James Northcote (1830) Samuel Taylor Coleridge, Table Talk (1835) Alexander Dyce, Recollections of the Table Talk of Samuel Rogers (1856)

Secondary reading: David Bromwich, Hazlitt: The Mind of a Critic (1983) Anthony Grafton, Worlds Made by Words: Scholarship and Community in the Modern West (2010) Carl H. Klaus, The Made-up Self: Impersonation in the Personal Essay (2009) Seamus Perry, ‘The Talker’, in The Cambridge Companion to Samuel Taylor Coleridge, ed. Lucy Newlyn (2002) G. J. Toomer, John Selden: A Life in Scholarship (2009) F. P. Wilson, ‘Table Talk’, Huntington Library Quarterly, 4 (1940), 27-46

6. Notes, Queries, Marginalia William Blake, annotations to Joshua Reynolds, Discourses on Art (1769-70) and to Johann Caspar Lavater, trans. Henry Fuseli, Aphorisms on Man (1788), in e.g. William Blake: Complete Writings, ed. Geoffrey Keynes (1969 and reprinted); R. J. Shroyer, ed., Aphorisms on Man (1980); Robert Wark, ed., Sir Joshua Reynolds: Discourses on Art (1951 and reprinted) John Keats, annotations to Paradise Lost, in Beth Lau, ed., Keats’s Paradise Lost (1998)

Secondary reading: Hazard Adams, Blake’s Margins: An Interpretive Study of the Annotations (2009) Joe Bray, Miriam Handley and Anne C. Henry, eds., Mar(k)ing the Text: The Presentation of Meaning on the Literary Page (2000) Sibylle Erle, Blake, Lavater and Physiognomy (2010) Beth Lau, ‘Editing Keats’s Marginalia’, Text, 7 (1994), 337-48 H. J. Jackson, Marginalia: Readers Writing in Books (2001) ------, Romantic Readers: The Evidence of Marginalia (2005) Jeanne Moskal, ‘The Problem of Forgiveness in Blake’s Annotations to Lavater’, Studies in Philology, 86 (1989), 69-86 Jason Allen Smart, The Torn Book: Unreading William Blake’s Marginalia (2006)

88

WOMEN’S POETRY 1700-1830 Professor Christine Gerrard ([email protected]) This course will explore the rich diversity of verse written by women poets during the eighteenth century and Romantic era. The approach will be thematic and generic, focusing on issues such as manuscript versus print culture, women’s coterie writing, the imitation and contestation of male poetic models, amatory and libertine poetry, public and political verse on issues such as dynastic struggle, revolution and slavery, and representations of domestic and manual labour. Students will be encouraged to explore the work of less familiar female poets and to pursue original lines of research. We will be paying particular attention to the work of Ann Finch, Sarah Fyge Egerton, Mary Collier, Mary Barber, Mary Leapor, Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, Martha Fowke, Anna Laetitia Barbauld, Ann Yearsley, Ann Robinson, Charlotte Smith, Hannah More and Anna Seward.

Week 1: Women in Nature Texts: Anne Finch, ‘Upon the Hurricane’, ‘A Nocturnal Reverie’; Martha Fowke, ‘An Invitation to a Country Cottage’; Anna Laetitia Barbauld, ‘A Summer Evening’s Meditation’; Ann Yearsley, ‘Clifton Hill’; Anna Seward ‘To The Poppy’. Background texts: Bridget Keegan, British Labouring-class Nature Poetry, 1730-1837 (2008); Christine Gerrard, ‘The Country and the City’, in The History of British Women’s Writing, 1690- 1750, vol. 4, ed. Ros Ballaster (2010).

Week 2: The Rights and Wrongs of Women Texts: Sarah Fyge Egerton, ‘The Liberty’ and ‘The Emulation’; Anne Finch, ‘The Spleen’; Mary Leapor, ‘Man the Monarch’; Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, ‘The Lover’ and ‘On the Death of Mrs Bower’; Mary Barber, ‘An Epistle to the Reverend Mr C’; Mehitabel Wright, ‘Wedlock: A Satire’ and ‘Address to Her Husband’; Anna Laetitia Barbauld, ‘The Rights of Woman’. Background texts: Mary Astell, Reflections on Marriage in The First English Feminist: "Reflections on Marriage" and Other Writings by Mary Astell, ed Bridget Hill (Ashgate, 1998); Mary Wollestonecraft, A Vindication of the Rights of Woman (1792).

Week 3: The Construction of Beauty Texts: Anne Finch, ‘The Agreeable’; Swift, ‘The Lady’s Dressing Room’; Pope, The Rape of the Lock ; Parenll, ‘Elegy to an Old Beauty’; Martha Fowke, ‘Clio’s Picture’; Mary Leapor, ‘Mira’s Picture’ and ‘Dorinda at her Glass’; Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, ‘Satturday: The Smallpox’; Mary Jones, ‘After the Smallpox’; Mary Barber, ‘To her Son, on his first putting on Britches’. Background texts: Kathryn R. King, ‘The Constructions of Femininity’, in Christine Gerrard (ed.), The Blackwell Companion to Eighteenth-Century Poetry; Tita Chico, Designing Women: The Dressing Room in Eighteenth Century Women’s Literature (2005).

Week 4: Friendship, Patronage and independence Texts: Mary Leapor, ‘An Epistle to Artemisia: On Fame’; Mary Jones, ’An Epistle to Lady Bowyer’; Mary Barber, To a Lady, who commanded me to send her an Account in Verse, how I succeeded in my Subscription’; Hanna More, Preface to Ann Yearsley, Poems on Several Occasions (1785); Yearsley, ‘On Mrs Montagu’ and ‘To Stella: on a Visit to Mr Montagu’. Background Texts: Moira Ferguson, Eighteenth-Century Women Poets: Nation, Class and Gender; Kerri Andrews, Ann Yearsley and Hannah More: Patronage and Poetry (London: Pickering and Chatto, 2013).

89

Week 5: Women and Work Texts: Stephen Duck, The Thresher’s Labour; Mary Collier, The Woman’s Labour; Mary Leapor, Crumble Hall; Ann Yearsley, To Mr ***, an Unlettered Poet; on Genius Improved’; Anna Laetitia Barbauld, ‘Washing Day’. Background texts: Donna Landry, The Muses of Resistance: Laboring-Class Women's Poetry in Britain, 1739-1796 (Cambridge University Press, 1990; paperback reprint 2005); Bridget Keegan, British Labouring-class Nature Poetry, 1730-1837 (2008).

Week 6: Women and Slavery Texts: Hannah More, Slavery: A Poem (1787), Ann Yearsley, A Poem on the Inhumanity of the Slave Trade (1788). I also suggest that you look at other poems and material in the online collection assembled by Brycchan Carey at http://www.brycchancarey.com/slavery/poetry.htm Main Textual Sources: Fairer, David, and Christine Gerrard, Eighteenth-Century Poetry: An Annotated Anthology (3rd Edition, Oxford: Wiley, 2014). Ashfield, Anthony, ed. Romantic Women Poets, 1770-1838: An Anthology and Romantic Women Poets, 1772-1848: an Anthology.( 2 vols., Manchester UP, 1998).

I strongly recommend using Eighteenth-Century Collections Online (ECCO) to examine the appearance of the original texts, and, of course, to call them up in the Bodleian Library where possible.

Select Bibliography: Armstrong, Isobel and Virginia Blain, eds. Women's Poetry in the Enlightenment: The Making of a Canon, 1730-1820. Palgrave Macmillan, 1998. Backscheider, Paula, Eighteenth-Century Women Poets and their Poetry (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Press, 2005). Ballaster, Ros., ed., The History of British Women’s Writing, 1690-1750, vol. 4, Palgrave Macmillan, 2010. Barash, Carol, English Women’s Poetry, 1649-1714: Politics, Community and Linguistic Authority (Oxford: OUP, 1996). Chico, Tita, Designing Women: The Dressing Room in Eighteenth Century English literature and Culture, Bucknell University Press, 2005. Breen, Jennifer, ed. Women Romantic Poets, 1785-1832.. London: Everyman, 1992. B Brycchan Carey, Markman Ellis, and Sara Salih Discourses of Slavery and Abolition: Britain and its Colonies, 1760-1838 (Basingstoke, Palgrave Macmillan, 2004). Colman, George and Thornton Bonnell. Poems by Eminent Ladies. 1755. Dyce, Alexander. Specimens of British Poetesses. London: 1829. Reprinted many times. Feldman, Paula R., ed. British Women Poets of the Romantic Era. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins, 1997. ------and Daniel Robinson, edd. A Century of Sonnets: : The Romantic-Era Revival, 1750- 1850 Oxford UP, 2002. ------and Theresa M. Kelley, eds. Romantic Women Writers: Voices and Countervoices. Hanover: University Press of New England, 1995. Franklin, Caroline, ed. The Romantics: Women Poets, 1770-1830. Bristol: Thoemmes Press, 1996. Fullard, Joyce, ed. British Women Poets 1660-1800: An Anthology. Troy: New York, 1990. Ferguson, Moira, Eighteenth-Century Women Poets: Nation, Class and Gender (New York, 1995). Homans, Margaret. Women Writers and Poetic Identity. Princeton, 1980.

90

Jones, Vivien, ed. Women and Literature in Britain, 1700-1800. Cambridge UP, 2000. Kramer, Harriet Linkin, and Stephen Behrendt, eds. Romanticism and Women Poets: Opening the Doors of Reception. University Press of Kentucky, 1999. Leighton, Angela and Margaret Reynolds, edd. Victorian Women Poets: An Anthology. UK: Blackwell, 1995. Lonsdale, Roger, ed. Eighteenth-Century Women Poets. New York: Oxford University Press, 1990. McDowell, Paula, The Women of Grub Street: Press, Politics and Gender in the London Literary Market Place, 1778-1730 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1998). Miller, Nancy K. Subject to Change: Reading Feminist Writing. Columbia University Press, 1990. ------, ed. Poetics of Gender. Columbia University Press, 1986. Moulin, Jeanine, ed. La Posie Feminine Franaise. 2 Vols. Paris: Seghers, 1966. Vol I: du XIIe sicle au XIX sicle. Vol II: Epoque Moderne. Prescott, Sarah and David E. Shuttleton, edd. Women and Poetry, 1660-1750. Palgrave Macmillan, 2003. Uphaus, Robert W. and Gretchen Foster, edd. The "Other" Eighteenth Century: English Women of Letters, 1660-1800. East Lansing: Colleagues Press, 1991. Wilcox, Helen, ed. Women and Literature in Britain, 1500-1700. Cambridge UP, 1996. Wilson, Katherine M. and Frank K. Warne. Women Writers of the Seventeenth Century. University of Georgia Press, 1989. Wu, Duncan. Romantic Women Poets: An Anthology Cambridge: At the University Press, 1996.

AESTHETICISM, DECADENCE AND THE FIN DE SIÈCLE Professor Stefano Evangelista ([email protected]) This course concentrates on the literature of the Victorian fin de siècle, paying special attention to the two most prominent, interrelated literary phenomena of those years: Aestheticism and Decadence. From the 1860s until the beginning of the twentieth century writers linked to these movements ask readers to question the habits, conventions and values at the heart of nineteenth-century culture. We will ask how writings from this period promote literary and linguistic innovation, how they challenge traditional aesthetic categories and gender norms, how they relate to other European traditions and predate some of the experimental techniques generally associated with the onset of modernism. Topics for discussion will include the doctrine of art for art’s sake, the figures of the aesthete and the dandy, the inter-artistic experiment, and the relationship between intellectual culture and popular forms of writing.

We will examine a wide variety of literary texts, comprising fiction, essays and poetry. There will also be the opportunity to explore non-literary material, including political and medical writings and the visual arts.

Weekly Schedule Week 1 Art for Art’s Sake: Beginnings and Manifestos Week 2 Perverse Pre-Raphaelites Week 3 Artists and Aesthetes Week 4 The Decadent Novel Week 5 Women Radicals

91

Preliminary Reading Primary Texts Students are asked to read the following texts before they arrive in Oxford. This is a list of the core texts for the course; additional compulsory reading will be discussed in a preliminary meeting in 0th week.

Egerton, George, Keynotes (1893) Field, Michael [Katharine Bradley and Emma Cooper], selected poetry (available in paperback in a Broadview edition by Marion Thain and Ana Vadillo) Huysmans, Joris-Karl, Against Nature (also known as Against the Grain) (1884) James, Henry, Roderick Hudson (1875) Lee, Vernon, Hauntings (1890) Pater, Walter, The Renaissance (1873) and Imaginary Portraits (1887) Swinburne, A.C., Poems and Ballads (1866), essays on Charles Baudelaire and William Blake Symons, Arthur, ‘The Symbolist Movement in Literature’ (1899) poetry from Silhouettes (1892) and London Nights (1895) Wilde, Oscar, The Picture of Dorian Gray (1890), Salomé (1891), Intentions (1891), ‘The Portrait of Mr W.H.’ (1889)

Other authors we will discuss during the course include Charles Baudelaire, Aubrey Beardsley, Théophile Gautier, John Gray, Amy Levy, Marc-André Raffalovich, Christina Rossetti, Dante Gabriel Rossetti, Olive Schreiner, John Addington Symonds and W .B. Yeats. Students are encouraged to familiarise themselves with some of their works.

Secondary Texts Students are asked to familiarise themselves with as many of the following as possible. A full reading list of relevant criticism will also be available.

Bernheimer, Charles (ed. T. Jefferson Kline and Naomi Schor), Decadent Subjects: The Idea of Decadence in Art, Literature, Philosophy and Culture of the Fin de Siècle in Europe (2002) Bristow, Joseph (ed.), The Fin-de Siècle Poem (2005) Bürger, Peter (trans. Michael Shaw), Theory of the Avant Garde (1984) Chai, Leon, Aestheticism: The Religion of Art in Post-Romantic Literature (1990) Dellamora, Richard, Masculine Desire: the Sexual Politics of Victorian Aestheticism (1990) Denisoff, Dennis, Aestheticism and Sexual Parody, 1840-1940 (2001) Dowling, Linda, Language and Decadence in the Victorian Fin de Siècle (1986) Evangelista, Stefano, British Aestheticism and Ancient Greece (2009) Livesey, Ruth, Socialism, Sex and the Culture of Aestheticism in Britain, 1880-1914 (2007) Praz, Mario, The Romantic Agony (1930) Prettejohn, Elizabeth, Art for Art’s Sake: Aestheticism in Victorian Painting (2007) Psomiades, Kathy Alexis, Beauty’s Body: Femininity and Representation in British Aestheticism (1997) Sturgis, Matthew, Passionate Attitudes: The English Decadence of the 1890s (1995)

An excellent place to get a sense of the cultural context of the period is Sally Ledger and Roger Luckhurst (eds), The Fin de Siècle: A Reader in Cultural History (2000)

92

LATE MODERNIST POETRY IN AMERICA AND BRITAIN Professor Michael Whitworth ([email protected]) The history of modernist poetry does not end in 1939, or in 1945. As modernism in the tradition of Yeats and Eliot was institutionalized by the New Criticism, poetry in the tradition of Ezra Pound and William Carlos Williams took a distinctive trajectory. This C course will consider poems and prose statements by American poets (primarily those of the ‘Black Mountain School’ – Charles Olson, Robert Creeley, and Ed Dorn -- but also William Carlos Williams and other Americans), and by a later generation of British poets who drew upon their work (primarily those associated with the ‘Cambridge School’ -- J. H. Prynne, Andrew Crozier, and Douglas Oliver). It will consider ideas of modernity and of poetic form, the idea and practice of lyric, phenomenology, geography, gender, and science.

PROVISIONAL SCHEDULE: 1. Charles Olson (and the idea of Late Modernism). 2. Edward Dorn. 3. Geographies. 4. Gender. 5. Andrew Crozier (and Phenomenology). 6. J. H. Prynne (and Science).

PRIMARY READING: POETRY Allen, Donald, ed. The New American Poetry (1960). Concentrate on the poems and prose statements by Charles Olson (especially ‘The Kingfishers’), Robert Duncan, Denise Levertov, Robert Creeley, and Edward Dorn; it would also be valuable to look at the selection of Frank O’Hara’s poems. Crozier, Andrew. An Andrew Crozier Reader, ed. Ian Brinton (2012). ---, and Tim Longville, eds. A Various Art (1987). Out of print, but obtainable cheaply second-hand. Concentrate on the poems by J.H.Prynne, Douglas Oliver, and Andrew Crozier. Dorn, Edward. ‘Idaho Out’ (Geography [1965]), ‘The North Atlantic Turbine’ [i.e., ‘Thesis’, ‘The First Note’, ‘England’, and ‘A Theory of Truth’ (The North Atlantic Turbine [1967]); reprinted in The Collected Poems (1983). Olson, Charles. The Maximus Poems, ed. George F. Butterick (1983). We won’t be studying the Maximus Poems in full, but you should acquaint yourself with more than the selection in Allen’s anthology. Prynne, J. H. Poems (2nd edn 1999, 3nd edn. 2005, or 4th edn. 2015). We will concentrate on the volumes from 1968-1974, i.e. Kitchen Poems, The White Stones, Brass, and Wound Response (1974). Tarlo, Harriet, ed. The Ground Aslant: An Anthology of Radical Landscape Poetry (Exeter: Shearsman, 2011)

PRIMARY READING: PROSE Allen, Donald, and Warren Tallman, eds. Poetics of the New American Poetry (New York: Grove, 1973). If obtainable, a valuable collection. Creeley, Robert. Collected Essays (1989). Especially ‘Introduction to New Writing in the USA’ (1967) and ‘Introduction to Penguin Selected Whitman’ (1973). Crozier, Andrew. An Andrew Crozier Reader, ed. Ian Brinton (2012). Duncan, Robert. A Selected Prose (1995). Levertov, Denise. The Poet in the World (1973).

93

Olson, Charles. Human Universe (1960), or Collected Prose, ed. Donald Allen and Benjamin Friedlander (1997). Prioritise ‘Projective Verse’ (which is also in The New American Poetry, ed. Donald Allen), and ‘Human Universe’.

SECONDARY READING Altieri, Charles. ‘Olson's Poetics and the Tradition.’ boundary 2, 2, No. 1/2, (Charles Olson: Essays, Reminiscences, Reviews) (Autumn, 1973-Winter, 1974), 173-188. [JSTOR] Burt, Stephen, and Jennifer Lewin. ‘Poetry and the New Criticism.’ A Companion to Twentieth- Century Poetry, ed. Neil Roberts (2001). Crozier, Andrew. ‘Thrills and Frills: Poetry as Figures of Empirical Lyricism.’ Society and Literature, 1945-1970, ed. Alan Sinfield (New York: Holmes & Meier, 1983). Culler, Jonathan. ‘Apostrophe.’ Diacritics, 7 no.4 (1977), 59-69. [JSTOR] Davidson, Ian. Ideas of Space in Contemporary Poetry (2007), esp. chapter 3. Kern, Robert. ‘Composition as Recognition: Robert Creeley and Postmodern Poetics.’ boundary 2, 6, no. 3 (Robert Creeley: A Gathering) (1978), 211-32. [JSTOR] Osborne, John. ‘Black Mountain and Projective Verse.’ A Companion to Twentieth-Century Poetry, ed. Neil Roberts (2001). Perloff, Marjorie. ‘Pound/Stevens: Whose Era?’ New Literary History, 13, no. 3 (1982), 485-514. [Doesn’t directly discuss the poets on this course, but important re: the Pound/Williams tradition.] [JSTOR] Reeve, N.H., and Richard Kerridge. Nearly Too Much: The Poetry of J. H. Prynne (1995). Whitworth, Michael H., ed. Modernism (2006).

HIGH MODERNISM AT PLAY: MODERNISTS AND WRITING FOR CHILDREN Professor Diane Purkiss ([email protected]) This option will allow students to begin to break down the artificial division between children’s literature and writing for adults as aesthetic categories through an examination of both theoretical and artistic works which put in play modernist artistic principles in connection with the figure of the child/child reader as ultimate high modernist. The concept of play and the notion of the child as locus of freedom and play are foundational.

1. The child as modernist and antimodernist icon – Rousseau, Jacqueline Rose, Perry Nodelman. This week, we look at the theory of the post-Romantic child as aesthetic object and as consumer.

2. Ernest Hemingway and Virginia Woolf – children’s writing and adults dreaming/children, animals and other Romantic beings. Both Woolf and Hemingway wrote for children, and both show considerable fascination with both their own childhoods and the figure of the child in their writings.

3. T. S Eliot and Mr Lear – Old Possum’s Book of Practical Cats and other nonsense. While T. S. Eliot’s nonsense poems are sometimes read in conjunction with his other works, less attention has been paid to the way his conception of poetry was rooted in the work of Edward Lear; by putting them side by side, we can hope to trace their common aesthetics.

The myth and the child - Sylvia Plath and Ted Hughes (just a note; these books are tiny). While Eliot seeks to deconstruct the image of the child, Plath and Hughes eek to render the child mythic in both their writings for children and their mahor oeuvre.

94

4 The children’s writer as modernist – Alan Garner, William Mayne and Diana Wynne Jones. Children’s writers themselves experiment with high modernist style in an effort to bypass the constraints of the form.

5. Antimodernists – C.S. Lewis, J. R. R. Tolkien, and the war against modernism. We see how other writers take refuge in the image of a Romantic child of myth as a direct and very influential rejection of the appeal of modernist aesthetics.

READING EMERSON Dr Lloyd Pratt ([email protected]) This seminar takes up the question of how Emerson reads, how he proposes we should read, and how he has been read. Its aims are to work with Emerson and his exegetes in depth, as well as to understand how “reading” has been understood in the American context as an ethically, politically, and morally generative practice. By reading is meant not only the practice of basic literacy, but also the more advanced forms of interpretative, reflective, and analytic reading that underlie contemporary literary scholarship. Although the main focus is Emerson and his American exegetes, we will also attend to the longer histories of reflective, devotional, and sacred reading, as well as their secular reincarnations from the nineteenth century to the present. The final reading list will include Emerson’s collected essays and non-fiction, with a special emphasis on his early writings, as well as historical, theoretical, book historical, and literary historical secondary texts. We will also read twentieth- and twenty-first century writers working in an Emersonian tradition.

A preliminary reading list is below:

Emerson, Ralph Waldo. Collected Works of Ralph Waldo Emerson. Volumes I-VIII. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1971-2010.

Arsic, Branka. On Leaving: A Reading in Emerson. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2010. Buell, Lawrence. Emerson. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2003. Cameron, Sharon. Impersonality: Seven Essays. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2007. Cavell, Stanley. Conditions Handsome and Unhandsome: The Constitution of Emersonian Perfectionism. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1990. Ellison, Julie K. Emerson's Romantic Style. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1984. Newfield, Christopher. The Emerson Effect: Individualism and Submission in America. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2007. Packer, Barbara. Emerson's Fall. New York: Continuum, 1982. Poirier, Richard. The Renewal of Literature: Emersonian Reflections. New York: Random House, 1987. Richardson, Robert D. Emerson: The Mind on Fire. Berkeley: University of California, 1995. Smith, Caleb. The Prison and the American Imagination. New Haven: Yale University Press, 2009. Steele, Jeffrey. The Representation of the Self in the American Renaissance. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1987. Van Leer, David. Emerson's Epistemology: The Argument of the Essays. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1986. West, Cornel. The American Evasion of Philosophy: A Genealogy of Pragmatism. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1989.

95

Zwarg, Christina. Feminist Conversations: Fuller, Emerson, and the Play of Reading. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1995.

THEORIES OF WORLD LITERATURE Dr Sowon Park ([email protected]) There are many competing ideas of, and proposals for, world literature. The aim of this course is to introduce students, whatever their background, to the historical evolution and the variations of the idea of ‘world’ provided by the western European tradition and to the more recently elaborated concepts such as the ‘world republic of letters’, ‘world literary systems’, ‘translation zones’ ,‘scriptworlds’ and ‘planetarity’. By examining a wide variety of theories of world literature, the course will provide students with an opportunity to engage in detailed study of some of the more significant developments in world literature studies and to develop a capacity for situating their particular interests within a broader context. Alongside theories of literature, the course will have set literary texts which will serve as a springboard for consideration of the main theoretical issues. They have been selected to encourage thinking about the connections between world literature, global modernism and fiction and to provide a gateway to a wide range of literatures not represented on the list. Overall, the course will focus on interrogating the validity of some of the grounds upon which canonical ideas of world literature are based; exploring the tensions as well as the congruences between existing ideas; and investigating the agency of the ‘periphery’/’tributary’ in the creation of world literature.

Week 1: ‘The Best That Has Been Thought and Said’ Traditional definitions of world literature are heavily based on the idea of universal cultural value. This seminar will consider some of the main issues in universalist definitions, however conceived, and the role of interpretive communities in dealing with the distances in time, culture and language.

Reading: Virginia Woolf, To the Lighthouse Matthew Arnold, Preface to Culture and Anarchy (1869) in Stefan Collini ed., Culture and Anarchy and Other Writings (1993), pp.188-211. Erich Auerbach, Mimesis: The Representation of Reality in Western Literature (1953), chap 20 ‘The Brown Stocking’, pp. 525-553. Horace Engdahl, ‘Canonization and World literature: The Nobel Experience’ in Theo D’haen, Cesar Dominguez and Mads Rosendahl Thomsen eds., World Literature: A Reader (2013), pp. 316-328. Richard Green Moulton, World Literature and its Place in General Culture (1911), chapter 1 ‘The Unity of Literature and the Conception of World Literature’, pp. 1-9; chapter 10 ‘World Literature the Autobiography of Civilization’, pp. 429-437. S S Prawer, Karl Marx and World Literature (1976), chap 7 ‘World Literature and Class Conflict’ pp. 138-165. Fritz Strich, Goethe and World Literature (1949). See Goethe’s statements on weltliteratur recorded by Strich, pp 349-51. Reprinted in World Literature: A Reader (2013), pp.9-15.

Week 2: The Consecration and Circulation of Excellent Works. This seminar will consider issues of canonization and institutional control of meaning which are especially pressing in current world literature studies. Ideas of a ‘classic’ by such diverse critics as T

96

S Eliot, David Damrosch and J M Coetzee will bring questions of ‘centres’ and ‘peripheries’/‘tributaries’ to the foreground of contemporary critiques of European hegemony.

Reading: Rudyard Kipling, ‘The White Man’s Burden’ (1899) T S Eliot, Four Quartets Samir Amin, Eurocentrism (2011). J M Coetzee, ‘What is a Classic? A Lecture’ (1991) in Stranger Shores (2002), pp. 1-19. David Damrosch, What is World Literature? (2003). -----, ‘World Literature in a Postcanonical, Hypercanonical Age’ in Haun Saussay ed., Comparative Literature in an Age of Globalization (2006), pp. 43-53. Terry Eagleton, Marxist Literary Criticism (1976), chap 1 ‘Literature and History’, pp. 1-19. T S Eliot, ‘What is a Classic?’ (1944) in On Poetry and Poets (1957), pp. 53-71. Frank Kermode, ‘Institutional Control of Interpretation’, The Art of Telling (1983), pp. 168-200. Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels, The Communist Manifesto (1848), OUP Classics (1992).

Week 3: Literature as a World and World Literary Systems This seminar will discuss theories of world literary systems proposed over the most recent decades, in particular, Casanova’s theory of the ‘World Republic of Letters’. It will consider the validity of various boundaries, whether they be constituted along the binary of the national and the international or along the political and the aesthetic.

Reading: Henry James ‘The Figure in the Carpet’ Helena Buescu ‘The Republic of Letters and the World Republic of Letters’ in The Routledge Companion to WL. (2011) Pascale Casanova, The World Republic of Letters (2004). Pheng Cheah, ‘What is a World? On World Literature as World-making Activity’ Daedalus vol. 137, (summer, 2008). Jerome McGann, ‘Pseudodoxia Academica’, New Literary History 39.3 (Summer 2008), pp. 645-56. Christopher Prendergast, ‘Negotiating World Literature’, New Left Review (March/April 2001) reprt. Prendergst ed., ‘The World Republic of Letters’ in Debating World Literature (2004).

Week 4: Scriptworlds, Translation Zones and the Reinvention of Tradition Issues of translation form an inevitable part of any discussion on world literature. This seminar will discuss linguistic and cultural translations, discrete ‘scriptworlds’ and the emergence of translatability into a European language as a literary criterion of value.

Reading: Shikibu Murasaki, The Tale Of Genji, (trans. Royall Tyler, Penguin Classics, 2001),‘The Paulownia Pavillion’, pp. 1-18. Haruki Murakami, Norwegian Wood (1987, English Trans. 2000) Emily Apter, The Translation Zone (2006). Susan Bassnett, Comparative Literature (1993), chap. 7 ‘From Comparative Literature to Translation Studies’, pp. 138-161. Walter Benjamin, ‘The Task of the Translator’ (1923) in Lawrence Venti ed., The Translation Studies Reader (2000), pp.15-25.

97

David Damrosch, ‘Scriptworlds: Writing Systems and the Formation of World Literature’ in MLQ 68:2 (June 2007), pp. 195-219. T S Eliot, Notes Towards the Definition of Culture (1948),‘The Unity of European Culture’, pp.110- 124. Gayatri Spivak, ‘The Politics of Translation’ in The Translation Studies Reader, pp. 397-416

Week 5: The (Trans)national Novel and World Literature Modern literatures and literary histories have mostly been drawn along national lines. The novel, in particular, has been defined as a genre closely linked to ideas of nationhood – the English novel, the Russian novel, the Great American novel and so on. On the other hand, transnationalism and cosmopolitanism are no less important registers in the twentieth century novel. This seminar will interrogate the relationship between nation and world.

Reading: Mo Yan, Red Sorghum (1986, English trans.1993) Derek Attridge, The Singularity of Literature,(2004), chap 5 ‘Singularity’, pp. 63-93. Elleke Boehmer, Empire, the National, and the Postcolonial 1890-1920 (2002), chap 5, ‘Immeasurable Strangeness between Empire and Modernism’, pp. 169-200. Lu Hsun, A Brief History of Chinese Fiction (1923, English trans 1959). Franco Moretti, Distant Reading (2013), ‘Conjectures on World Literature’,‘More Conjectures’ and ‘The End of the Beginning: A Reply to Christopher Prendergast’. Shu-Mei Shih, ‘Global Literature and the Technologies of Recognition’ in WL: A Reader Immanuel Wallerstein, World Systems Analysis (2004), chap 4 ‘The Creation of a Geoculture’, pp. 60- 75. Ian Watt, The Rise of the Novel (1957), chapter 1 ‘Realism and the Novel Form’.

Week 6: Dialogue, Hegemony, Adaptation and Universality This seminar will link longstanding inquiries about modernism and global geopolitics, already undertaken within global modernist studies, with recent elaborations of world literature.

Reading: Samuel Beckett, The Unnamable. Jessica Berman, Modernist Commitments: Ethics, Politics, and Transnational Modernism. (2013), ‘Introduction: Imagining Justice’. Melba Cuddy-Keane. ‘Modernism, Geopolitics, Globalization’ Modernism/modernity 10, no. 3 (2003), pp. 539-558. David Lodge, Consciousness and the Novel (2002), chap 1 ‘Consciousness and the Novel’, pp. 1-91. Laura Doyle and Laura Winkiel, Geomodernisms, (2005). Andreas Huyssen, ‘Geographies of modernism in a globalizing world’, Geographies of Modernism, eds. Peter Brooker and Andrew Thacker (2005), pp. 6-18. Susan Stanford Friedman, ‘Periodizing Modernism: Postcolonial Modernities and the Space/Time Borders of Modernist Studies’ Modernism/modernity 13, no. 3 (2006), pp. 425-443. Rebecca Walkowitz, Cosmopolitan Style: Modernism beyond the Nation.(2006), Introduction, ‘Critical Cosmopolitanism and Modernist Narrative’.

Suggested Further Reading: Arac, Jonathan, ‘Anglo-Globalism?’, New Left Review 16 (July-August 2002), 35-45. Bloom, Harold, The Anxiety of Influence (1997).

98

Boehmer, Elleke, Colonial and Postcolonial literatures: Migrant Metaphors (1995). Bradbury and McFarlane, Modernism: A Guide to European Literature, 1890-1930 (1976), chap 1 ‘The Name and Nature of Modernism’, pp.19-56. Chozick, Matthew R., ‘De-Exoticizing Haruki Murakami’s Reception’, Comparative Literature Studies vol. 45:1 (2008), pp. 62-73. Cuddy-Keane, Melba, Hammond, Adam and Peat, Alexandra, Modernism: Keywords (2014). Emmerich, Michael, The Tale of Genji: Translation, Canonization, and World Literature (Columbia University Press, 2013). Henitiuk, Valerie. ‘Going to Bed with Waley: How Murasaki Shikibu Does and Does Not Become World Literature’ Comparative Literature Studies 45.1 (2008), pp. 40-61. Hirakawa, Sukehiro, Japan’s Love-Hate Relationship with the West (2005). Jameson, Fredric, ‘Third World Literature in the Era of Multinational Capitalism’ in Social Text 15 (1986), 65-88. Park, Sowon, ‘The Pan-Asian Empire and World Literatures', CLCWeb: Comparative Literature and Culture, (Purdue Univ Press, Dec 2013). Thornber, Karen Laura, Empire of Texts in Motion: Chinese, Korean, and Taiwanese Transculturations of Japanese Literature (2009). Schoene, Berthold, The Cosmopolitan Novel (2009). Wallerstein, Immanuel, Geopolitics and Geoculture: Essays on the changing World-System (1991). Williams, Raymond, Politics of Modernism (1989), ‘When was Modernism?’ and ‘Metropolitan Perceptions and the Emergence of Modernism’. Wollaeger, Mark (with Matt Eatough) eds., The Oxford Handbook of Global Modernisms (2012). Wang, Ning, ‘Global English(es) and Global Chinese(s): Toward Rewriting a New Literary History in Chinese’, Journal of Contemporary China 19: 63 (2010), 195-74. Woolf, Virginia, ‘The Tale of Genji: The First Volume of Mr. Arthur Waley’s Translation of a Great Japanese Novel by the Lady Murasaki’, Vogue 66.2 (late July, 1925), pp. 53, 80.

LEGAL FICTIONS: LAW IN POSTCOLONIAL AND WORLD LITERATURE Dr Michelle Kelly ([email protected]) If postcolonial literature has been characterised as a body of writing that is irremediably political, this is in part a result of the literature’s consistent engagement with and resistance to the colonial and postcolonial state, frequently through the institutions of law and order. Indeed the texts and writers that constitute postcolonial literature have themselves frequently been subject to and constituted by these institutions. Theorists of the postcolonial and global south have drawn attention to the co- existence of modernising and civilizing goals, among them the rule of law, with regimes of appropriation and governance in the colonial state, as well as to the legal architecture and institutions of the postcolonial state, especially that much privileged document of political transformation, the written constitution, now frequently accompanied by a Bill of Rights to adjudicate questions of identity and difference within the postcolony. Within this logic, human life, identity, sexuality and race are predominantly juridical categories, and prevailing distinctions between the universal and the particular are staged within the domain of the law. Jean and John Comaroff point to the tensions between the “almost salvific belief” in the capacity of constitutions “to conjure up equitable, just, ethically founded, pacific polities” and “the lawlessness that has accompanied laissez faire in so many places” (22). Critical theory devoted to law, and more recently to law and literature, also takes as its point of departure the moment of transition between legal regimes that is a feature of postcolonial histories.

99

This course then aims to bring together literary, critical, philosophical and legal texts in order to trace the forms that the relationship between law, postcolonial, and world literature has taken. With particular attention to law and literature’s shared reliance on narrative (through testimony, confession, witnessing, translation) and the generic conventions which frequently shape the law’s staging within literature, the course will focus on established genres of world literature like the prison memoir and the confession, encounters with the law as they shape and are staged within fictional and non-fiction texts, as well as shorter texts ranging from legal documents to political speeches. Most seminars will be anchored by a text from South Africa, a country whose recent political and literary history speaks to the concerns of the course, which will act as a platform for consideration of texts from other African countries, the Caribbean, the Middle East, India, Ireland, and the US. Theoretical texts will be integral to the seminar discussion.

The reading list below indicates the key primary texts. A detailed week by week reading list, including theoretical and critical material, will be circulated before the start of term.

Background reading Upendra Baxi, ‘Postcolonial Legality.’ In Schwarz and Ray, ed. A Companion to Postcolonial Studies. Malden, MS and Oxford: Blackwell, 2000. Walter Benjamin, “Critique of Violence.” In Reflections: Essays, Aphorisms, Autobiographical Writings, edited by Peter Demetz. New York: Schocken Books, 2007, 277-300. Carroll Clarkson, “Towards an Aesthetics of Law.” Safundi 9.4 (2008): 457-467. Jean and John Comaroff. "Law and Disorder in the Postcolony: An Introduction." Law and Disorder in the Postcolony. Ed. Jean Comaroff and John Comaroff. Chicago; London: Chicago University Press, 2006. 1-56. Jacques Derrida, "Force of Law: The 'Mystical Foundation of Authority'." Acts of Religion. Ed. Anidjar, Gil. New York and London: Routledge, 2002. 228-98. Mark Sanders, Ambiguities of Witnessing: Law and Literature in the Time of a Truth Commission. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 2007. See especially the “Prologue”.

WEEK ONE Shaping Social Life: Race, Ethnicity, and the Law Chinua Achebe, Things Fall Apart Zoe Wicomb, Playing in the Light A range of shorter literary, legal and theoretical texts will be circulated electronically before the start of term.

WEEK TWO Colonial Violence and the Rule of Law J. M. Coetzee, Waiting for the Barbarians Nelson Mandela, ‘Treason Trial Speech’ and ‘Rivonia Trial Speech’ in No Easy Walk to Freedom, ed Ato Quayson Victoria Brittain and Gillian Slovo, Guantanamo: ‘Honor bound to defend freedom’ Mohamedou Ould Slahi, Guantanamo Diary See also: http://guantanamodiary.com/

WEEK THREE Writing Inside: Prison Writing as World Form Nawal El Saadawi, Memoir from the Women’s Prison Ruth First, 117 Days Jonny Steinberg, The Number

100

WEEK FOUR Official Memory and the Production of Truth: Political Transformation, Confession and Memorialisation J. M. Coetzee, Disgrace Ariel Dorfman, Death and the Maiden Sindiwe Magona, Mother to Mother David Park, The Truth Commissioner Damon Galgut, “An African Sermon”, available online: http://www.prospectmagazine.co.uk/magazine/anafricansermon/#.UlVD86w09Xk Lauren Segal, Number Four: The Making of Constitution Hill

WEEK FIVE The Postcolonial Human and the Law: Gender, Sexuality and the Ideal Citizen Jamaica Kincaid, My Brother Phaswane Mpe, Welcome to Our Hillbrow Binyavanga Wainaina, ‘I am a homosexual, mum.’ http://africasacountry.com/i-am-a-homosexual- mum/ Patrick Hanafin, 'Valorising the Virtual Citizen: The Sacrificial Grounds of Postcolonial Citizenship in Ireland’, 2003 (1) Law, Social Justice & Global Development Journal http://elj.warwick.ac.uk/global/03-1/hanafin.html

WEEK SIX Crime, Property and Legal Personhood Aravind Adiga, The White Tiger (2008) Indra Sinha, Animal’s People (2007) Teju Cole, ‘“I don’t normally do this kind of thing”: 45 Small Fates.’ The New Inquiry (August 13, 2013) < http://thenewinquiry.com/blogs/dtake/i-dont-normally-do-this-kind-of-thing-45-small-fates/>

LEXICOGRAPHY Professor Charlotte Brewer ([email protected]) Monolingual dictionaries in English are usually traced back to Cawdrey’s Table Alphabeticall of 1604 and this seminar series will survey and (selectively) scrutinize some of the main English language dictionaries from Cawdrey to the present day. At the same time we’ll investigate a range of different topics in lexicography, e.g. dictionaries’ sources and their compilation, organization, definitions and other distinctive features, through to their use and reception (not least in the light of the revolutionary changes enabled by electronic media and the internet). Dictionaries have a complex relationship with the society which produces them, and we will explore how their appearance of objective and comprehensive authority can be sometimes substantiated, sometimes belied, by detailed study of their character and composition.

Preparatory reading Required Béjoint, Henri. 2010. The lexicography of English: from origins to present. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Plus either Jackson, Howard. 2002. Lexicography: an introduction. London: Routledge. or Landau, Sidney I. 2001. Dictionaries: the art and craft of lexicography. 2nd ed. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

101

Plus selection of essays (according to individual preference - select at least six) in Cowie, A. P. (ed.), The Oxford History of English Lexicography. Two vols. Oxford: Oxford University Press Additional Atkins, B. T. S., and Michael Rundell. 2008. The Oxford guide to practical lexicography. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Benson, Phil. 2001. Ethnocentrism and the English Dictionary. London: Routledge. Fontenelle, Thierry. 2008. Practical lexicography: a reader. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Jackson, Howard, ed. 2013. The Bloomsbury Companion to Lexicography. London: Bloomsbury Publishers. Svensén, Bo. 2009. A handbook of lexicography: the theory and practice of dictionary-making. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Lexicographical journals (locate these and browse contents) Dictionaries (Dictionary Society of North America) International Journal of Lexicography (OUP) Lexicographica (De Gruyter)

WEEK 1: INTRODUCTION

‘A dictionary is a systematically arranged list of socialized linguistic forms compiled from the speech- habits of a given speech-community and commented on by the author in such a way that the qualified reader understands the meaning…of each separate form, and is informed of the relevant facts concerning the function of that form in its community’. L. Zgusta, Manual of Lexicography (The Hague: Mouton, 1971, p. 17).

“A Dictionary is a word-book which collects somebody's words into somebody's book. Whose words are collected, how they are collected, and who collects them all influence what kind of book a given dictionary turns out to be and, in turn, whose purpose it can best serve.” Kramarae and Treichler, A Feminist Dictionary (London: Pandora Press, 1985).

What is a dictionary for and how might we expect it to be comprehensive or restricted? Our opening session will introduce some of the main features in lexicographical study, e.g. choice of words, relationship with other reference books (e.g. encyclopaedias), terminology, constituent features of a dictionary (pronunciation, etymology, spelling, definitions, labelling, quotation evidence), introductory matter, audience expectations.

WEEK 2: EARLY DICTIONARIES TO JOHNSON

What are the distinctive features of Johnson’s dictionary of 1755 and in what ways did it build on the achievements of its predecessors? This seminar will discuss early dictionaries (each member will be asked to select one to report on, from the list available in Stein below, reading/consulting it in facsimile or via EEBO or ECCO) in relation to the specific characteristics of Johnson’s work. Johnson’s Plan and Preface will be examined in detail: how did the actual compilation of his dictionary change Johnson’s mind about what a dictionary could, might or should do? What made it such a distinctive and influential work?

102

Required reading S. Johnson. A Dictionary. 1755 (extensive consultation). Copies of Johnson’s dictionary are in English Faculty Library and the Gladstone Link: make sure you consult the facsimile edition, introduced by R W Burchfield (London : Times Books 1979 2 v. in 1) as there are hundreds of other editions which are abridgements or selections and not satisfactory therefore. The electronic edition, ed. Anne McDermott, is available via SOLO.

Johnson’s ‘Plan’ and ‘Preface’ to Dictionary, in Johnson, Samuel, Gwin J. Kolb, and Robert DeMaria. 2005. Johnson on the English language, The Yale edition of the works of Samuel Johnson. New Haven: Yale University Press. Vol XVIII. (Can be read online in edition by Jack Lynch at http://andromeda.rutgers.edu/~jlynch/Texts/plan.html and http://andromeda.rutgers.edu/~jlynch/Texts/preface.html)

Reddick, Allen Hilliard. 1990. The Making of Johnson's Dictionary, 1746-1773. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Starnes, DeWitt T., and Gertrude Elizabeth Noyes. 1991. The English Dictionary from Cawdrey to Johnson, 1604-1755. New ed. by Gabriele Stein. Amsterdam Studies in the Theory and History of Linguistic Science. Series 3: Studies in the History of the Language Sciences 57. Amsterdam: John Benjamins (NB can be read online in the Oxford domain)

Additional reading Gurr, Andrew, ed. Eighteenth-Century Lexis and Lexicography. Yearbook of English Studies (28) 1998 (see articles by Demaria, Hudson, McDermott and Reddick) Hitchings, Henry. 2005. Dr Johnson's dictionary: the extraordinary story of the book that defined the world. London: John Murray. Lynch, Jack, and Anne McDermott. 2005. Anniversary Essays on Johnson's 'Dictionary'. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Reddick, Allen Hilliard. 2009. Johnson and Richardson. In Oxford History of Lexicography, edited by A. P. Cowie. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Resources Early English Books Online Eighteenth-Century Collections Online Lexicons of Early Modern English http://leme.library.utoronto.ca/public/subscriptioninfo.cfm (much information available to non-subscribers here)

WEEK 3: THE OXFORD ENGLISH DICTIONARY (1)

As an historical record of the development of vocabulary in English from 1150 to the present, based on around 5 million quotations from printed works over this period, the first edition of the OED (published 1884-1928) set out to provide a comprehensive and objective account of the language. From its first publication (up to the present day) it has been widely judged the best, most authoritative dictionary of English in existence. Its editors believed that they had created a revolution in lexicography and the current editor John Simpson makes further claims about OED’s lexicographical and societal role since then: “Far more than a convenient place to look up words and their origins, the Oxford English Dictionary is an irreplaceable part of English culture. It not only provides an important record of the evolution of our language, but also documents the continuing development of our society.” A detailed examination of OED1’s conception, compilation and completion will allow

103

us to put its aims and achievements in a more nuanced context. What were the strengths and weaknesses of OED’s methodology and realisation?

Required reading First edition of OED (print copy; extensive consultation). Familiarise yourself also with OED2 (1989), which merges Burchfield’s four-volume Supplement (1972-86) with OED1, and with OED3 (www.oed.com). Murray, J. A. H. ‘General Explanations’ to OED (read in print edition of OED1 or (slightly updated) OED2). Murray, K. M. E. 1977. Caught in the Web of Words: James A. H. Murray and the Oxford English Dictionary. New Haven and London: Yale University Press. Mugglestone, Lynda. 2000 (2nd ed 2002). Lexicography and the OED: Pioneers in the Untrodden Forest. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Additional reading Brewer, Charlotte. 2010. The Use of Literary Quotations in the Oxford English Dictionary. Review of English Studies 61: 93-125. Brewer, Charlotte. 2012. "'Happy Copiousness? OED's Recording of Female Authors of the Eighteenth Century'. Review of English Studies 63: 86-117 Mugglestone, Lynda. 2005. Lost for Words: The Hidden History of the Oxford English Dictionary. New Haven and London: Yale University Press. Mugglestone, Lynda. 2007. "Decent Reticence": Coarseness, Contraception, and the First Edition of the OED. Dictionaries 28: 1-22. Raymond, Darrell R., 1987. Dispatches From the Front: The Prefaces to the Oxford English Dictionary. Waterloo, Ontario: UW Centre for the New Oxford English Dictionary. For updated version of this publication, available as a PDF, see http://www.darrellraymond.com/prefaces)

For further OED information and resources see http://oed.hertford.ox.ac.uk/main/

WEEK 4: THE OED (2)

This week will follow the progress of the OED through its Supplements and Second Edition (1989) through to the creation of the Third Edition, which began to be released online in 2000 and will be in progress for some decades yet. We will review the characteristics of its various stages of revision and discuss its achievements to date, looking in particular at its treatment of quotation sources and its shifts of policy in areas such as World English, usage and prescriptivism, and contentious vocabulary (of one sort or another). How has electronic publication facilitated changes and improvements in lexicographical methodology, and are there any drawbacks to this medium? How justified, today, is the OED’s current claim to be ‘the definitive record of the language’? Depending on individual preferences we will also look at the range of other English language dictionaries which began to be produced by Oxford University Press from the Concise Oxford Dictionary (1911) onwards, and the rival dictionaries of other British publishing houses (Chambers, Collins and Longman).

Reading Brewer, Charlotte. 2007. Treasure-House of the Language: The Living OED. New Haven and London: Yale University Press. Burchfield, R. W. 1989. Unlocking the English Language. London: Faber and Faber. (See essays on OED)

104

Simpson, John. 2004. The OED and Collaborative Research into the History of English. Anglia 122: 185-208. Simpson, John, Edmund Weiner, and Philip Durkin, 2004. 'The Oxford English Dictionary Today', Transactions of the Philological Society, 102, 335-81

WEEKS 5 & 6: seminar participants will decide between two of the three following options:

1: WEBSTER AND THE AMERICAN TRADITION.

Noah Webster’s dictionary of 1828 was a landmark in American dictionary-making for cultural as well as lexicographical reasons, and so (in different ways) was the Century Dictionary and Cyclopedia (first published 1889-1891, ed. W. D. Whitney) and Webster’s Third International Dictionary (1961, ed. P. Gove). This session will discuss the distinctive features of American dictionary-making - its scope, methodology and public reception - and examine transatlantic influences in both directions.

Reading Primary dictionaries (editions and how to locate them in Oxford to be discussed) Landau, Sidney I. 2009. Major American Dictionaries. In Oxford History of Lexicography, edited by A. P. Cowie. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Micklethwait, David. 2000. Noah Webster and the American Dictionary. Jefferson, NC and London: McFarland. Morton, Herbert Charles. 1994. The Story of Webster's Third: Philip Gove's Controversial Dictionary and its Critics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Nunberg, Geoffrey. 1990. What the Usage Panel Thinks. In L. Michaels and C. Ricks, eds., The State of the Language. Berkeley: University of California Press.

2: COBUILD AND CORPORA: CONTEMPORARY DICTIONARIES

The Collins Cobuild dictionary is often regarded as the most innovative dictionary of the twentieth century, partly because it enabled practising lexicographers to catch up with some of the linguistic innovations and insights of corpus linguistics that appeared so far to have passed them by. In this seminar we will look at what made Collins Cobuild different, and better, than its predecessors and consider its influence on lexicography since its first publication in 1987.

Reading Primary dictionaries (editions and how to locate them in Oxford to be discussed) ‘The Legacy of John Sinclair’, International Journal of Lexicography Special Issue, Volume 21 Issue 3 September 2008 Moon, Rosamund. 2009 ‘The Cobuild Project', in A. P. Cowie (ed.), The Oxford History of English Lexicography, Oxford University Press Moon, Rosamund. 2010. `What can a corpus tell us about lexis?', in M. McCarthy and A. O'Keeffe (eds.) The Routledge Handbook of Corpus Linguistics, Routledge.

3: SLANG DICTIONARIES

Slang is the specialist area of dictionary-making found most enticing by the public and dictionaries of slang have often held a special place in the heart of the dictionary-buying public; slang is the subject

105

field of the most famous internet dictionary, http://www.urbandictionary.com/, ‘A veritable cornucopia of streetwise lingo, posted and defined by its readers’. Yet the relationship between slang and colloquial, or more ‘general’, language has been particularly tricky for lexicographers to pin down satisfactorily and the content and respectability of slang dictionaries have varied enormously. This session will consider a selection of slang dictionaries, both historical and contemporary, in the light of the particular issues (e.g. definitions and sources) characterizing slang lexicography.

Reading Primary dictionaries (editions and how to locate them in Oxford to be discussed) Coleman, Julie. 2009. Slang and Cant Dictionaries. In Oxford History of Lexicography, edited by A. P. Cowie. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Coleman, Julie (2004-10). A History of Cant and Slang Dictionaries. 4 vols. Oxford: Oxford University Press Simes, G. (2005). ‘Gay Slang Lexicography: A Brief History and a Commentary on the First Two Gay Glossaries’. Dictionaries 1-159.

C-COURSE DESCRIPTIONS - HILARY TERM

You may select any C-Course

THE ANGLO-SAXON RIDDLE TRADITION Professor Andy Orchard ([email protected]) At first glance, the Anglo-Saxon Riddle-Tradition might seem an eccentric subject for serious study. But close reading of the riddles reveals much of what we can ever hope to recover of the Anglo-Saxon world, its interests and opinions, and its ties with those other worlds (Classical, Christian, Continental) that it sought variously to supplement and supplant. Alongside the 90-odd anonymous Old English Riddles of the Exeter Book, which provide the primary focus, this course considers the closely related Latin tradition of aenigmata exemplified in early Anglo-Saxon England by the North African poet Symphosius (‘party animal’), and by successive Anglo-Saxons whose works we can both date and name. Anglo-Saxon England witnessed the transformation from a native, pagan, oral, and traditional vernacular culture to one that embraced imported, Christian, literate, and innovative Latinate ideals, and the Anglo-Saxon Riddle-Tradition offers the perfect avenue to consider the tensions between the court and the cloister, the monastery and the mead-hall across a great swathe of the period. THEMES: There will be a continuing focus on the inter-relationships between all of the twelve separate collections that make up the Anglo-Saxon riddle tradition. Connections and contrasts will be considered between orality and literacy, between Latin and Old English, between imported ideas and an indigenous inheritance, between Christian culture and a secular perspective. All texts will be provided both in the original languages and in parallel translation; students will be encouraged both to seek out other texts and translations, and to offer new solutions to those provided in medieval manuscripts or suggested by modern scholars. Course overview: Week 1: Introduction: authorship and anonymity The first week will introduce many collections related to the wider Anglo-Saxon riddle tradition including those from named and identifiable Anglo-Saxon authors such as: Aldhelm, who died in 709/10 (Aenigmata Aldhelmi [ALD]); Tatwine, who died in 734 (Aenigmata Tatuini [TAT]); Bede, who died in 735 (Aenigmata Bedae [BED]); Hwætberht/Euesebius, who died in the 740s (Aenigmata Eusebii [EUS]); Boniface, who was murdered in 755 (Aenigmata Bonifatii [BON]); Alcuin, who died in 804 (Aenigmata Alcuini [ALC]; Disputatio regalis et nobilissimi Pippini cum Albino scholastico

106

[ALC D]). Alongside these riddles composed by some of the best-known Anglo-Saxon authors, there are three anonymous collections that can plausibly be considered Anglo-Saxon, namely a dozen Latin texts from Lorsch, likely dating from the eighth century (Aenigmata Laureshamensia [LOR]), the Old English Exeter Book Riddles, preserved in a single tenth-century manuscript (EXE), and the Latin Bibliotheca magnifica (BIB), again found in just one manuscript dating from the eleventh century. The Anglo-Saxon riddle tradition begins with the North African poet Symphosius (Aenigmata Symphosii [SYM]), whose works were brought to England in the late seventh century and taught in schools to Anglo-Saxon students such as Aldhelm, and there are close parallels with other anonymous Insular works that have direct connections with Anglo-Saxon England, such as the collection known as the Bern riddles (Aenigmata Bernensia [BER]), perhaps to be dated to the eighth century or the poem on the alphabet attributed to an unnamed Irishman (De alfabeto [ALF]).

Week 2: Riddles on the natural world The main texts to be considered are as follows: ‘wind and fire’ EUS 8 (VENTUS ET IGNIS); ‘wind and God’ EXE 1 (WIND OND GOD); ‘wind’ ALD 2 (VENTUS); BER 41 (VENTUS); ps-BED 5 (VENTUS); ‘swan’ EXE 5 (SWAN); ‘nightingale’ ALD 22 (ACALANTIDA); EXE 6 (NIHTE-GALE); ‘cuckoo’ EXE 7 (GEAC); ps-BED 9 (CUCULLUS); ‘barnacle goose’ EXE 8 (BYRNETE); ‘horn’ EXE 12 (HORN); EXE 76 (HORN); ‘hedgehog’ SYM 29 (ERICLUS); ‘fox’ SYM 34 (VULPES); EXE 13 (?FOX [or ‘hedgehog’); ‘jay’ EXE 22 (HIGORA); ‘bull’ SYM 32 (TAURUS); EUS 12 (BOS); ‘bullock’ ALD 83 (IUVENCUS); EUS 37 (VITULUS); LOR 11 (IUVENCUS); EXE 36 (HRYÐER); ps-BED 7 (IUVENCUS); ‘water’ ALD 29 (AQUA); LOR 3 (AQUA); EXE 39 (WÆTER); EXE 80 (WÆTER); ‘cock and hen’ EXE 40 (HANA OND HÆN); ‘book-moth’ EXE 45 (*BOC-MOĐĐE); ‘fire’ ALD 44 (IGNIS); TAT 33 (IGNIS); EXE 48 (FYR); ‘reed’ SYM 2 (HARUNDO); EXE 58 (HREOD); ‘ice’ SYM 10 (GLACIES); LOR 4 (GELU); BER 38 (GLACIES); BER 42 (GLACIES); ps-BED 6 (GLACIES); EXE 31 (IS); EXE 66 (IS); ‘moon and sun’ EXE 27 (MONA OND SUNNE); ‘ox’ EXE 10 (OXA); EXE 70 (OXA); ‘oak’ EXE 73 (AC); ‘oyster’ EXE 74 (OSTRE); ‘crab’ ALD 37 (CANCER); EXE 75 (CRABBA); EXE 78 (CRABBA); ‘river and fish’ SYM 12 (FLUMEN ET PISCIS); ‘fish and river’ ALC D93 (PISCIS ET FLUMEN); EXE 81 (FISC OND EA); ‘book and beech-tree’ EXE 88 (BOC). Week 3: Riddles on the man-made world The main texts to be considered are as follows: ‘bell’ SYM 81 (TINTINNABULUM); TAT 7 (TINTINNUM) EXE 2 (BELLE); EXE 67 (BELLE); ‘shield’ ALD 87 (CLIPEUS); EXE 3 (BORD, also‘chopping-board’); ‘beer-mug’ ps-BED 13 (COPA); ‘wine-cask’ ALD 78 (CUPA VINARIA); ‘wine-cup’ EXE 9 (WIN-FÆT); ‘anchor’ SYM 61 (ANCORA); EXE 14 (ANCOR); ‘amphora’ EXE 16 (CROG); ‘light warship’ EXE 17 (SNAC); ‘plough’ EXE 19 (SULH); ‘bow’ EXE 21 (BOGA); ‘mead’ EXE 25 (MEDU); ‘beam’ EXE 28 (BEAM); ‘merchant-ship’ EXE 30 (CEAP-SCIP); ‘rake’ EXE 32 (RACA); ‘mailcoat’ EXE 33 (BYRNE); ‘bellows’ SYM 73 (UTER FOLLIS); ALD 11 (POALUM); EXE 35 (BLÆST-BELG); EXE 83 (BLÆST-BELG); EXE 85 (BLÆST-BELG); ‘boat’ EXE 34 (BAT); ‘key’ SYM 4 (CLAVIS); EXE 42 (CÆG); EXE 87 (CÆG); ‘dough’ EXE 43 (DAG); ‘baking-oven’ EXE 47 (BÆC-OFEN); ‘flail’ EXE 50 (ÞERSCEL); ‘gallows’ EXE 51 (GEALGA); ‘churn’ EXE 52 (CYRN); ‘weapon-rack’ EXE 53 (*WÆPEN-HENGEN); ‘loom’ EXE 54 (WEB- BEAM); ‘pole’ EXE 56 (ROD); ‘shirt, garment’ EXE 59 (CYRTEL); ‘borer’ EXE 60 (BOR); ‘weather-cock’ EXE 77 (WEDER-COC); ‘glass beaker’ ALD 80 (CALIX VITREUS); EXE 61 (GLÆS-FÆT); ‘lighthouse’ ALD 92 (FARUS EDITISSIMA); ‘lighthouse’ EXE 68 (BEACEN-STAN); ‘man’ EXE 18 (SECG); EXE 69 (SECG); ‘spear made of ash’ EXE 71 (ÆSC); ‘ship’ SYM 13 (NAVIS); BED 12 (NAVIS); BER 11 (NAVIS); ‘ship made of oak’ EXE 72 (AC); ‘book’; EXE 91 (BOC). Week 4: Riddles of religion and learning The main texts to be considered are as follows: ‘God’ EUS 1 (DEUS); ‘angel’ EUS 2 (ANGELUS); ‘fallen angel’ EUS 3 (DEMON); ‘man’ EUS 4 (HOMO); ‘heaven’ EUS 5 (CAELUM); BON 1–20 (various vices and virtues); ‘philosophy’ TAT 1 (PHILOSOPHIA); ‘Hope, Faith, Charity’ TAT 2 (SPES, FIDES, CARITAS); ‘historical, anagogical, moral, and allegorical sense’ TAT 3 (HISTORIA ET ANAGOGE ET SENSUS MORALIS ET ALLEGORIA); ‘altar’ TAT 8 (ARA); ‘Christ’s cross’ TAT 9 (CRUX XRISTI); ‘lectern’ TAT 10 (RECITABULUM); ‘Adam’ TAT 22 (ADAM); ALC D84

107

(ADAM, ENOCH/ELIAS, LAZARUS);‘love’ BED 4 (AMOR); TAT 14 (CARITAS); BO N 5 (CARITAS); ‘omen’ BED 5 (OMEN); ‘age of man’ BED 16 (AETAS HOMINIS); ps-BED 4 (AETAS HOMINIS); ‘wisdom’ BIB 1 (DE SAPIENTIA); ps-BED 1 (SAPIENTIA); ‘lion and bee’ EXE 15 (LEO OND BEO); ‘creation’ ALD 100 (CREATURA); EXE 38 (GESCEAFT); EXE 64 (GESCEAFT); EXE 90 (GESCEAFT); ‘paten’ TAT 12 (PATENA); EXE 46 (HUSEL-DISC); ‘cross’ EUS 17 (CRUX); EXE 56 (ROD); ‘Lamb of God’ EXE 86 (AGNUS DEI); ‘chalice’ EXE 57 (HUSEL-FÆT); ‘Gospel book’ EXE 65 (CRISTES BOC); Week 5: Riddles of reading and writing The main texts to be considered are as follows: ALC 2–6 (various logogriphs); BIB 1–12 (aspects of learning); EUS 41–60 (poetic versions of Isidore); ‘writing-tablets’ ALD 32 (PUGILLARES); ‘bookcase’ ALD 89 (ARCA LIBRARIA); ‘lectern’ TAT 10 (RECITABULUM); ‘finger-counting’ ALC D95 (FLEXUS DIGITORUM); ‘ink’ LOR 12 (ATRAMENTUM); ‘bissextile day’ EUS 26 (DIES BISSEXTILIS); ‘cycle and the moon’s leap’ EUS 29 (AETAS ET SALTUS); ‘ink-horn’ EUS 30 (ATRAMENTORIUM); EXE 84 (BLÆC-HORN); EXE 89 (BLÆC-HORN); book-satchel’ EUS 33 (SCETHUM); ‘quill-pen’ EUS 35 (PENNA); ‘letter (epistle)’ ALC D101 (EPISTOLA); ‘alphabet’ ALD 30 (ELEMENTUM); ‘alpha’ EUS 9 (ALPHA); ‘letters’ ALF A–Z; BED 7 (A LITTERA); BED 2 (F LITTERA); BED 8 (I LITTERA); EUS 39 (I LITTERA); BED 9 (O LITTERA); BED 10 (V LITTERA); EUS 19 (V LITTERA); EUS 14 (X LITTERA); BER 25 (LITTERAE); EUS 7 (LITTERA); TAT 4 (APICES); EXE 55 (STAFAS); ‘paper’ BER 50a (CHARTA); ‘papyrus’ BER 27 (PAPIRUS); ‘parchment’ TAT 5 (MEMBRANUM); EUS 32 (MEMBRANUM); BER 24 (MEMBRANUM) EXE 24 (BOC-FELL); ‘pen’ ALD 59 (PENNA); TAT 6 (PENNA); ‘quill-pen and fingers’ EXE 29 (FEĐER OND FINGRAS); EXE 49 (FEĐER OND FINGRAS); LOR 9 (PENNA); ps-BED 11 (PENNA); ‘scribe’s fingers’ BED 18 (DIGITI SCRIBAE). Week 6: Riddles both bawdy and bizarre ‘gouty soldier’ SYM 94 (MILES PODAGRICUS); ‘man born blind’ ALD 85 (CAECUS NATUS); ‘man on a stool’ ps-BED 8 (HOMO SEDENS SUPER SEDILE); ‘one-eyed garlic-seller’ SYM 95 (LUSCUS ALIUM VENDENS); EXE 82 (ANEAGEDE GARLEAC MONGER); ‘one-eyed man’ TAT 20 (LUSCUS); ‘onion’ SYM 44 (CAEPA) EXE 23 (CIPE); EXE 63 (CIPE); ‘pregnant sow’ ALD 84 (SCROFA PRAEGNANS); ‘prepositions taking two cases’ TAT 16 (PRAEPOSITIONES UTRIUSQUE CASUS); ‘squinting eyes’ TAT 19 (STRABI OCULI); ‘ten chickens’ EXE 11 (TEN CICCENU); ‘threefold death’ TAT 23 (TRINA MORS); ‘tightrope-walker’ SYM 96 (FUNAMBULUS); ‘wine turned to vinegar’ SYM 84 (VINUM IN ACETUM CONVERSUM); ‘woman bearing twins’ SYM 93 (MULIER QUAE GEMINOS PARIEBAT); ALD 90 (PUERPERA GEMINAS ENIXA); ps-BED 12 (PUERPERA GEMINAS ENIXA); ‘onion’ EXE 23 (CIPE); ‘cock and hen’ EXE 40 (HANA OND HÆN); ‘key’ EXE 42 (CÆG); ‘dough’ EXE 43 (DAG); ‘Lot and his children’ EXE 44 (LOTH OND BEARN); ‘churn’ EXE 52 (CYRN); ‘shirt’, ‘garment’ EXE 59 (CYRTEL); ‘borer’ EXE 60 (BOR). Teaching and assessment: students will be required to make presentations during seminars. Assessment will take place via a 5–7,000-word essay produced at the end of the course BIBLIOGRAPHY: The following bibliography is for reference, and you are not expected to cover all of it; selected primary texts for discussion each week are indicated above, under ‘Course Overview’. Guidance regarding further reading (both primary and secondary) will be provided each week.

General bibliography: Bergamin, Manuela, ed. and trans. Aenigmata Symposii: La fondazione dell’enigmistica come genere poetico. Per Verba. Testi mediolatini con traduzione 22. Florence, 2005. Bieler, Ludwig. “Some Remarks on the Aenigmata Laureshamensia.” Romanobarbarica 2 (1977): 11–15. Bitterli, Dieter, Say What I Am Called: the Old English Riddles of the Exeter Book and the Anglo- Latin Riddle Tradition (Toronto, 2009) Dümmler, Ernst, ed. Aenigmata Anglica, MGH PLAC 1. Berlin, 1881, 20–23. Dümmler, Ernst, ed. Aenigmata Bonifatii, MGH PLAC 1. Berlin, 1881, 1–15. Dümmler, Ernst. “Lörscher Rätsel.” Zeitschrift für deutsches Altertum 22 (1878): 258–63. Ehwald, Rudolph, ed. Aldhelmi Opera. MGH AA 15. Berlin, 1913. 108

Fry, Donald K. “Exeter Book Riddle Solutions.” Old English Newsletter 15.1 (1981): 22– 33. Glorie, F., ed. Collectiones Aenigmatum Merovingicae Aetatis. 2 vols. CCSL 133 and 133A. Turnhout: Brepols, 1968. Glorie, F., Variae Collectiones Aenigmatum Merovingicae Aetatis, 2 vols., Corpus Christianorum, Series Latina 133–133A (Turnhout, 1968) Krapp, George Philip, and Elliot Van Kirk Dobbie, eds. The Exeter Book. ASPR 3. London, 1936. Lendinara, Patrizia. “Gli Aenigmata Laureshamensia.” PAN: Studi dell'Istituto di Filologia Latina 7 (1981 for 1979): 73–90. Lendinara, Patrizia. “Gli enigmi del Codice Exoniense: una ricerca bibliografica.” Annali dell’Istituto Universitario Orientale Napoli: Filologia germanica 19 (1976): 231– 329. Muir, Bernard J., ed., The Exeter Anthology of Old English Poetry, 2 volumes. Exeter, 1994; rev. ed. 2000; 2nd rev. ed. 2006 with DVD. Murphy, Patrick J. Unriddling the Exeter Riddles. University Park, PA, 2011. Murphy, Patrick J., Unriddling the Exeter Riddles (University Park, PA, 2011) Niles, John D., Old English Enigmatic Poems and the Play of the Texts. Studies in the Early Middle Ages 13 (Turnhout, 2006) Orchard, Andy, “Enigma Variations: The Anglo-Saxon Riddle-Tradition,” in Latin Learning and English Lore: Studies in Anglo-Saxon Literature for Michael Lapidge, ed. Katherine O’Brien O’Keeffe and Andy Orchard, Toronto Old English Series (Toronto, 2005), I, 284–304 Pitman, James H., trans. The Riddles of Aldhelm. Yale Studies in English 67. New Haven, 1925. Poole, Russell, Old English Wisdom Poetry, Annotated Bibliographies of Old and Middle English Literature 5 (Cambridge and Rochester, NY, 1998) Poole, Russell. Old English Wisdom Poetry. Annotated Bibliographies of Old and Middle English Literature 5. Cambridge: D.S. Brewer, 1998. Pope, John C. “Palaeography and Poetry: Some Solved and Unsolved Mysteries of the Exeter Book.” In Medieval Scribes, Manuscripts and Libraries: Essays Presented to N. R. Ker. M. B. Parkes, Andrew G. Watson, eds. London, 1978. 25–65. Porter, John, trans. Anglo-Saxon Riddles. Hockwold-cum-Wilton, 1995. Porter, John, trans., Anglo-Saxon Riddles (Hockwold cum Wilton, 1995) Riese, Alexander, ed., “Bern Riddles.” in Anthologia Latina. Leipzig, 1894; repr. Amsterdam, 1964; Part I, fasc. I, 351–70. Strecker, Karl, ed. Aenigmata Hexasticha; Enigmata in Dii Nomine Tullii. MGH PLAC 4.2 Berlin, 1923, pp. 732–59. Suchier, Walther, ed. ‘Disputatio Pippini cum Albino.’ In Die Altercatio Hadriani Augusti et Epicteti Philosophi, nebst einigen verwandten Texten, ed. L.W. Daly and W. Suchier. Illinois Studies in Language and Literature 24. 134–46. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1939. Tolkien, Christopher, ed. and trans. The Saga of King Heidrek the Wise. New York: Thomas Nelson and Sons, 1960. Tupper, Frederick M., Jr. “Originals and Analogues of the Exeter Book Riddles.” Modern Language Notes 18 (1903): 97–106. Tupper, Frederick M., Jr. “Solutions of the Exeter Book Riddles.” Modern Language Notes 21 (1906): 97–105. Tupper, Frederick M., Jr., ed., The Riddles of the Exeter Book. Boston, 1910. Repr. 1968. Whitman, Frank H. “Aenigmata Tatwini.” Neuphilologische Mitteilungen 88 (1987): 8–17. Whitman, Frank H. Old English Riddles. Canadian Federation for the Humanities, Monograph Series 3. Port Credit, ON, 1982. Williamson, Craig, A Feast of Creatures: Anglo-Saxon Riddle-Songs Translated with Introduction, Notes and Commentary (Chapel Hill, NC, 1982) Williamson, Craig, ed. The Old English Riddles of the ‘Exeter Book’. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1977. Williamson, Craig, ed., The Old English Riddles of the ‘Exeter Book’ (Chapel Hill, NC, 1977) Williamson, Craig. A Feast of Creatures: Anglo-Saxon Riddle-Songs Translated with Introduction, Notes and Commentary. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1982. Wyatt, Alfred J. Old English Riddles. Boston, 1912. Week 1: Introduction: authorship and anonymity 109

Bitterli, Dieter. Say What I Am Called: the Old English Riddles of the Exeter Book and the Anglo- Latin Riddle Tradition. Toronto, 2009. Borysławski, Rafał. The Old English Riddles and the Riddlic Elements of Old English Poetry. Studies in English Medieval Language and literature 9. Frankfurt am Main, 2004. Cook, Eleanor. Enigmas and Riddles in Literature. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2006. Erhardt-Siebold, Erika von. Die lateinischen Rätsel der Angelsachsen: ein Beitrag zur Kulturgeschichte Altenglands. Anglistische Forschungen 61. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, 1925; repr. Amsterdam: Swets and Zeitlinger, 1974. Forster, Edward Seymour. “Riddles and Problems from the Greek Anthology.” Greece and Rome 14 (1945): 42–47. Hacikyan, Agop. “Emendations for Codex Exoniensis, Folios 101a–115a, 122b–123a, 124b–130b.” Revue de l’Université d’Ottawa 37 (1967): 46–66, 344–58. Hacikyan, Agop. “The Literary and the Social Aspects of the Old English Riddles.” Revue de l’Université d’Ottawa 36 (1966): 107–20. Hacikyan, Agop. “The Modern English Renditions of Codex Exoniensis, Folios 101a– 115a; 122b– 123a; 124b-“30b.” Revue de l’Université d’Ottawa 39 (1969): 249– 73. Hacikyan, Agop. A Linguistic and Literary Analysis of Old English Riddles. Montreal, 1966. Hahn, Heinrich. “Die Rätseldichter Tatwin und Eusebius.” Forschungen zur deutschen Geschichte 26 (1886): 601–31. Lapidge, Michael, and James L. Rosier. Aldhelm: the Poetic Works. Cambridge, 1985. Milanović- Barham, Čelica. “Aldhelm’s Enigmata and Byzantine Riddles.” Anglo-Saxon England 22 (1993): 51– 64. Orchard, Andy. “Enigma Variations: The Anglo-Saxon Riddle-Tradition.” Latin Learning and English Lore: Studies in Anglo-Saxon Literature for Michael Lapidge. Ed. Katherine O’Brien O’Keeffe and Andy Orchard. Toronto Old English series. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2005. I, 284–304. Pavlovskis, Zoja. “The Riddler’s Microcosm: from Symphosius to St. Boniface.” Classica et Mediaevalia 39 (1988): 219–51. Riedinger, Anita R. “The Formulaic Style in the Old English Riddles.” Studia Neophilologica 76 (2004): 30–43. Rigg, A. G., and G. R. Wieland. “A Canterbury Classbook of the Mid-Eleventh Century (the ‘Cambridge Songs’ Manuscript).” Anglo-Saxon England 4 (1975): 113–30. Scott, Peter Dale. “Rhetorical and Symbolic Ambiguity: the Riddles of Symphosius and Aldhelm.” Saints, Scholars and Heroes: Studies in Medieval Culture in Honour of Charles W. Jones. Ed. Margot H. King and Wesley M. Stevens. Collegeville, MN, 1979. 1: 117–44. Steen, Janie. Verse and Virtuosity: the Adaptation of Latin Rhetoric in Old English Poetry. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2008. Stewart, Ann Harleman. “Kenning and Riddle in Old English.” Papers on Language and Literature 15 (1979): 115–36. Taylor, Archer. “The Varieties of Riddles.” in Philologica: The Malone Anniversary Studies, ed. by Thomas A. Kirby and Henry Bosley Woolf. Baltimore, 1949, 1–8. Tigges, Wim. “Signs and Solutions: a Semiotic Approach to the Exeter Book Riddles.” This Noble Craft. Ed. Erik Kooper. Amsterdam and Atlanta: Rodopi, 1991. 59–82. Tupper, Frederick M., Jr. “The Comparative Study of Riddles.” Modern Language Notes 18 (1903): 1–8. Wilcox, Jonathan. “‘Tell Me What I Am’: The Old English Riddles.” Readings in Medieval Texts: Interpreting Old and Middle English Literature. Ed. David F. Johnson and Elaine Treharne. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2005. 46–59. Zehnder, Ursula. “Hypermetrical Verse Patterns in the Riddles of the Exeter Book.” Notes and Queries n.s. 47 (2000): 405–09. Week 2: Riddles on the natural world Fiocco, Teresa. “Gli animali negli enigmi anglo-sassoni dell’Exeter Book.” Simbolismo animale e letteratura. Ed. Dora Faraci. Memoria bibliografica 42. Rome: Vecchiarelli, 2003. 133–57. Hill, Thomas D. “Saturn’s Time Riddle: an Insular Latin Analogue for Solomon and Saturn II lines 282–91.” Review of English Studies 39 (1988): 273–76. Lockett, Leslie. Anglo-Saxon Psychologies in the Vernacular and Latin Traditions. Toronto, 2011. 110

Nelson, Marie. “The Rhetoric of the Exeter Book Riddles.” Speculum 49 (1974): 421–40. Nelson, Marie. “Time in the Exeter Book Riddles.” Philological Quarterly 54 (1975): 511– 18. Neville, Jennifer. Representations of the Natural World in Old English Poetry. Cambridge Studies in Anglo-Saxon England 27. Cambridge: 1999. Orchard, Andy. “Performing Writing and Singing Silence in the Anglo-Saxon Riddle-Tradition.” Oral and Literate Traditions. Ed. Daniel F. Chamberlain and J. Edward Chamberlin. (forthcoming, 2014). Stanley, E. G. “Heroic Aspects of the Exeter Book Riddles.” Prosody and Poetics in the Early Middle Ages: Essays in Honour of C. B. Hieatt. Ed. M. J. Toswell. Toronto, 1995. 197–218. Stork, Nancy Porter, Through a Gloss Darkly: Aldhelm's Riddles in the British Library Royal 12.C.xxiii (Toronto, 1990) Week 3: Riddles on the man-made world Hayes, Mary. “The Talking Dead: Resounding Voices in Old English Riddles.” Exemplaria 20 (2008): 123–42. Herren, Michael W., ed. and trans. The Hisperica Famina I: the A-Text. Toronto: Pontifical Institute of Mediaeal Studies, 1974. Howe, Nicholas. “Aldhelm’s Enigmata and Isidorian Etymology.” Anglo-Saxon England 14 (1985): 37–59. Irving, Edward B., Jr. “Heroic Experience in the Old English Riddles.” Old English Shorter Poems: Basic Readings. Ed. Katherine O’Brien O’Keeffe. Basic Readings in Anglo-Saxon England 3. New York, 1994. 199–212. Jember, Gregory K. “A Generative Method for the Study of Anglo-Saxon Riddles.” Studies in Medieval Culture 11 (1977): 33–39. Kopár, Lilla. “The Anglo-Saxon Scribe in the Light of the Exeter Book Riddles.” English Studies and the Curriculum: Proceedings of the Second TEMPUS-JEN Mini Conference. Ed. István Rácz. Debrecen, 1997. 29–37. Kries, Susanne. “Fela í rúnum eða í skáldskap: Anglo-Saxon and Scandinavian Approaches to Riddles and Poetic Disguises.” Riddles, Knights and Cross-Dressing Saints: Essays on Medieval English Language and Literature. Ed. Thomas Honegger. Sammlung/Collection Variations 5. Bern, 2005. 139–64. Lendinara, Patrizia. “Aspetti della società germanica negli enigmi del Codice Exoniense.” Antichità germaniche: I Parte. I Seminario avanzato in Filologia germanica. Ed. Vittoria Dolcetti Corazza and Renato Gendre. Bibliotheca Germanica, Studi e Testi 10. Alessandria: Edizioni dell’Orso, 2001. 3–41. Marino, Matthew. “The Literariness of the Exeter Book Riddles.” Neuphilologische Mitteilungen 79 (1978): 258–65. Nelson, Marie. “Four Social Functions of the Exeter Book Riddles.” Neophilologus 75 (1991): 445– 50. Nelson, Marie. “The Paradox of Silent Speech in the Exeter Book Riddles.” Neophilologus 62 (1978): 609–15. Neville, Jennifer. “The Unexpected Treasure of the ‘Implement Trope’: Hierarchical Relationships in the Old English Riddles.” Review of English Studies 62 (2011): 505–19. Niles, John D. Old English Enigmatic Poems and the Play of the Texts. Studies in the Early Middle Ages 13. Turnhout, 2006. Sorrell, Paul. “Oaks, Ships, Riddles and the Old English Rune Poem.” Anglo-Saxon England 19 (1990): 103–16. Week 4: Riddles of religion and learning Bayless, Martha, and Michael Lapidge. Collectanea Pseudo-Bedae. Scriptores Latini Hiberniae 14. Dublin: School of Celtic Studies, Dublin Institute of Advanced Studies, 1998. Bayless, Martha. ‘The Collectanea and Medieval Dialogues and Riddles.’ In Collectanea Pseudo- Bedae, ed. Bayless and Lapidge. 12–24. Folkerts, Menso. “Die Alkuin zugeschriebenen Propositiones ad acuendos iuvenes.” In Science in Western and Eastern Civilization in Carolingian Times, ed. P.L. Butzer and D. Lohrmann. 273– 81. Basel: Birkhäuser, 1993. Folkerts, Menso. Die älteste mathematische Aufgabensammlung in lateinischer Sprache: Die Alcuin zugeschriebenen ‘Propositiones ad acuendos iuvenes’: Überlieferung, Inhalt, Kritische Edition. Osterreichische Akademie der Wissenschaften, Mathematisch-naturwissenschaftliche Klasse, Denkschriften 116.6.Vienna: Springer 1978. 111

Gropp, Harald. ‘Propositio de lupo et capra et fasciculo cauli – On the History of River-Crossing Problems.’ In Charlemagne and his Heritage: 1200 Years of Civilization and Science in Europe: Karl der Grosse und sein Nachwirken: 1200 Jahre Kultur und Wissenschaft in Europa. Vol. 2: Mathematical Arts, ed. P.L. Butzer et al. 31– 41. Turnhout: Brepols, 1998. Hadley, John, and David Singmaster. “Problems to Sharpen the Young: An Annotated Translation of Propositiones ad acuendos iuvenes, the Oldest Mathematical Problem Collection in Latin, Attributed to Alcuin of York.” Mathematical Gazette 76 (1992): 102–26. Stork, Nancy Porter. Through a Gloss Darkly: Aldhelm’s Riddles in the British Library Mediaeval Studies Royal 12.C.xxiii. Studies and Texts 98. Toronto, 1990. Week 5: Riddles of reading and writing Barney, Stephen A., W. J. Lewis, J. A. Beach, and Oliver Berghof, trans., The “Etymologies” of Isidore of Seville (Cambridge, 2006) Barney, Stephen A., W. J. Lewis, J. A. Beach, and Oliver Berghof, trans., The “Etymologies” of Isidore of Seville. Cambridge, 2006. Bayless, Martha. “Alcuin’s Disputatio Pippini and the Early Medieval Riddle Tradition.” Humour, History and Politics in Late Antiquity and the Early Middle Ages. Ed. Guy Halsall. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002. 157–78. Dewa, Roberta. “The Runic Riddles of the Exeter Book: Language Games and Anglo-Saxon Scholarship.” Nottingham Medieval Studies 39 (1995): 26–36. Eliason, Norman E. “Four Old English Cryptographic Riddles.” Studies in Philology 49 (1952): 553– 65. Fell, Christine E. “Runes and Riddles in Anglo-Saxon England.” ‘Lastworda Betst’: Essays in Memory of Christine E. Fell with Her Unpublished Writings. Foreword by R. I. Page. Ed. Carole Hough and Kathryn A. Lowe. Foreword by R. I. Page. Donington, 2002. 264–77. Göbel, Helga. Studien zu den altenglischen Schriftwesenratseln. Epistemata: Wurzburger wissenschaftliche Schriften, Reihe Literaturwissenschaft 7. Würzburg, 1980. Gwara, Scott, and Barbara L. Bolt. “A ‘Double Solution’ for Exeter Book Riddle 51, ‘Pen and Three Fingers.’” Notes and Queries, n.s., 54 (2007): 16–19. Halsall, Maureen. The Old English Rune Poem: A Critical Edition. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1981. Lindsay, W. M., ed., Isidorii Etymologiarum Sive Origines, 2 vols. Oxford, 1911. Reuschel, Helga. “Kenningar bei Alcuin. Zur ‘Disputatio Pippini cum Albino’.” Beiträge zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache und Literatur 62 (1938): 143–55. Ross, Margaret Clunies. “The Anglo-Saxon and Norse Rune Poems: a Comparative Approach.” Anglo-Saxon England 19 (1990): 23–39. Rusche, Philip. “Isidore’s Etymologiae and the Canterbury Aldhelm Scholia.” Journal of English and German Philology 104 (2005): 437–55. Shook, Laurence K. “Riddling Relating to the Anglo-Saxon Scriptorium.” Essays in Honour of Anton Charles Pegis. Ed. J. Reginald O’Donnell. Toronto, 1974. 215–36. Singmaster, David. ‘The History of Some of Alcuin’s Propositions.’ In Charlemagne and His Heritage: 1200 Years of Civilization and Science in Europe: Karl der Grosse und sein Nachwirken: 1200 Jahre Kultur und Wissenschaft in Europa. Vol. 2: MathematicalArts, ed. P.L. Butzer et al. 11– 29. Turnhout: Brepols, 1998. Week 6: Riddles both bawdy and bizarre Davis, Glenn. “The Exeter Book Riddles and the Place of Sexual Idiom in Old English Literature.” Medieval Obscenities. Ed. Nicola McDonald. York: York Medieval Press, 2006. 39–54. Gleissner, Reinhard. Die ‘zweideutigen’ altenglischen Ratsel des ‘Exeter Book’ in ihrem zeitgenössischen Kontext. Sprache und Literatur: Regensburger Arbeiten zur Anglistik und Amerikanistik 23. Bern, 1984. Rissanen, Matti. “Nathwæt in the Exeter Book Riddles.” American Notes and Queries 24 (1986): 116– 20. Smith, D. K. “Humor in Hiding: Laughter between the Sheets in the Exeter Book Riddles.” Humour in Anglo-Saxon Literature. Ed. Jonathan Wilcox. Cambridge, 2000. 79– 98. Stewart, Ann Harleman. “Double Entendre in the Old English Riddles.” Lore and Language 3.8 (1983): 39–52.

112

Tanke, John W. “Wonfeax wale: Ideology and Figuration in the Sexual Riddles of the Exeter Book.” Class and Gender in Early English Literature. Ed. Britton J. Harwood and Gillian R. Overing. Bloomington and Indianapolis, IN, 1994. 21– 42. Taylor, Archer. “Riddles Dealing with Family Relationships.” The Journal of American Folklore 51 (1938): 25–37. Tigges, Wim. “Snakes and Ladders: Ambiguity and Coherence in the Exeter Book Riddles and Maxims.” Companion to Old English Poetry. Ed. Henk Aertsen and Rolf H. Bremmer, Jr. Amsterdam, 1994. 95–118.

OLD NORSE LITERATURE Dr Heather O’Donoghue ([email protected]) This course is designed to be flexible enough to meet two needs. On the one hand, beginners in Old Norse will be introduced to a varied range of Old Norse Icelandic prose and poetry, and be able to set these texts in their historical and cultural contexts. On the other, those who have already studied some Old Norse will be able to focus on texts directly relevant or complementary to their own interests and expertise. There will be language classes in Old Norse, and a series of introductory classes on the literature, in Michaelmas Term. These classes are mandatory for anyone who wishes to do the option in Hilary Term but has not done any Old Norse at undergraduate level.

Preliminary Reading List Language: E.V.Gordon, Introduction to Old Norse (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1981) Michael Barnes, A New Introduction to Old Norse, Part I Grammar (London: Viking Society for Northern Research, 1999) Old Norse-Icelandic literature: Heather O’Donoghue, Old Norse-Icelandic Literature: A Short Introduction (Blackwell, 2004) 162 Preben Meulengracht Sorensen, Saga and Society, transl. John Tucker (Odense: Odense University Press, 1993) G. Turville-Petre, Origins of Icelandic Literature (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1953) E.O.G. Turville-Petre, Scaldic Poetry (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1976) Margaret Clunies Ross, ed., Old Icelandic Literature and Society (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000) Phillip Pulsiano, ed., Medieval Scandinavia: an encyclopaedia (New York; London: Garland: 1993) Jenny Jochens, Old Norse Images of Women (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1996) William Ian Miller, Bloodtaking and peacemaking: feud, law and society in saga Iceland (London; Chicago: University of Chicago press, 1990)

Translations: The Sagas of the Icelanders: a selection, ed., Viðar Hreinsson (London: Penguin, 2000) The Complete Sagas of Icelanders, ed.Viðar Hreinsson (five volumes, various translators) (Reykjavík: Leifur Eiríksson Publishing, 1997)(now being published separately as Penguin Classics, various translators) Snorri Sturluson: Edda , trans. Anthony Faulkes (London: Dent, 1987) The Poetic Edda, trans. Carolyne Larrington (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999), or trans. Andy Orchard as The Elder Edda (Penguin Classics, 2011) 113

EARLY MEDIEVAL ENGLISH DEVOTIONAL AND PASTORAL LITERATURE Professor Annie Sutherland ([email protected]) This course will begin with the thirteenth-century Ancrene Wisse. A text of guidance written for women embarking on lives of anchoritic solitude, Ancrene Wisse will be considered alongside the closely associated texts of the Katherine Group (the lives of saints Katherine, Margaret and Juliana, in addition to Sawles Warde and Hali Meiðhad) and the Wooing Group (a series of lyrical meditations addressed to Christ and the Virgin Mary). There will also be an opportunity to explore the Trinity and Lambeth Homilies and related homiletic texts. The course will provide scope for close readings of the texts in their manuscript contexts, and will also encourage broader investigations which might include (although need not be confined to)

 sources and background

 ways of reading/listening invited by the texts

 authors and audiences

 the shape of the anchoritic/Christian life

 later uses and adaptations of the texts

Students who opt for this course will need to work on this material in the original language (i.e., Early Middle English).

Suggested preliminary reading:

Watson and Savage (eds and trans), Anchoritic Spirituality: Ancrene Wisse and Associated Works (1991) Millett (ed and trans), Ancrene Wisse: A Guide for Anchoresses (2009) Talbot, Fanous and Leyser (eds and trans), The Life of Christina of Markyate (2006) Millett (ed), Ancrene Wisse EETS os 325, 326 (2005, 2006) Thompson (ed), The Wooing Group, EETS os 241 (1958) Wada (ed), A Companion to Ancrene Wisse (2003) Chewning (ed), The Milieu and Context of the Wooing Group (2010)

CHAUCER BEFORE THE TALES Professor Vincent Gillespie ([email protected]) An exploration of the works Chaucer wrote as he explored and refined his sense of poetic identity. We will look in detail at The Book of the Duchess and The House of Fame, his translation work on Boethius and the Roman de la Rose, and his paired works of Troilus and Criseyde and The Legend of Good Women. We can refine the course to suit the specific interests of people taking it, but The House of Fame will be key to our examination of Chaucer's sense of authorship and his growing understanding of the nature of the Poetic. The classes will allow course members to develop their own portfolio of approaches and ideas about these texts. Please acquire a copy of The Riverside Chaucer and get fully acquainted with the primary texts.

114

LIFE IN SPENCER AND SHAKESPEARE Professor Simon Palfrey ([email protected]) This course will explore the life in literary and dramatic forms. It will question whether mimesis is an adequate term for what this work does. Imitation implies an anterior reality that measures and regulates the imitation (its value, accuracy, ethics, politics). But might artworks generate their own modes of life? Or model unknown or yet-to-come modes? And if so, does this kind of auto-poetic dispensation propose less an escape from history than a renewed intensification of what history in the broadest sense might be? The forms of art may be animate distillations of history in action, far more various and superimposed (temporally, eventally, agentially) than positivistic notions of a 'text' that issues from a 'context' can allow.

The course will engage with central questions of poetics and humanism, and the relation between the two. Might we need to take more seriously the idea that poetry or plays can change lives? If humanism is about active virtue/virtu, then what exactly is the action of poetry and plays? Rather than generalizing or presupposing or abstracting such things, the course will encourage students to pay close attention to these things in action, from the ground up. And if poetics (including theatrical poetics) generates its own forms of life, then what does this imply about the human in humanism? Perhaps poetics implicitly models nonhuman modes of life, more decentred and distributed than anthropocentric assumptions often admit.

Students will be introduced to theory and philosophy that bears upon questions of the morphology of life (pre-modern, early modern, modern, post-modern), especially seminal thinkers of life as process and change. eg Lucretius, Bruno, Campanella, Spinoza, Leibniz, Hegel, Bergson, Heidegger, Whitehead, Deleuze, Latour. They won't be asked to 'apply' these thinkers, but encouraged to read them so as to open up their own ways of thinking and reading.

The course will focus equally and symbiotically on the works of Spenser and Shakespeare. Their works will be read both next to and against one another, each as it were a lens for the other. In this way supposed differences between the two writers - and supposed commonalties - can be tested.

Students may concentrate on any works of the two principal authors they like, and discussion will range across the writers' canons, but classes will focus particularly upon the following:

Spenser: Muiopotmos, Epithalamion, Four Hymns, Faerie Queene

Shakespeare: Venus and Adonis, Comedy of Errors, Twelfth Night, Measure for Measure, King Lear, Macbeth, Winter's Tale, The Tempest.

Each class will explore a specific form or nest of forms. The same basic questions will be asked of each of them. Does this form imply or create a particular mode of life? What is its relation to or difference from everyday ways of understanding life? Does it observe or exceed the evidence of the senses? Why not simply describe, elegantly, what can be seen with the eyes or shared by all? Why use this particular form at all? What is the value, beyond occasional instrumentality, of things like metaphors, puns, stanzas, rhymes, intervals, scenes? The first two classes will focus respectively on Spenser (week 1) and Shakespeare (week 2); after that each class will explore the work of both writers in contrast and dialectic with one another.

Week 1 (Spenser) & 2 (Shakespeare): What is [a] human?

115

Allegory; Doubles/Surrogates; Disguise; Character; Actor; Metamorphosis; Non-humans

Week 3: Words

Metaphor;Wordplay; Allegory

Week 4: Narrative units

Stanza; Scene; Interval

Week 5: Prosody

Rhyme; Line; Sentence

Week 6:Speech and silence

Dialogue; Cue; Cue-space

Essential Reading

The writings of Spenser and Shakespeare, as widely as possible.

Recommended Reading

Sylvia Adamson et al. Renaissance Figures of Speech (2007) Paul Alpers, The Poetry of the Faerie Queene (1967) Harry Berger Jr., Revisionary Play: Studies in the Spenserian Dynamics (1992) A. C. Hamilton, The Spenser Encyclopedia (for reference) Daniel Tiffany, Infidel Poetics (2009) Kenneth Gross, “Shapes of Time: On the Spenserian Stanza”, Spenser Studies 2004 William Empson, Seven Types of Ambiguity (1930)

Angus Fletcher, Allegory: the Theory of a Symbolic Mode (1964) Lorna Hutson, The Invention of Suspicion (2007) John Kerrigan, The Sonnets and A Lover's Complaint (1999) James A. Knapp, Image Ethics in Shakespeare and Spenser (2011) Emrys Jones, Scenic Form in Shakespeare (1971) Theresa Krier, “Time Lords: Rhythm and Interval in Spenser’s Stanzaic Narrative”, Spenser Studies 2007 *Richard McCabe, Oxford Handbook of Edmund Spenser (2012); The Pillars of Eternity (1989); Spenser's Monstrous Regiment (2002); *Martin Meisel, How Plays Work (2007) David Lee Miller, “The Chastity of Allegory”, Spenser Studies 2014 Simon Palfrey, Shakespeare's Possible Worlds (2014); Poor Tom: Living King Lear (2014); Doing Shakespeare (2011) Palfrey & Stern, Shakespeare in Parts (2007) Gordon Teskey, Allegory and Violence (1996); 'A Retrograde Reading of Spenser’s Fowre Hymnes', Spenser Studies 2008; “Thinking Moments in The Faerie Queene”, Spenser Studies 2007 Michael Witmore, Pretty Creatures (2007); Shakespearean Metaphysics (2008) *Henry Turner, ed. Early Modern Theatricality (2013); The English Renaissance Stage (2006) *George Wright, Shakespeare's Metrical Art (1988)

Further reading Stephen Booth, King Lear, Macbeth, Indefinition, and Tragedy (1983) Drew Daniel, The Melancholy Assemblage (2013) Stanley Cavell, Disowning Knowledge in Seven Plays of Shakespeare (2003) 116

A. C. Bradley, Shakespearean Tragedy (1904) Philip Davis, Shakespeare Thinking (2007) Margreta de Grazia, Hamlet Without Hamlet (2009) Angus Fletcher, The Prophetic Moment (1971) Kenneth Gross, Puppets; an essay on uncanny life (2010); Shakespeare's Noise (2001); O. B. Hardison, Prosody and Purpose in the English Renaissance (1989) Paul Kottman, A Politics of the Scene (2007) Angela Leighton, On Form (Oxford, 2007) Julia Reinhard Lupton, Thinking With Shakespeare (2011) Alexander Nagel & Christopher S. Wood, Anachronic Renaissance (2010) Valere Novarina, The Theater of the Ears (1996) Paul Ricoeur, The Rule of Metaphor (2003) Joseph Roach, The Player's Passion (1993) Bert O. States, Great Reckonings in Little Rooms: On the Phenomenology of Theater (1985) Tiffany Stern, Documents of Performance (2009) Evelyn Tribble, Cognition in the Globe (2011) G. Wilson Knight, The Wheel of Fire Bart van Es, Spenser's Forms of History (2002)

Some theoretical/philosophical options: Lucretius, De Rerum Natura, trans W. H. D. Rouse, revised Ferguson Smith (Cambridge, 1992) Giordano Bruno, Cause, Principle, and Unity, trans. Robert de Lucca, (Cambridge, 1998) Spinoza, Ethics, trans. Boyle, revised Parkinson (London, 1993) Leibniz, New Essays on Human Understanding, ed. Remnant & Bennett (Cambridge, 1996); Philosophical Texts, ed. Woodhouse & Francks (Oxford, 1998), esp. Monadology. Herder, Philosophical Writings, ed Forster (Cambridge 2006), esp. 'On the Cognition and Sensation of the Human Soul' Hegel, Aesthetics, 2 vols., trans Knox (Oxford, 1975); Phenomenology of Spirit, trans. Miller (Oxford, 1977) Henri Bergson, Time and Free Will, trans. Pogson (London, 1913) Alfred North Whitehead, Modes of Thought (1938) Henri Focillon, The Life of Forms in Art (1992) Deleuze & Guattari, A Thousand Plateaus (1988) Bruno Latour, Pandora's Hope (1999) Daniel Heller-Roazen, The Inner Touch (2007) Graham Harman, Towards Speculative Realism (2009) Timothy Morton, The Ecological Thought (2010)

UTOPIAN WRITING FROM MORE TO HUME Professor Richard McCabe ([email protected]) When More ended Utopia inconconclusively he issued an invitation to contemporaries and future generations to continue the debate initiated by Hythlodaeus and his interlocutors. This course is designed to examine the response by considering the development of Utopian fiction from the sixteenth to the mid-eighteenth century, relating its key generic, stylistic and formal features (such as the use of fable, dialogue, and cartography) to the intellectual, social and political uses to which they are put. It will examine the complex relationships between different varieties of ‘topoi’ – utopia, eutopia, dystopia, and paratopia (the latter entailing the idealization of actual places) – in the wider contexts of civic humanism, colonialism, and the literature of discovery, travel, and philosophical enquiry. In the case of the third session, ‘Utopia and Theocracy’, for example, fictive accounts of the ‘good place’ will be related to such historic instances as the Anabaptist attempt to set up a theocracy in Münster, and the reforms introduced at Calvin’s Geneva. The course will begin with an

117

examination of some crucial Classical and Biblical texts that were influential throughout the entire period. While the main texts have been categorized in the sessions below for convenience of analysis, the course will demonstrate the malleability of such distinctions – in terms, for example, of the importance of religious elements in ‘scientific’ utopias and educational programmes in ‘religious’ utopias. There will be many opportunities to contextualise the construction of fictive societies in relation to changing political outlooks – Machiavellian, republican, monarchist, ‘communist’, theocratic, or patriarchalist – and the long chronological span from the sixteenth to the eighteenth centuries will allow for comparative assessments in literary form and style, as well as political and social content, across the various periods.

Week 1: The Philosophy of State: Dialectic and Fable Plato, Republic (bks 2, 3 & 5); Critias [Atlantis] Aristotle, Politics, bk 2 Genesis, chs 1-3 [Eden] Ovid, Metamorphoses, bk 1 [the Golden Age] Lucretius, De Rerum Natura, bk 5

Week 2: Utopia and Civic Humanism Leonardi Bruni, Panegyric to the City of Florence (1403-4) Christopher Columbus, The First Voyage (1493) Thomas More, Utopia (1516)

Week 3: Heaven on Earth: Utopia and Theocracy Tommaso Campanella, The City of the Sun (1623) John Milton, Paradise Lost (1667), Books 4, 9-10 John Bunyan, Pilgrim’s Progress (1678)

Week 4: Empire of Knowledge: Science and Utopia Bacon, New Altantis (1627) Samuel Hartlib, Macaria (1641) Margaret Cavendish, The Blazing World (1668)

Week 5: Utopia and Revolution Garrard Winstanley, The Law of Freedom (1652) John Harrington, The Commonwealth of Oceana (1656) John Milton, The Readie and Easie Way to Establish a FreeCommonwealth (1659)

Week 6: Enlightenment and Utopia Bernard de Mandeville, Fable of the Bees (1714) Jonathan Swift, Gullivers Travels (1726) David Hume, Idea of a Perfect Commonwealth (1752)

Preparatory reading Those wishing to take the course should try to read some of the key primary texts, and I recommend the following editions: Plato, Republic and Critias in Plato: Complete Works, ed. John M. Cooper and D. S. Hutchinson (1997); Thomas More, Utopia, ed. and trans., G. M. Logan and R. M. Adams (1989); James Harrington, Oceana, in J. G. A. Pocock, ed., Political Works of James Harrington (1977); Francis

118

Bacon, New Atlantis, in Brian Vickers, ed., Francis Bacon (1996); Margaret Cavendish, The Blazing World, in K. Lilley, ed.,The Blazing World and Other Writings (1994); Jonathan Swift, Gulliver’s Travels, ed, C. R. Rawson and I. Higgins (2005).

Good critical overviews of the topic are provided in: F. E. Manuel & F. P. Manuel, Utopian Thought in the Western World (1979); J. C. Davis, Utopia and the Ideal Society: A Study of English Utopian Writing 1516-1700 (1981); J. Knapp, An Empire Nowhere: England, America, and Literature from 'Utopia’ to 'The Tempest' (1992); R. Applebaum, Literature and Utopian Politics in Seventeenth-Century England (2002); N. Chordas, Forms in Early Modern Utopia: The Ethnography of Perfection (2010).

SENSES OF HUMOUR FROM WORDSWORTH TO ELIOT Dr Matthew Bevis ([email protected]) On meeting Wordsworth for the first time, William Hazlitt noticed something he hadn’t expected to find: ‘a convulsive inclination to laughter about the mouth, a good deal at variance with the solemn, stately expression of the rest of his face’. What might this odd mixture of high spirits and solemnity entail for the study of poetry from Romanticism to Modernism? This C-course option examines how emerging philosophical and cultural discussion about the causes, nature, and aims of humour can enrich our understanding of poetry in the period. We will study how relations between the bardic and the ludic are developed as poets re-work traditional genres and modes (ballad, lyric, and satire) by allowing other tones and styles – varieties of mock-heroic, nursery rhyme and parody – to permeate their writing. We will also explore poets’ responses to popular forms of entertainment (the carnival and the pantomime; cartoons and caricatures; music-hall acts and circus-clowns). Writing one hundred years after Hazlitt, T. S. Eliot observed that ‘from one point of view, the poet aspires to the condition of a music-hall comedian’. This course will attempt to trace how this point of view could have been arrived at, and will consider what poets enjoy – and risk – when they tell a joke, indulge in bathos, talk nonsense, or otherwise intimate that they are speaking with a forked tongue.

NB - 4 things you should read PRIOR to the start of the course:

Course pack — An A to Z of comedy (Aristotle to Zizek) [I will send this out as a PDF] Matthew Bevis, Comedy: A Very Short Introduction (2012) Stuart Tave, The Amiable Humorist (1967) Simon Critchley, On Humour (2002)

Week 1: Playing Around

Primary reading:

William Wordsworth, Lyrical Ballads, with Other Poems (1800) [especially ‘Simon Lee’, ‘We Are Seven’, ‘Anecdote for Fathers’, ‘The Thorn’, ‘The Idiot Boy’, ‘Strange fits of passion I have known’, ‘’Tis said that some have died for love’, ‘Andrew Jones’, ‘The Pet-Lamb, A Pastoral’, ‘A Character’] + Poems in Two Volumes (1807) [especially ‘The Kitten and the Falling Leaves’, ‘Beggars’, ‘Alice Fell’, ‘The Solitary Reaper’, ‘Resolution and Independence’, ‘I wandered lonely as a cloud’, ‘To a Butterfly’, ‘By their floating mill’, ‘Star-gazers’, ‘Power of Music’] + Peter Bell (1818)

119

+ parodies of Wordsworth by J. K. Stephen, James Smith, John Keats, Catherine Fanshawe, James Hogg, J. H. Reynolds, Lord Byron, Walter Savage Landor and Hartley Coleridge (all available in Parodies: An Anthology from Chaucer to Beerbohm and After, ed. Dwight Macdonald (1960), pp.73- 97 [also hunt down Lewis Carroll’s parody of ‘Resolution and Independence’ in Through the Looking-Glass]

Recommended secondary reading:

David Hartley, ‘Of Wit and Humour’ in Observations on Man (1749) Immanuel Kant, section on laughter and humour from Critique of Judgment (1790) Friedrich Schiller, ‘On Naïve and Sentimental Poetry’ (1795-6) Mark Storey, Poetry and Humour from Cowper to Clough (1979) Matthew Bevis, ‘Wordsworth at Play’, Essays in Criticism, 61.1 (January 2011), 54-78, and ‘Wordsworth’s Folly’, The Wordsworth Circle, 43.3 (Summer 2012), 146-51 Mary Jacobus, Tradition and Experiment in Wordsworth’s Lyrical Ballads (1976), chs. 8-10 Jonathan Wordsworth, ‘Wordsworthian Comedy’, in Cordner, Holland, and Kerrigan, eds., English Comedy (1994) Nicola Trott, ‘Wordsworth and the Parodic School of Criticism’, in Steven E. Jones, ed., The Satiric Eye: Forms of Satire in the Romantic Period (2003) John F. Danby, The Simple Wordsworth (1960)

Week 2: The Truth in Masquerade

Primary reading: Lord Byron, Beppo (1818) and The Vision of Judgment (1822) [plus as much of Don Juan (1819-24) as you fancy].

Recommended secondary reading: William Hazlitt, ‘On Wit and Humour’ in Lectures on The English Comic Writers (1819) Mikhail Bakhtin, ‘Carnival Laughter and Ambivalence’, in The Bakhtin Reader, ed. Morris (1994) Stephen E. Jones, Satire and Romanticism (2000) – intro and chapter 6 Kathleen Wheeler, ed., German and Aesthetic Literary Criticism: The Romantic Ironists (1984) Paul West, ed., Byron: A Collection of Critical Essays (1963) Susan Wolfson, ‘The Vision of Judgement and the Visions of Author’, in The Cambridge Companion to Byron, ed. Drummond Bone (2004) W. H. Auden, ‘Notes on the Comic’ and ‘Don Juan’ in The Dyer’s Hand (1962) Lord Byron: Selected Letters and Journals, ed. Leslie Marchand (1982) Michael O’Neill, Romanticism and the Self-Conscious Poem (1997) – chapter on Byron

Week 3: Faith, Faithlessness, Indecision

Primary reading: Emily Dickinson, selections from Poems (wr. 1852-86, pub. 1890-91) [from the Thomas Johnson edition, numbers 33, 36, 41, 45, 59, 61, 74, 89, 124, 137, 164, 165, 216, 231, 301, 338, 353, 410, 413, 467, 501, 561, 620, 724, 774, 1058, 1112, 1214, 1265, 1333, 1461, 1672, 1697, 1715] Arthur Hugh Clough, ‘Duty – that’s to say complying’, ‘Natura naturans’, ‘The Latest Decalogue’, Amours de Voyage, and Dipsychus and The Spirit – all in Clough: Selected Poems, ed. Phelan (1995)

Recommended secondary reading: Ralph Waldo Emerson, ‘The Comic’ (1843) 120

Soren Kierkegaard, selected comments on humour and religion from Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846) [see Thomas C. Oden, ed., The Humor of Kierkegaard: An Anthology (2004)] Suzanne Juhasz, ed., Comic Power in Emily Dickinson (1993) Peter Berger, ‘Toward a Theology of the Comic’, Redeeming Laughter: The Comic Dimension of Human Experience (1997), pp. 187-216 Reinhold Niehbuhr, ‘Humor and Faith’, in Discerning the Signs of the Times (1946) Nancy Walker, ‘Emily Dickinson and the Self: Humor as Identity’, Tulsa Studies in Women’s Literature, 2.1 (Spring 1983), 57-68 Richard B. Sewall, ed., Emily Dickinson: A Collection of Critical Essays (1963), especially essays by Whicher and Blackmur Adam Phillips, ‘The Reception and Conception of Amours de Voyage’, in The Oxford Handbook of Victorian Poetry, ed. Bevis (2013) John Goode, ‘Amours de Voyage: The Aqueous Poem’, in The Major Victorian Poets: Reconsiderations, ed. Armstrong (1969) Christopher Ricks, ‘The Bull & Blasphemy’, in Beckett’s Dying Words (1993), pp. 159-72 Catherine Conybeare, The Laughter of Sarah: Biblical Exegesis, Feminist Theory, and the Concept of Delight (2013)

Week 4: Laughable Lyrics

Primary reading: Edward Lear, Book of Nonsense and More Nonsense (1862), Nonsense Songs and Stories (1871) and Laughable Lyrics (1877) – as many limericks as you fancy, plus ‘The Owl and the Pussy-Cat’, ‘[The Later History of the Owl and the Pussy-cat]’, ‘The Jumblies’, ‘The Daddy Long-legs and the Fly’, ‘Mr and Mrs Spikky Sparrow’, ‘Mr and Mrs Discobbolos’, ‘The Courtship of the Yonghy-Bonghy- Bo’, ‘Cold are the crabs that crawl on yonder hill’, ‘The Pelican Chorus’, ‘The Dong with a Luminous Nose’, ‘Some Incidents in the Life of my Uncle Arly’, ‘How Pleasant to know Mr Lear!’ A.E. Housman, selections from his light verse (wr. 1867-78) – ‘The shades of night were falling fast’, ‘The African Lion’, ‘The Parallelogram, Or, Infant Optimism’, ‘The Crocodile, Or, Public Decency’, ‘Purple William, Or, The Liar’s Doom’, ‘Aunts and Nieces, Or, Time and Space’, ‘The Bear, Or, The Empty Perambulator, Or, The Pathos of Ignorance’, ‘Inhuman Henry, or, Cruelty to Fabulous Animals’ + A Shropshire Lad (1896)

Recommended secondary reading: G. K. Chesterton, ‘A Defense of Nonsense’ in The Defendant (1901) George Orwell, ‘Nonsense Poetry’ in Collected Essays, Journalism and Letters, vol. 4 (1968) Thomas Byrom, Nonsense and Wonder (1977) James Williams and Matthew Bevis, eds., Edward Lear and The Play of Poetry (2016) Hugh Haughton, ed., introduction to The Chatto Book of Nonsense Poetry (1988) + Haughton’s essay on Lear in The Oxford Handbook of Victorian Poetry, ed. Bevis (2013) Edith Sewell, The Field of Nonsense (1952) Susan Stewart, Nonsense: Aspects of Intertextuality in Folklore and Literature (1979) Seth Lerer, Children’s Literature (2008), chapter 9 on Nonsense John Bayley, Housman’s Poems (1992) Christopher Ricks, ed., A. E. Housman: A Collection of Critical Essays (1968) Christopher Ricks, essay on Housman in The Force of Poetry (1995)

121

Week 5: Light Relief

Primary reading: W. S. Gilbert, The Bab Ballads (1862-79) – ‘Ode to My Clothes’, ‘The Monkey in Trouble’, ‘Musings in a Music Hall’, ‘The Pantomime “Super” to his Mask’, ‘The Story of Gentle Archibald’, ‘Only a Dancing Girl’, ‘To My Steed’, ‘General John’, ‘The Folly of Brown’, ‘What is a Burlesque?’, ‘A Drop of Pantomime Water’, ‘Jester James’ Rudyard Kipling, Departmental Ditties (1886), Barrack-Room Ballads and Other Verses (1892) and other poems – ‘The Plea of the Simla Dancers’, ‘I have eaten your bread and salt’, ‘The Conundrum of the Workshops’, ‘The Beasts Are Very Wise’, ‘In The Neolithic Age’, ‘The Hyaenas’, ‘The Craftsman’, ‘Epitaphs of the War’, ‘We and They’, ‘The Song of The Banjo’, ‘When ’Omer Smote ’Is Bloomin’ Lyre’, ‘Epitaphs of The War’, ‘Danny Deever’, ‘Cells’, ‘That Day’, ‘The Vampire’, ‘The Sergeant’s Weddin’’, ‘Road-Song of the Bandar-Log’

+ ‘The Legend of Mirth’ from Complete Poems

Recommended secondary reading: Alexander Bain, ‘The Ludicrous – Causes of Laughter’ in The Emotions and The Will (1859) Sigmund Freud, ‘Humour’ (1927) in The Penguin Freud Reader, ed. Phillips (2006) David Bromwich, ‘Kipling’s Jest’ in A Choice of Inheritance: Self and Community from Edmund Burke to Robert Frost (1989) Peter Howarth, ‘Rudyard Kipling Plays the Empire’, in The Oxford Handbook of Victorian Poetry, ed. Bevis (2013) Carolyn Williams, Gilbert and Sullivan: Gender, Genre, Parody (2010) Peter Keating, Kipling the Poet (1994) J. M. S. Tompkins, ‘Laughter’ in The Art of Rudyard Kipling (1959) R.B. Henkle, Comedy and Culture: 1820-1900 (1980), ch. 5 James Williams, ‘Jokes in the Machine: Comic Verse’, in The Oxford Handbook of Victorian Poetry, ed. Bevis (2013)

Week 6: Serious Fun

Primary reading: T. S. Eliot, ‘Convictions (Curtain Raiser)’, ‘First Caprice in North Cambridge’, ‘Second Caprice in North Cambridge’, ‘Suite Clownesque’, ‘Inside the Gloom’, ‘Humouresque’, ‘Fragments’ – all in Inventions of the March Hare: Poems 1909-1917, ed. Ricks (1996) + ‘The Love Song of J. Alfred Prufrock’, ‘The Boston Evening Transcript’, ‘Mr. Apollinax’, ‘Hysteria’, ‘Conversation Galante’ – all from Prufrock and Other Observations (1917) + ‘Mungojerrie and Rumpelteazer’, ‘Old Deuteronomy’, ‘Macavity: The Mystery Cat’, ‘Gus: The Theatre Cat’, ‘Cat Morgan Introduces Himself’ – all from Old Possum’s Book of Practical Cats (1939) + The Waste Land and Sweeney Agonistes, in Collected Poems (1963)

Recommended secondary reading: Charles Baudelaire, ‘On the Essence of Laughter’ (1855) Henri Bergson, Laughter: An Essay on the Meaning of the Comic (1900) 122

T. S. Eliot, ‘Caricature’ in London Letter, May 1921, ‘The Romantic Englishman, The Comic Spirit, and The Function of Criticism’, both in Lawrence Rainey, ed., The Annotated Waste Land, 2nd edn (2005) T. S. Eliot, ‘Marie Lloyd’, Selected Essays (1950) Matthew Bevis, ‘Eliot Among the Comedians’, Literary Imagination, 16.2 (July 2014), 135-56 Anne Stillman, ‘Sweeney Among the Marionettes’, Essays in Criticism, 59.2 (2009), 116-41 Ronald Schuchard, ‘The Savage Comedian’ and ‘In the Music Halls’, from Eliot’s Dark Angel: Intersections of Life and Art (1999) David Chinitz, T. S. Eliot and The Cultural Divide (2003), ch. 3

Further reading: Some discussions of humour, laughter, and comedy from c. 1750 to c. 1920: David Hartley, Observations on Man (1749), Pt. 1, ch. 4 Francis Hutcheson, Reflections Upon Laughter (1750) James Beattie, ‘On Laughter and Ludicrous Composition’, in Essays (1776) Joseph Priestley, A Course of Lectures on Oratory and Criticism (1777), lecture 24 Immanuel Kant, Critique of Judgement (1790), Bk. 2, sec. 54 Friedrich Schlegel, Critical Fragments (1797) and Athenaeum Fragments (1798) Jean-Paul Richter, School for Aesthetics (1803) August Wilhelm von Schlegel, Lectures on Dramatic Art and Literature (1809), lecture 13 Samuel Taylor Coleridge, ‘On Wit and Humor’ in Coleridge’s Miscellaneous Criticism, ed. Raysor (1936) Arthur Schopenhauer, The World as Will and Idea (1818), Bk. 1, ch. 13 William Hazlitt, ‘On Wit and Humour’, in Lectures on the English Comic Writers (1819) G. W. F. Hegel, Aesthetik (1819), ‘Dramatic Poetry’, sec. 3 and ‘Final Summary’ Thomas Carlyle, ‘Jean Paul Richter’ (1827) in Critical and Miscellaneous Essays, vol 1 Ralph Waldo Emerson, ‘The Comic’ (1843) Soren Kierkegaard, Concluding Unscientific Postscript (1846)

Leigh Hunt, Wit and Humour (1848) Charles Baudelaire, ‘On the Essence of Laughter, and On the Comic in the Plastic Arts’ (1855) George Eliot, ‘German Wit: Heinrich Heine’ (1856 Alexander Bain, The Emotions and The Will (1865), ch. 14 Herbert Spencer, ‘The Physiology of Laughter’ in Essays (1868-74) Charles Darwin, The Expression of the Emotions in Man and Animals (1872), ch. 8 George Meredith, On the Idea of Comedy and the Uses of the Comic Spirit (1877) Friedrich Nietzsche, The Birth of Tragedy (1872), Sec. vii, and Gay Science (1887) Henri Bergson, Laughter (1900) James Sully, An Essay on Laughter (1902) Sigmund Freud, The Joke and Its Relation to the Unconscious (1905) + ‘Humour’ (1927) Francis M. Cornford, The Origin of Attic Comedy (1914) Luigi Pirandello, Humour (1908/1920)

Anthologies of primary material: Paul Lauter, ed., Theories of Comedy (1964) W. K. Wimsatt, ed., The Idea of Comedy (1969) John Morreall, ed., The Philosophy of Laughter and Humour (1987) Wylie Sypher, ed. Comedy (1956) – see also the Appendix Kathleen Wheeler, ed., German and Aesthetic Literary Criticism: The Romantic Ironists (1984) J. Figueroa-Dorrego and C. Larkin-Galinanes, eds., A Source Book of Literary and Philosophical Writings About Humour and Laughter (2009) 123

Thomas C. Oden, ed., The Humor of Kierkegaard: An Anthology (2004)

Introductions and Overviews: Matthew Bevis, Comedy: A Very Short Introduction (2012) D. J. Palmer, ed., Comedy: Developments in Criticism (1984) John Morreall, Comic Relief: A Comprehensive Philosophy of Humor (2009) T. G. A. Nelson, Comedy: An Introduction (1990) Andrew Stott, Comedy (2005) Jimmy Carr and Lucy Greeves, The Naked Jape: Uncovering the Hidden World of Jokes (2006) Maurice Charney, Comedy High and Low: An Introduction to the Experience of Comedy (1978) Howard Jacobson, Seriously Funny: From the Ridiculous to the Sublime (1997) Alexander Welsh, The Humanist Comedy (2014)

Philosophy / Theory / Psychoanalysis: Sigmund Freud, The Joke and Its Relation to the Unconscious, trans. Joyce Crick (Penguin, 2002) Simon Critchley, On Humour (2002) Susan Langer, ‘The Comic Rhythm’ in Feeling and Form (1953) Giorgio Agamben, ‘Comedy’, in The End of The Poem: Studies in Poetics (1999) Christopher Bollas, ‘Cracking Up’ in Cracking Up: The Work of Unconscious Experience (1995) Ted Cohen, Jokes: Philosophical Thoughts on Joking Matters (1999) Adam Phillips, ‘Jokes Apart’, Promises, Promises (2000); ‘On Being Laughed At’, Equals (2002) John Lippit, ‘Humour’, in A Companion to Aesthetics, ed. Cooper (1992) Thomas Nagel, ‘The Absurd’, in Mortal Questions (1991) Mary Douglas, ‘Do Dogs Laugh?’ and ‘Jokes’ from Implicit Meanings: Selected Essays in Anthropology (1999) Noel Carroll, ‘Humour’ in The Oxford Handbook of Aesthetics, ed. Levinson (2003)

Eric Griffiths, ‘Ludwig Wittgenstein and the comedy of errors’, in Cordner, Holland and Kerrigan, eds., English Comedy (1994) Mikkel Borch-Jacobsen, ‘The Laughter of Being’ in Bataille: A Critical Reader (1998) Paulo Virno, Multitude (2008) – Part II, ‘Jokes and Innovative Action’ Sianne Ngai, ‘Stuplimity’ in Ugly Feelings (2004) Theodor Adorno, ‘Is Art Lighthearted?’ in Notes to Literature, vol 2 (1992) Alenka Zupancic, The Odd One In: On Comedy (2008) Agnes Heller, Immortal Comedy: The Comic Phenomenon in Art, Literature, and Life (2005) Peter Berger, Redeeming Laughter: The Comic Dimension of Human Experience (1997) Slavoj Zizek, Zizek’s Jokes (Did you hear the one about Hegel and negation?) (2014) Special edition of The British Journal of Aesthetics, focusing on ‘Comedy and Tragedy’, 54.2 (April 2014) John Limon, ‘Analytic of the Ridiculous: Mike Nichols and Elaine May’, Raritan (Winter 1997), 102- 22

Social and Cultural History: Jan Bremmer and Herman Roodenberg, ed., A Cultural History of Humour from Antiquity to the Present Day (1997) Michael Billig, Laughter and Ridicule: Towards a Social Critique of Humour (2005)

124

Stuart Tave, The Amiable Humorist: A Study in the Comic Theory and Criticism of the Eighteenth and Early Nineteenth Centuries (1967) R.B. Henkle, Comedy and Culture: 1820-1900 (1980) R. B. Martin, The Triumph of Wit: A Study of Victorian Comic Theory (1974) Jennifer A. Wagner-Lawlor, ed. The Victorian Comic Spirit: New Perspectives (2000) Marina Warner, section on ‘Making Mock’ in No Go the Bogeyman: Scaring, Lulling and Making Mock (2000)

Forms, Figures, Tones, Modes: Northrop Frye, ‘The Mythos of Winter: Irony and Satire’, in The Anatomy of Criticism (1957) Robert C. Elliott, The Power of Satire: Magic, Ritual, Art (1960) Dustin Griffin, Satire: A Critical Reintroduction (1994) Michele Hannoosh, Baudelaire and Caricature (1992) Jonathan Culler, ed., On Puns (1988) Simon Dentith, Parody (2000) Michele Hannoosh, Parody and Decadence: Laforgue’s “Moralites Legendaires” (1989) Claire Colebrook, Irony (2003) Sarah Crangle and Peter Nicholls, ed., On Bathos: Literature, Art, Music (2010) D. W. Winnicott, Playing and Reality (1971) Brian Sutton Smith, The Ambiguity of Play (2001) Wayne Booth, A Rhetoric of Irony (1974) [see also William Empson’s review of this book in ‘The Voice of the Underdog’ in Argufying, ed. Haffenden (1987)] W. H. Auden. ‘Notes on the Comic’ in The Dyer’s Hand and other Essays (1962)

Popular Culture: David Mayer, Harlequin in His Element: English Pantomime (1970) Simon Dickie, Cruelty and Laughter: Forgotten Comic Literature and the Unsentimental Eighteenth Century (2014) C. McPhee and N. Orenstein, Infinite Jest: Caricature and Satire from Leonardo to Levine (2011) Barry Faulk, Music Hall and Modernity (2004) Carolyn Williams, Gilbert and Sullivan: Gender, Genre, Parody (2010) Brenda Assael, The Circus and Victorian Society (2005) Ann Featherstone and Jacky Bratton, The Victorian Clown (2006) Dennis Denisoff, Aestheticism and Sexual Parody 1840-1940 (2006) Simon Dickie, Cruelty and Laughter: Forgotten Comic Literature and the Unsentimental Eighteenth Century (2014)

Fools, Folly, Tricksters: William Empson, ‘The Praise of Folly’ & ‘Fool in Lear’, in The Structure of Complex Words (1951) Arthur Koestler, ‘The Jester’ in The Act of Creation (1964) Enid Welsford, The Fool: His Social and Literary History (1961) William Willeford, The Fool and His Scepter (1969) Anton C. Zijderveld, Reality in a Looking-Glass: Rationality through an Analysis of Traditional Folly (1982) Lewis Hyde, Trickster Makes the World: How Disruptive Imagination Creates Culture (1998) Carl Gustav Jung, ‘On the Psychology of the Trickster Figure’, in Four Archetypes (2003) T. G. A Nelson, Comedy (1990), chs. 6-7

125

Laughing and Smiling: Robert Provine, Laughter: A Scientific Investigation (2000) Angus Trumble, A Brief History of The Smile (2004) Helmuth Plessner, Laughing and Crying (1970) Ronald de Sousa, ‘When is it wrong to laugh?’, in The Rationality of Emotion (1987) Bennett and Royle, ‘Laughter’ in An Introduction to Literature, Criticism and Theory (1999) David Appelbaum, ‘Laugh’, in Voice (1990) Norman Holland, Laughing: A Psychology of Humour (1982) V. S. Ramachandran, Phantoms in the Brain (2005), chapter 10 Anna Parvulescu, Laughter: Notes on A Passion (2010) Special issue on ‘Laughter’, Modern Language Notes, vol. 102 (1987) Helen Cixous, ‘The Laugh of the Medusa’ in New French Feminism (1990) Brian Boyd, ‘Laughter and Literature: A Play Theory of Humor’, in Philosophy and Literature, 28 (2004), 1-22 Stephen Halliwell, Greek Laughter: A Study of Cultural Psychology from Homer to Early Christianity (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2008) Mary Beard, Laughter in Ancient Rome: On Joking, Tickling, and Cracking Up (2014) Colin Jones, The Smile Revolution (2014) Max Beerbohm, ‘Laughter’, in And Even Now (1920) Kate McLoughlin, ‘Laughter’, in Authoring War (2011) Donald W. Black, ‘Pathological Laughter: A Review of the Literature’, The Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 170.2 (Feb 1982)

On jokes and joking: Jimmy Carr and Lucy Greeves, The Naked Jape: Uncovering the Hidden World of Jokes (2006) Ted Cohen, Jokes: Philosophical Thoughts on Joking Matters (1999) Jim Holt, Stop Me If You’ve Heard This: A History and Philosophy of Jokes (2008)

Paulo Virno, ‘Jokes and Innovative Action’, in Multitude: Between Innovation and Negation, trans. Isabella Bertoletti, James Cascaito and Andrea Casson (2007) Jennifer Higgie, ed., The Artist’s Joke (2007)

OBJECTS AS SUBJECTS IN EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY LITERATURE Professor Abigail Williams ([email protected]) Dr Giovanna Vitelli ([email protected])

This course will use an object-based approach to consider a range of eighteenth century texts, and the ways in which both objects and texts frame the intellectual, cultural and economic issues of this period. The course will draw on the interdisciplinary expertise of Professor Abigail Williams (eighteenth-century English literature) and Dr Giovanna Vitelli (art history and anthropology). Working with objects, texts and images from the Ashmolean museum, the Museum of the History of Science and from the Bodleian, students will be encouraged to examine the significance of material culture within literary forms, and to look at the ways in which the citation of objects enables us to reconsider the role of space, gender, status, class and consumption within the literature of the period. Following an introductory session on approaches and the use of surviving evidence, the course will be 126

divided into 5 thematic seminars, where the study of text and object will be integrated in the exploration of some key issues: consumerism; virtue; vice; science; the materiality of books. The six sessions will be co-taught in the Ashmolean Museum, the Museum of the History of Science, and in the Weston Library, drawing on relevant collections and handling objects.

Course Programme

Objects in Context. An introduction to ‘thinking through objects’ for the 18c. What can we learn from Yorick’s snuff box ? How might a new attention to things enrich our understanding of the texts in which they are embedded? In this introductory session we will use a passage from Laurence Sterne’s Sentimental Journey to focus a discussion on the potential for alternative interpretations by looking at the deliberate citation of objects in a literary context – in this case, a snuff box. We will look at forms of evidence – diaries, fiction, exhibition catalogues, snuffboxes from the museum collection – and examine the kinds of evaluative and critical assumptions they embody. We will also consider the parallels between canonicity and survival in print and material culture.

Consumerism. This session opens up the broad theme of consumer acquisition and the trade in luxury objects in this period. It will consider the contemporary tensions between consumerism and frugality. We will look at the co-existence in this era of on the one hand, the passion for excess and for ornate luxury objects, and on the other, the aesthetic and moral appeal of restraint. Texts include Pope’s Rape of the Lock and John Pomfret’s The Choice.

Virtue. In this week we will look at the gendering of virtue in text and object. Moving from the culture of virtue centring on domestic crafts such as embroidery, to the dilution of this theme in, for example contemporary teawares, we will consider the notion of exemplarity, and the ways in which social practice and material culture embody narratives of female virtue. How far is fictional virtue patterned on an emblematic typology of virtuous women also evident in contemporary material culture? And how far is material culture shaped by fictional examples? Texts include Richardson’s Pamela and a selection of contemporary conduct literature.

Vice. This week explores the erotic and the illicit in eighteenth century visual imagery and its connections to contemporary concerns about social issues such as prostitution and sexual licence. We will look at narratives of moral decline – and the voyeurism implicit within these – in Fanny Hill and Tom Jones and relate the readings to the works of the artist William Hogarth, a noted satirist, philanthropist and reformer.

Science. This session addresses the popularisation of scientific discovery in non scientific forms – in material culture, and poetry. In doing so it emphasises the importance of the conspicuous display of scientific knowledge, and its reflection in eighteenth century domestic culture. We will trace the creative afterlives of Linnaean and Newtonian theories in polite circles, through personal scientific instruments, domestic ceramics and poetry, and consider the aesthetic appeal of new ways of thinking. Texts include: Thomson’s Seasons; selection from eighteenth-century anthologies and miscellanies.

127

Materiality of the book Tbc. By arrangement with Andrew Honey and the conservation department of the Weston Library. This week will challenge the duality of text vs material culture by looking at the materiality of books, their formats and bindings.

LITERATURES OF EMPIRE AND NATION 1870-1930 Professor Elleke Boehmer ([email protected]) Ranging from R.L Stevenson’s indictment of colonialism’s ‘world-enveloping dishonesty’, to Mulk Raj Anand’s divided responses to Bloomsbury and to Gandhi, this course investigates the literary and cultural perceptions, misapprehensions and evasions that accompanied empire, and through which challenges to empire were understood. We will examine resistance to empire that emerged both from social and textual margins, fractions and interstices, and from the nation as a locus where countervailing identities and solidarities were configured. The course is particularly interested in examining the literary antecedents of what we now call postcolonial writing, and in looking at some of the textual instances upon which colonial discourse theory has been founded. Special focus will be given to the intimations of modernist writing in the authors of empire, and to the disseminations of modernism in ‘national’ writing. Where possible, the conjunctions of empire writing with other, related discourses of the time – travel, New Woman, degeneration, social improvement, Freud, masculinity – will be traced. Each week we will consider one or two of the works of the key writers of empire and nation in the period, and critical and literary writing relating to them.

Course outline

Week 1:Imperial Pastoral: Introductory session on Colonial Discourse

Olive Schreiner, The Story of an African Farm (1883) JM Coetzee, White Writing Laura Chrisman, Rereading the Imperial Romance Anne McClintock, Imperial Leather Edward Said, Culture and Imperialism, chs. 1 and 2 at least

Week 2: The View from the Beach R. L. Stevenson, South Sea Tales, 1891, 1892, especially ‘The Beach of Falesa’ Katherine Mansfield, Collected Short Stories Including: ‘Prelude’, ‘At the Bay’, ‘The Garden Party’ ie. her longer short fiction Paul Carter, The Road to Botany Bay Rod Edmond, Representing the South Pacific Michelle Keown, Pacific Islands Writing Pamila Gupta and Isabel Hofmeyr (eds), Eyes Across the Water

Week 3: Empire’s Certainties and Uncertainties Joseph Conrad, Heart of Darkness (1899) and ‘Youth’ (1898/1902) Chinua Achebe, ‘An Image of Africa’, Norton Anthology 7th edn - Robert Fraser, Victorian Quest Romance Christopher GoGwilt, The Passage of Literature: Genealogies of Modernism in Conrad etc. Benita Parry, Conrad and Imperialism

128

Week 4: Adventure Tales Rudyard Kipling, Kim (1901) Robert Baden-Powell, Scouting for Boys (1908) If you wish: J.M Barrie, Peter Pan (1904) and/or Peter Pan and Wendy (1911) Patrick Brantlinger, Victorian Literature and Postcolonial Studies Joe Bristow, Empire Boys Don Randall, Kipling’s Imperial Boy, ch 5 (‘Ethnography and the hybrid boy’) John Tosh, Manliness and Masculinity in Nineteenth Century Literature Cornelia Sorabji, Selected writing from India Calling - optional

Week 5: Undiscovered Countries; New worlds W.B. Yeats, Responsibilities (1914) E.M. Forster, A Passage to India (1924) Richard Begam and Michael Valdez Moses (eds.) Modernism and Colonialism, chs, by May and Allen Jed Esty, Unseasonable Youth Marjorie Howes, Yeats’s Nations Saikat Majumdar, Prose of the World Angela Smith, A Public of Two

This week and next you are welcome to book 10 minute slots with me to talk about your essay plans.

Week 6:National stirrings Sol T. Plaatje, Mhudi (1930) Mulk Raj Anand, Untouchable (1935) Benedict Anderson, Imagined Communities (1991) Partha Chatterjee, Nationalist Thought and the Colonial World: A Derivative Discourse? Jessica Berman, Modernist Commitments Kristin Bluemel, Intermodernism

Selected further reading: Amar Acheraiou, Rethinking Postcolonialism (Palgrave, 2008) Elleke Boehmer (ed.), Empire Writing (1998) --- Empire, the National and the Postcolonial: Resistance in Interaction (2002) Deepika Bahri, Native Intelligence, 2003 David Huddart, Postcolonial Theory and Autobiography, 2008 Amit Chaudhuri, D.H.Lawrence and ‘Difference’ (2003) Peter Childs, Modernism and the Post-Colonial (Continuum, 2007) Laura Chrisman, Re-reading the Imperial Romance (2000) W. E. B. Du Bois, The Souls of Black Folk (1903/2003) Frantz Fanon, Black Skin, White Masks, trans. Charles Lam Markmann (1986) Declan Kiberd, Inventing Ireland (1995) Henry Louis Gates (ed.), ‘Race’, Writing and Difference (1986) Simon Gikandi, Maps of Englishness (1996) Paul Gilroy, After Empire (2004) Abdul JanMohamed and David Lloyd (eds), The Nature and Context of Minority Discourses, 1990 Gail Ching-Liang Low, White Skins, Black Masks: Representation and Colonialism, 1996 Anne McClintock, Imperial Leather: Race, Gender and Sexuality in the Colonial Contest, 1995 129

Chandra Talpade Mohanty, Social Postmodernism: Beyond Identity Politics, ed. Linda Nicholson, 1995 Ashis Nandy, The Intimate Enemy, 1983 Benita Parry, Postcolonial Studies: A Materialist Critique (2004) Mary Louise Pratt, Imperial Eyes: Travel Writing and Transculturation (1992) Jahan Ramazani, The Hybrid Muse (2001) Sangeeta Ray, En-gendering India (2000) Edward W. Said, Culture and Imperialism (1993) Ella Shohat and Robert Stam, Unthinking Eurocentrism: Multiculturalism and the Media, 1994 Gayatri Spivak, “Three Women’s Texts and a Critique of Imperialism,” Critical Inquiry 12:1 (1985): 243-61 --, In Other Worlds: Essays in Cultural Politics, 1988 --, The Postcolonial Critic: Interviews, Strategies, Dialogues, 1990 John Thieme, Postcolonial Con-Texts: Writing Back to the Canon (2001) Gauri Viswanathan, Masks of Conquest: Literary Study and British Rule in India, 1989 Robert Young, Colonial Desire: Hybridity in Theory, Culture, and Race, 1995

COMPARATIVE CRITICISM Convenors: Prof Matthew Reynolds, Prof Laura Marcus (English); Prof Katrin Kohl, Dr Daniela Omlor (MML); Dr Mohamed-Salah Omri (Oriental Studies); Prof Stephen Harrison (Classics); Dr Laura Tunbridge (Music).

This course will give you a foundation for research that crosses languages and / or media. It is open to students from English, Medieval and Modern Languages, Oriental Studies, Classics and Music, and is team-taught by academics from all those Faculties. To take the course you need to be able to work at MSt level either on literatures in two languages (eg English and Arabic) or on a literature and another discipline (eg French and music). All the core texts for the seminars will either have been written in English or be legible in English translation.

Each seminar will focus on an issue that is central to comparative critical research (see below). The primary texts for each session will be chosen to suit the interests of students taking the course, and there will be ample room for you to present and receive responses to your own work. The course draws methodological stimulus from Oxford Comparative Criticism and Translation (www.occt.ox.ac.uk), a research programme in which several of the convenors collaborate. It is designed to support many styles of translingual and intermedial enquiry: the essay by which you will be examined can be on any such topic so long as some English literature is involved.

During MT there will be optional introductory discussions, open to all graduate students, at which academics engaged in comparative research will explore ideas that matter to them. If you are thinking of taking the Comparative Criticism course, these sessions can serve as a taster.

The course itself takes place in HT. Seminar topics, together with some indicative preparatory reading, are as follows:

1. National Literatures – World Literatures – Comparative Criticism David Damrosch, Natalie Melas & Mbongiseni Buthelezi (eds), The Princeton Sourcebook in Comparative Literature, 2009. 130

Eric Auerbach, ‘Philology and Weltliteratur’, 1952, and Mimesis, 1953. Charles Martindale, Redeeming the Text: Latin Poetry and the Hermeneutics of Reception, 1993. Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Death of a Discipline, 2003, ch. 1: ‘Crossing Borders. Franco Moretti, Conjectures on World Literature’, New Left Review 1, Jan –Feb 2000. Emily Apter, Against World Literature, 2013. Matthew Reynolds, Mohamed-Salah Omri, Ben Morgan & Céline Sabiron (eds), Comparative Criticism: Histories and Methods, special issue of Comparative Critical Studies, 12.2, 2015.

2. Intermediality and Performance Eric Clarke, Nicola Dibben and Stephanie Pitts, Music and Mind in Everyday Life, 2009. James Elkins, On Pictures and the Words that Fail Them, 1998. Mary Ann Frese Witt, Metatheatre and Modernity, 2013. Sarah Bay-Cheng, Chiel Kattenbelt & Andy Lavender (eds), Mapping Intermediality in Performance, 2010.

3. Ancients and Moderns – Canons and their Roles Swift, Jonathan, The Battle of the Books, 1704. Josephe Levine, The Battle of the Books: History and Literature in the Augustan Age, 1991. Jean Robert Armogathe & Anne-Marie Lecoq, La querelle des anciens et des modernes, 2001. Lorna Hardwick, Reception Studies – Greece and Rome, 2003. Friedrich Schiller, Über naïve und sentimentalische Dichtung, 1795-6 (tr. Helen Watanabe O’Kelly as On the Naive and Sentimental in Literature, 1981), Part 1. T. S. Eliot, What is a Classic?, 1945. Abdelfattah Kilito, tr. Michael Cooperson, The Author and his Doubles: Essays on Classical Arabic Culture, 2001.

Liviu Papadima, David Damrosch and Theo D’haen (eds), The Canonical Debate Today: Crossing Disciplinary and Cultural Boundaries, 2011.

4. Genre Marina Warner, From the Beast to the Blonde: On Fairy Tales and their Tellers, 1995. John Kerrigan. Revenge Tragedy: Aeschylus to Armageddon, 1996. M. M. Bakhtin, tr. Michael Holquist & Caryl Emerson, Speech Genres and other late essays, 1986. Alastair Fowler, Kinds of Literature, 1986. Franco Moretti, The Way of the World: The Bildungsroman in European Culture, 1987. Terence Cave, Mignon’s Afterlives: Crossing Cultures from Goethe to the C21st, 2011.

5. Translation, Adaptation, Version Umberto Eco, Mouse or Rat? Translation as Negotiation, 2004. Joseph Weissbort &Astradur Eysteinsson (eds), Translation: Theory and Practice – A Historical Reader, 2006. Joseph F. Graham (ed), Difference in Translation, 1985. Michael J. Meyer, Literature and Musical Adaptation, 2002. 131

Sandra Bermann and Catherine Porter (eds), A Companion to Translation Studies, 2014. Matthew Reynolds, The Poetry of Translation: From Chaucer & Petrarch to Homer & Logue, 2011. Clive Scott, Literary Translation and the Rediscovery of Reading, 2012.

6.Place and Displacement Yi-Fu Tuan, Space and Place, 1977. Hneri Lefebvre, tr.. Donald Nicholson-Smith, The Production of Space, 1991. Franco Moretti, Atlas of the European Novel, 1800-1900, 1998. John Connell, Russell King and Paul White (eds), Writing Across Worlds: Literature and Migration, 1995. Emily Apter, The Translation Zone, 2006, ch. 3: ‘Global Translation.’

LIFE WRITING Professor Dame Hermione Lee ([email protected])

The content of the course: The option examines life-writings (biography, autobiography, memoirs, letters, diaries) over a broad period; texts will be drawn mainly from literary life-writing and from the modern period, but students wishing to discuss examples from earlier periods or of Lives of non-literary figures will be able to do so, and students studying in any period of the Mst may take this option. The course will start with a broad discussion of the history, practices and strategies of the “life-writing” genre, and will look at five different approaches, with examples: family narratives, especially children writing about parents; women’s lives, especially autobiographies; diaries and letters, and how they are made use of in biography, especially in relation to memory and authenticity; the relationship between “life” and “work” in literary biography. All students will give at least one class presentation. Students will be able to write an essay on a topic of their choice which may go outside the selected texts for the seminars. There will be opportunities to discuss the choice of essay topics.

Optional preparatory reading: In the area of biography, it would be advantageous to have read one, or two, large-scale biographies of your own choice. Here are some possible examples of outstanding biographies in a huge field, in no special order: Claire Tomalin’s life of Pepys, Dickens or Hardy, Leon Edel’s one-volume version of his life of Henry James, Richard Ellmann’s life of James Joyce, Jenny Uglow’s life of Elizabeth Gaskell, Hogarth, Bewick, or The Lunar Men or her book on Sarah Losh’s church, The Pinecone, Richard Holmes’s life of Shelley or two-volume life of Coleridge, or his book on Romantic science and literature The Age of Wonder, Roy Foster’s two-volume life of W.B.Yeats, Judith Thurman’s life of Colette, James Simpson’s year in the life of Shakespeare, 1599, Fiona MacCarthy’s life of Burne- Jones, The Last Pre-Raphaelite, Alison Light’s Mrs Woolf & The Servants, Alex Danchev’s Life of Cezanne, Stacy Schiff’s life of Cleopatra, Susie Harries’s life of Pevsner, Lucy Hughes-Hallett’s life of D’Annunzio, The Pike, Lisa Cohen’s group biography of early 20th century women, All We Know, or my life of Virginia Woolf, Edith Wharton or Penelope Fitzgerald (not mandatory!).

I. Selected Reading on Biography: Altick, Richard, Lives and Letters: A History of Literary Biography in England and America, Knopf, 1966 132

Backscheider, Paula, Reflections on Biography, New York, Oxford University Press, 1999 Barnes, Julian, Flaubert’s Parrot, Cape, 1984 Batchelor, John, ed, The Art of Literary Biography, Clarendon Press, 1995 Boswell, James, Boswell’s Life of Johnson, ed. R.W.Chapman, Oxford World’s Classics Byatt, Antonia, Possession, Chatto & Windus, 1990 Clifford, James, Biography as an Art: Selected Criticism, 1590-1960, Oxford University Press, 1962 Cubitt, Geoffrey, and Warren, Allen, Heroic Reputations and Exemplary Lives, Manchester University Press, 2000 Donaldson, Ian, et al, Shaping Lives: Reflections on Biography, Australian National University Press, 1992 Edel, Leon, Writing Lives: Principia Biographia, Norton, 1984 Ellis, David, ed, Imitating Art: Essays in Biography, Pluto Press, 1993 Ellis, David, Literary Lives: biography and the search for understanding, Oxford, OUP, 2000 Empson, William, Using Biography, Chatto & Windus, 1984 Epstein, William H, ed, Contesting the Subject: Essays in the Postmodern Theory and Practice of Biography and Biographical Criticism, Purdue University Press, 1991 Foster, Roy, W.B.Yeats, A Life, Vol I, “The Apprentice Mage: 1865-1914", (especially “Introduction”); Vol 2, “The Arch-Poet, 1915-1939", Oxford University Press, 1997, 2003 France, Peter, and St Clair, William, eds, Mapping Lives: The Uses of Biography, British Academy and Oxford University Press, 2002 Gittings, Robert, The Nature of Biography, Heinemann, 1978 Gould, Warwick, and Staley, Thomas, eds, Writing the Lives of Writers, Macmillan, 1998 Hamilton, Ian, Keepers of the Flame: Literary Estates and the Rise of Biography, Hutchinson, 1992, Pimlico, 1993 Heilbrun, Carolyn, Writing a Woman’s Life, 1988, Ballantyne Books, 1989 Holmes, Richard, Footsteps: Adventures of a Romantic Biographer, Hodder & Stoughton, 1985, Penguin, 1986, Flamingo, 1994; Dr Johnson & Mr Savage, Hodder & Stoughton, 1993; Sidetracks, Hodder & Stoughton, 2000. Holroyd, Michael, Works on Paper: The Craft of Biography and Autobiography, Little, Brown, 2002 Homberger, Eric, and Charmley John, eds, The Troubled Face of Biography, St Martin’s Press, 1988 James, Henry, The Aspern Papers, “The Real Right Thing”, “The Birthplace”, “The Death of the Lion” in The Complete Tales of Henry James, ed Leon Edel, Rupert Hart Davis, 1962-4 Johnson, Samuel, The Rambler, No 60 (On Biography), 13 October 1750; The Idler, No 84, 24 November 1759; The Life of Savage in Lives of the English Poets, Oxford University Press, 197

AMERICAN FICTION SINCE 2000 Dr Rachel Malkin ([email protected]) This course explores the emergent concerns of the American fiction of the last 15 years. As we consider what might be distinctive about recent novels, we will also examine the ways in which they negotiate the past and re-evaluate longer standing discourses. How have events of the 2000s affected literary writing? Is it useful to think about this period in terms of crisis? If contemporary fiction is sometimes haunted by a sense of aftermath, or ‘postness’, where are we now? What are the dominant moods and themes of this writing, and what visions of community and identity do these works present? Finally, what (if anything) do we still hope or expect that the novel can do? While American contexts are important to these books, they also bear on wider discussions of the contemporary, and of fiction’s role.

133

As well as thinking about what these works may or may not share with one another, and with critical projects, we will pay attention to their styles and formal aspects. There is a significant amount of primary reading for this course, so it will be helpful to focus on this in the first instance. Reading lists of theoretical and critical material are also provided. These aren’t exclusive, and students are encouraged to pursue other directions if they prefer. It will be useful to think about your other reading in both American literature and contemporary literature when approaching these texts.

 Reconsidering 9/11

The Submission, Amy Waldman “The Suffering Channel”, David Foster Wallace, collected in Oblivion

 The Good Life?

The Lay of the Land, Richard Ford Freedom, Jonathan Franzen

 American and/or Global Fictions

Open City, Teju Cole The Brief Wondrous Life of Oscar Wao, Junot Díaz

 Precarious Community

Salvage the Bones, Jesmyn Ward (and if possible, Men We Reaped, her non-fiction memoir) The Known World Edward P. Jones

 After the Crash

Union Atlantic, Adam Haslett A Hologram for the King, Dave Eggers

 Fictions of (In)attention

10:04, Ben Lerner Taipei, Tao Lin Further suggestions for primary reading:

Chimamanda Ngozi Adichie, Paul Auster, Octavia Butler, Michael Chabon, Mark Z. Danielewski, Edwidge Danticat, Lydia Davis, Jennifer Egan, Jeffrey Eugenides, Steve Erickson, Joshua Ferris, Jonathan Safran Foer, Moshin Hamid, Siri Hustvedt, Benjamin Kunkel, Chang Rae Lee, Philipp Meyer, Joseph O’Neill, Ruth Ozeki, Richard Powers, Jhumpa Lahiri, Jonathan Lethem, Cormac McCarthy, Jay McInerney, Claire Messud, Lorrie Moore, Bharati Mukherjee, Marilynne Robinson, Philip Roth, George Saunders, Gary Shtyengart, David Foster Wallace, Colson Whitehead, graphic novelists: Alison Bechdel, Hernandez brothers, Art Spielgelman, Chris Ware

134

Examples of 1990s/late 1980s fiction it might be helpful to look at (not an exclusive list):

Raymond Carver Where I’m Calling From, Bret Eason Ellis Less Than Zero, American Psycho, James Ellroy LA Confidential, Louise Erdrich The Bingo Palace, Jonathan Franzen Strong Motion, Don DeLillo Underworld, Amy Hempel Tumble Home, Gish Jen Typical American, Chang Rae Lee Native Speaker, Tim O’Brien The Things They Carried, Chuck Palahniuk Fight Club, Toni Morrison Paradise, Thomas Pynchon Mason & Dixon, Sherman Alexie The Lone Ranger and Tonto Fistfight in Heaven, Rick Moody The Ice Storm, Philip Roth American Pastoral, David Foster Wallace Girl with Curious Hair, Infinite Jest, Karen Tei Yamashita Tropic of Orange, William Vollman Thirteen Stories and Thirteen Epitaphs

(As will be obvious, some writers have published work in both the 1990s and the 2000s!)

Theoretical texts that may be useful for considering contemporary critical contexts:

Sara Ahmad The Promise of Happiness (Duke UP, 2010)

Talal Asad Formations of the Secular: Christianity, Islam, Modernity (Stanford UP, 2003)

Jean Baudrillard , trans. Chris Turner The Spirit of Terrorism (Verso, 2013 ed)

Jane Bennett Vibrant Matter: A Political Ecology of Things (Duke UP, 2010), The Enchantment of Modern Life: Attachments, Crossings, and Ethics (Princeton UP, 2001)

Lauren Berlant Cruel Optimism (Duke UP, 2011)

Wendy Brown Undoing the Demos: Neoliberalism’s Stealth Revolution (Zone Books, 2015)

Judith Butler Frames of War: When is Life Grievable? (Verso, 2009)

Lawrence Buell The Future of Environmental Criticism: Environmental Crisis and Literary Imagination (Blackwell, 2005)

Noam Chomsky Occupy (Penguin, 2012)

Diana Coole and Samantha Frost eds. New Materialisms: Ontology, Agency, and Politics (Duke UP, 2010)

Jonathan Crary 24/7: Late Capitalism and the Ends of Sleep (Verso, 2013)

Colin Dayan The Law is a White Dog: How Legal Rituals Make and Unmake Persons (Princeton UP 2011)

Lee Edelman No Future: Queer Theory and the Death Drive (Duke UP, 2004)

David L. Eng and David Kazanjian eds., afterword Judith Butler Loss: The Politics of Mourning California UP, 2003

Rita Felski New Literary History Special Issue Everyday Life 33.4, Autumn 2002. “Introduction”

David Graeber The Democracy Project: A History, A Crisis, A Movement (Penguin, 2013)

David Harvey A Brief History of Neoliberalism (OUP, 2007 ed) 135

Ben Highmore Everyday Life and Cultural Theory: An Introduction (Routledge, 2002)

Brian Massumi The Politics of Affect (Polity, 2015)

Philip Mirowski Never Let a Serious Crisis Go to Waste: How Neoliberalism Survived the Financial Meltdown (Verso, 2013)

Sianne Ngai Ugly Feelings (Harvard Up, 2005), and Our Aesthetic Categories: Zany, Cute, Interesting (Harvard UP, 2012)

Jacques Rancière trans. Gabriel Rockhill The Politics of Aesthetics: The Distribution of the Sensible (Bloomsbury, 2013 ed)

Charles Taylor A Secular Age (Harvard UP, 2007)

Journals and forums:

Post-45 http://post45.research.yale.edu , C21: Journal of 21st century Writings http://www.gylphi.co.uk/journals/C21Literature/ , American Literature, Contemporary Literature, Critique: Studies in Contemporary Fiction, Modern Fiction Studies. Timothy McSweeney’s Quarterly Concern, Avidly http://avidly.lareviewofbooks.org

Criticism/secondary reading:

African American Review Special Issue Post-Soul Aesthetic: Essays on Contemporary African American Art 41.4, 2007

James Annesley Fictions of Globalization: Consumption, the Market and the Contemporary American Novel (Continuum, 2006)

Antonio Benítez-Rojo, trans. James Maraniss The Repeating Island: the Caribbean and the Postmodern Perspective (Duke UP, 1997 ed)

Kirk Boyle and Dan Mrozowski eds. The Great Recession in Fiction, Film, and Television: Twenty- first Century Bust Culture (Lexington, 2013)

Peter Boxall Twenty-First-Century Fiction: A Critical Introduction (Cambridge UP, 2013)

Bruce Burgett and Glenn Hendler eds. Keywords for American Cultural Studies (New York UP, 2014 ed)

Gerry Canavan and Priscilla Wald eds. American Literature Special Issue Speculative Fictions 83.2, 2011

Cathy Caruth and Jonathan Culler eds. PMLA Special Issue Literary Criticism for the 21st Century 125.4, October 2010

Steven Connor ed. The Cambridge Companion to Postmodernism (Cambridge UP, 2004)

David Cowart Trailing Clouds: Immigrant Fiction in Contemporary America (Cornell UP, 2006)

136

Peter Coviello and Jared Hickman eds. American Literature Special Issue After the Postsecular 86.4, 2014

David Glimp and Russ Castronovo, eds. ELN Special Issue After Critique 51.2, Fall/Winter 2013

Richard Gray After the Fall: American Literature since 9/11 (Wiley-Blackwell, 2011)

Martin Halliwell and Catherine Morley eds. American Thought and Culture in the 21st Century (Edinburgh UP, 2008)

Andrew Hoberek, ed. Twentieth-Century Literature Special Issue After Postmodernism: Form and History in Contemporary Fiction 53.3, 2007

Alex Houen ed. States of War since 9/11: Terrorism, Sovereignty and the War on Terror (Routledge, 2014)

Amy Hungerford Postmodern Belief: American Literature and Religion since 1960 (Princeton UP, 2010)

Gordon Hutner ed. American Literary History Special Issue The Second Book Project 25.1, 2013 (gives a sense of trends in the field of American literary studies over the last 15 years)

Daniel Grausam On Endings: American Postmodern Fiction and the Cold War (U of Virginia P, 2011)

Caren Irr Toward the Geopolitical Novel: US Fiction in the Twenty-First Century (Columbia UP, 2013)

David James and Andrzej Gąsiore eds. Contemporary Literature Special Issue Fiction since 2000: Postmillenial Commitments 53.4, Winter 2012

Fredric Jameson Postmodernism, or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism (Verso, 1991 ed)

Brian Jarvis, Paul Jenner, Andrew Dix eds. The Contemporary American Novel in Context (Continuum 2011)

Adam Kelly American Fiction in Transition: Observer-hero Narrative, the 1990s, and Postmodernism (Bloomsbury, 2013)

Kathy Knapp American Unexceptionalism: The Everyman and the Suburban Novel after 9/11 (U of Iowa P, 2014)

Yoon Sun Lee Modern Minority: Asian American Literature and Everyday Life (OUP, 2013)

Robert McLaughlin “Post-Postmodern Discontent: Contemporary Fiction and the Social World” symploke 12.1-2, 2004

Ken Millard Coming of Age in Contemporary American Fiction (Edinburgh UP, 2007)

Pankaj Mishra “Beyond the Global Novel” Financial Times, 27 September 2013 http://www.ft.com/cms/s/2/6e00ad86-26a2-11e3-9dc0-00144feab7de.html

Modern Fiction Studies Special Issue Fiction after 9/11 57.3, Fall 2011

137

Jeffrey Nealon Post-Postmodernism, or, the Cultural Logic of Just-In-Time Capitalism (Stanford UP, 2012)

Alondra Nelson ed. Social Text Special Issue Afrofuturism 2.71, Summer 2002

James Peacock and Tim Lustig eds. Diseases and Disorders in Contemporary Fiction: The Syndrome Syndrome (Routledge, 2013)

Donald E. Pease and Robyn Wiegman eds. The Futures of American Studies (Duke UP, 2002)

Aimee Pozorski Falling after 9/11: Crisis in American Art and Literature (Bloomsbury, 2014)

Taiye Selasi ‘Bye Bye Babar’ March 2005 The Lip http://thelip.robertsharp.co.uk/?p=76 and Emma Dabiri ‘Why I’m Not an Afropolitan’ Africa is a Country January 2014 http://africasacountry.com/why-im-not-an-afropolitan/

David Shields Reality Hunger: a Manifesto (Hamish Hamilton, 2010)

Zadie Smith “Two Directions for the Novel” in Changing My Mind: Occasional Essays (Penguin, 2009)

Rachel Greenwald Smith Affect and American Literature in the Age of Neoliberalism (Cambridge UP, 2015)

Daniel T. Rodgers Age of Fracture (Belknap Press of Harvard UP, 2011)

David S. Roh, Betsy Huang, and Greta A. Niu eds. Techno-Orientalism: Imagining Asia in Speculative Fiction, History, and Media (Rutgers UP, 2015)

Jordana Rosenberg and Amy Villarejo eds. GLQ: A Journal of Lesbian and Gay Studies Special Issue Queer Studies and the Crises of Capitalism 18.1, 2012

Wacquant, Loïc. “From Slavery to Mass Incarceration: Rethinking the ‘Race Question’ in the US” New Left Review no. 13, January/February 2002

Elizabeth Young and Graham Caveney eds. Shopping in Space: Essays on American 'Blank Generation' Fiction (Grove Press, 1994)

THE HUMANITARIAN NOVEL Dr Ankhi Mukherjee ([email protected]) This course looks at the revived idea of Humanitarianism in English, Anglophone, and World literary studies and raises specific questions about how the novel in particular embraces the discourse of human rights and humanitarianism to address global modernity’s emergences and discontents. In the six weeks of the course we will look at key areas in which contemporary English novels push against the limits of social justice discourse as well as the remit of creative literature to cultivate, through sustained and destabilizing encounters, a physical proximity with the objects of inquiry. In the process, they develop a humanitarian critique that is embodied and kinesthetic, one that confers maximal visibility to and an affective script for vulnerable lives and habitations. Topics will include global war; violence and information technology; urban poverty; environmentalism; gender; censorship. We will read a variety of novels and narrative non-fiction in the context of intellectual and cultural history that helps us understand the relationship between the world novel, humanitarianism, 138

and the ‘human’: Katherine Boo’s Behind the Beautiful Forevers; Salman Rushdie’s Satanic Verses; Mohsin Hamid’s The Reluctant Fundamentalist; Jennifer Egan’s A Visit from the Goon Squad; Indra Sinha’s Animal’s People; Assia Djebar’s A Sister to Scheherazade.

Secondary Reading: Joseph Slaughter, Human Rights, Inc. Bruce Robbins, Perpetual War David Palumbo-Liu, The Deliverance of Others Rob Nixon, Slow Violence and the Environmentalism of the Poor Gavin Jones, American Hungers Ranjana Khanna, Algeria Cuts Gayatri Spivak, A Critique of Postcolonial Reason

SOCIOLINGUISTICS Professor Deborah Cameron ([email protected]) Dr Ros Temple ([email protected]) Sociolinguistics is the subfield of linguistics which seeks to describe and explain patterned variation in linguistic behaviour, and the language-change to which variation can lead. Sociolinguists are particularly interested in the influence of social factors on language-use: among the phenomena they study are the linguistic correlates of major social divisions such as class, ethnicity and gender, the impact of ideologies (e.g. nationalism or notions of ‘correctness’) and social upheavals (e.g. migration and colonization), and the local effects of speakers’ social networks and the subcultural practices through which they express their identities. In this series of seminars we will explore these areas of interest by focusing on a number of key issues in contemporary sociolinguistics. Particular though not exclusive reference will be made to variation and change in English-speaking communities (including those where English is used alongside one or more other languages). Preparation for class meetings is important. The class is based on discussion, not lectures, so we expect participants to have done enough reading and other preparation to be able to contribute. This will be more manageable if you do some reading ahead—also desirable because it will help you to identify possible written assignment topics in good time. Where readings are not ordered alphabetically by author, you are advised to read them in the order they are listed in. Readings marked ‘additional’ are not required, but responsibility for reading and reporting on some of them may be shared among participants. Each of you will be asked to make a short presentation to the class at some point in the term, and in some weeks there will be a practical task which all class members should complete and be prepared to report on briefly. (The details of the task for week 1 are included below; information on other tasks will be supplied later).

Preparatory reading Two texts will be used particularly frequently in this option, so we recommend acquiring them in advance and starting to read the relevant parts of them:

Chambers, J.K., P. Trudgill & N.Schilling-Estes (eds) The Handbook of Language Variation and Change (Blackwell 2002)

Meyerhoff, M. & E. Schleef (eds) The Routledge Sociolinguistics Reader (Routledge 2010).

139

If you have not already done so for the A course, you are also advised to read Milroy, J and L Milroy, Authority in Language (Routledge 2012)

Week 1: Ideologies, norms and standards In this seminar we will consider the way languages are represented and regulated, focusing particularly on the ‘standard language ideology’ which underlies the common-sense view of languages as discrete entities with clear boundaries and fixed rules. In this ideological frame, writing is elevated over speech, dialectal variation is seen as ‘incorrect’, and change is deplored as decline or ‘corruption’. We will consider the social and political consequences of this ideology and look at some of the efforts sociolinguists have made to counter it.

Read the references marked * and at least two of the others *Milroy, J. and L. Milroy, Authority in Language (Routledge Classics in Linguistics, 2012) *Woolard, K. ‘Language ideology as a field of inquiry’, in Language Ideologies: Practice and Theory, ed. B. Schieffelin, K. Woolard and S. Kroskrity (OUP, 1998) Labov, W, ‘The logic of nonstandard English’, in Language in the Inner City (U. Penn Press 1972) Cameron, D. Verbal Hygiene, chs. 1-3 (Routledge Classics in Linguistics, 2012) Chand, V. 2009. [v]at is going on? Local and global ideologies about Indian English. Language in Society, 38(4):393-419 Ferguson, G, Language education policy and the medium of instruction issue in post-colonial Africa, in Meyerhoff and Schleef. Preston, D, Language with an attitude, in Meyerhoff and Schleef.

Additional reading Lippi-Green, R. English with an Accent (Routledge, 2006)

Practical task: find an example in the media (old or new) of ideological discourse on any aspect of English, and be prepared to discuss it with the group in the light of what you have read.

Week 2: Language variation and change (1) understanding sound change in speech communities The great insight of variationist sociolinguistics was that the mechanisms of language change were observable in patterns of structured variability across speech communities. This has been found to be true at different levels of linguistics structure (sounds, syntax, discourse markers, lexicon), but most of the foundational work, and much contemporary work, has focused on sound change. This session examines the social constructs said to structure patterns of variation and how they might explain processes of change.

Read the overview articles in the Handbook of Language Variation and Change, then the suggested chapters from the classic studies by Labov, Trudgill and Milroy

Ash, S. Social class; Chambers, J.K., Patterns of variation including change; Milroy, L., Social networks, all in JK Chambers, P Trudgill & N Schilling-Estes (eds.), Handbook of Language Variation and Change (Blackwell 2002).

Labov, W. The social motivation of a sound change. In Sociolinguistic Patterns. (U of Penn Press, 1972). Also reprinted in Meyerhoff & Schleef

140

Trudgill, P. The Social Differentiation of English in Norwich. (Cambridge University Press 1974). Read Chapters 1 – 3 and 7 Milroy, L. Language and Social Networks. 2nd edn. (Blackwell 1987 (1st edn. 1980)). Read Chapters 1, 4, 5 and 7

Additional reading Labov, W. (2001) Principles of Linguistic Change II. Social Factors. (Blackwell 2001). [NB this can be hard work in places; do not allow yourself to get too bogged down in the detailed statistics] Sankoff, D. & S. Laberge. The linguistic market and the statistical explanation of variability. In D Sankoff (ed.) Linguistic Variation: Models and Methods (Academic Press 1978) Sankoff, G. & H. Blondeau. Language change across the lifespan: /r/ in Montreal French. Language 83, 2007: 560-588, and reprinted in Meyerhoff & Schleef. Trudgill, Norwich revisited, in Meyerhoff & Schleef.

Week 3: Language variation and change (2) dialect contact and ‘supralocal’ change The major variationist studies of urban communities have generally concentrated on the diffusion of change within the community, but it has always been implicit that there is a geographical dimension to at least some of the changes, for example, when incoming features from a prestige, standard variety begin to displace local variants. In recent decades more explicit attention has been paid to the geographical dimension. For example, how and why do sound changes spread across geographical space? Does this happen in a smooth fashion, or do changes leap from one major urban area to another? What happens when speakers of different dialects come together in new, expanded urban communities? Do they all converge on the features of one particular variety or does a new variety emerge?

Read the papers listed below and try to do some of the additional reading if you can

Britain, D. Space and spatial diffusion; Kerswill, P., Koineization and accommodation; both in J. K. Chambers, P. Trudgill & N. Schilling-Estes (eds), Handbook of Language Variation and Change (Blackwell 2002). Kerswill, P. Dialect levelling and geographical diffusion in British English. In D. Britain and J. Cheshire (eds). Social Dialectology. In Honour of Peter Trudgill. (Benjamins 2003). Kerswill, P. & A. Williams Creating a new town koine: children and language change in Milton Keynes. Language in Society 29, 2000: 65-115. Britain, D. Innovation diffusion, ‘Estuary English’ and local dialect differentiation: the survival of Fenland Englishes. Linguistics 43, 2005: 995-1022.

Additional reading Chapters by Britain, Meyerhoff & Niedzielski, Kerswill & Williams, in Meyerhoff & Schleef

Week 4: Acts of identity (1) linguistic styles and socially constructed selves Stylistic variation can be defined in general terms as patterned variation in the speech of one social group or one individual speaking in different situations; but the underlying motivation for this kind of variation has prompted considerable debate among sociolinguists. Does it reflect the amount of attention paid to speech in more and less formal contexts, the influence of the audience for which a speaker designs their speech, or the speaker’s exploitation of linguistic resources to design a distinctive personal or subcultural style?

141

Read the first four references below and at least one of the others *Schilling-Estes, Natalie, Investigating stylistic variation, in JK Chambers, P Trudgill & N Schilling- Estes (eds.), Handbook of Language Variation and Change (Blackwell 2002). *Labov, W. ‘The isolation of contextual styles’, in Sociolinguistic Patterns (U Penn Press, 1972) *Bell, A, Back in style: reworking audience design, in Meyerhoff and Schleef [note: the original formulation of this model is Bell, A. Language style as audience design, in N. Coupland and A. Jaworski (eds) Sociolinguistics: A Reader, 240-50. (St. Martin’s Press, 1997)]. *Eckert, P. Variation and the Indexical Field, Journal of Sociolinguistics 12/4, 2008: 453–476 Ochs, E. Indexing gender, reprinted in Meyerhoff and Schleef. Cameron, D. Styling the worker, Journal of Sociolinguistics 4.3: 323-47, 2000, and repr. in The Discourse Reader, ed. A, Jaworski & N. Coupland (Routledge, 2006). Eckert, P. Vowels and nail-polish, reprinted in Meyerhoff and Schleef Moore, E & R. Podesva, Style, indexicality and the social meaning of tag questions. Language in Society 38 , 2009, 447–85. Podesva, R., Phonation type as a stylistic variable: The use of falsetto in constructing a persona. Journal of Sociolinguistics 11/4, 2007: 478–504.

Additional reading Chapters by Hay et al. and Zhang in Meyerhoff & Schleef Eckert, P. Variation as Social Practice (Blackwell, 2000) Eckert, P. and J. Rickford (eds.) Style and Sociolinguistic Variation (Cambridge UP, 2001) see esp. chapters by Bell, Labov, Biber & Finegan Finegan, Edward and Douglas Biber, Register and social dialect variation: An integrated approach, in Biber and Finegan, eds. 1994. Sociolinguistic Perspectives on Register (OUP 1994). Rickford, J. & F. McNair-Knox, Addressee- and topic-influenced style shift, in Biber, D. and E. Finegan (eds). 1994. Sociolinguistic Perspectives on Register (OUP 1994).

Week 5: Acts of identity (2) drawing on multilingual repertoires Some of the same principles that have been applied to stylistic variation in a single language can also be applied to code-choice and code-switching in communities whose repertoire includes two or more different languages. In this seminar we will examine how this works and how it has been analysed. We will also consider the ideological/political dimension of language-choice and the position of linguistic minorities. (Some of the additional readings below may become required, but the exact list of readings for this seminar will be determined later, since they will depend on which multilingual settings and practices participants are particularly interested in).

Read chapters by Blom and Gumperz, Choi, Heller, Rampton in Meyerhoff & Schleef

Additional reading Chand, V. Elite positionings towards Hindi: Language policies, political stances and language competence in India. Journal of Sociolinguistics, 15(1), 2011: 6-35. Heller, M. Linguistic Minorities and Modernity: A Sociolinguistic Ethnography (Continuum, 2007) Joseph, J. Language and Identity: National, Ethnic, Religious (Edinburgh UP, 2006) Myers-Scotton, C. Social Motivations for Code Switching: Evidence from Africa (OUP, 1995) Rampton, B. Crossing (Longman, 1995)

142

Week 6: The future of diversity: language shift, endangerment & death One of the most important debates in all linguistics today concerns the reduction in global linguistic diversity that results from widespread and rapid language shift/death. In this seminar we look at sociolinguistic accounts of language shift in particular contexts, and also at theoretical debates among sociolinguistics on the significance of language death and the role played in that process by the spread of English as a global language.

Craig, C. Language contact and language degeneration, in F. Coulmas (ed.), The Handbook of Sociolinguistics (Blackwell 1997) Coupland, N. (ed) The Handbook of Language and Globalization (Blackwell, 2010), chs. 1, 4, 5 Duchêne, A. and M. Heller (eds) Discourses of Endangerment (Continuum, 2007), ch.1 and one other case-study chapter of your choice. Kulick, D and C Stroud, Code-switching in Gapun: linguistic and social aspects of language use in a language shifting community, in Meyerhoff & Schleef.

Additional reading Brenzinger, M. (ed). Language Diversity Endangered (Mouton 2007) Dorian, N. Language Death: The Life Cycle of a Scottish Gaelic Dialect (U. Penn Press, 1981) Dorian, N. Investigating Obsolescence (CUP 1989) Gal, S. Language Shift (Academic Press, 1979) Kulick, D. Language Shift and Cultural Reproduction (CUP, 1992) Nettle, D and S. Romaine, Vanishing Voices (OUP, 2000). Wolfram, W and N Schilling-Estes, Moribund dialects and the endangerment canon: the case of the Ocracoke brogue, Language 71(4), 1995.

Practical task: research one endangered language (where is it spoken, by what community, what factors have led to shift over time and what efforts (if any) are being made to document and/or revitalize it?) Be prepared to present your chosen case briefly in class.

THE HISTORY OF WRITTEN ENGLISH: FROM YE TO TEH Professor Simon Horobin ([email protected]) The purpose of this course is to investigate changes in written English, including spelling, punctuation and handwriting, from Old English to the present day. Adopting a chronological approach, we will investigate changing attitudes to written English, and carry out detailed analysis of a variety of texts and text-types. Alongside this, we will discuss a number of key issues: the relationship between spoken and written systems, the emergence of standardised usages, proposals for reform, the impact of new technologies on the English writing system (including recent developments in digital media), and the sociolinguistics of writing.

General Reading: Baron, Naomi, Always On: Language in an Online and Mobile World (Oxford, 2008) Brown, Michelle, The British Library Guide to Writing and Scripts (London: British Library, 1998) Cook, Vivian, The English Writing System (Routledge, 2004) Crystal, David, Spell It Out: The Singular Story of English Spelling (Profile, 2012) Crystal, David, Internet Linguistics: A Student Guide (Routledge, 2011) Crystal, David, Language and the Internet 2nd ed. (Cambridge, 2006)

143

Horobin, Simon, Does Spelling Matter? (Oxford, 2013) Parkes, M.B., Pause and Effect: Introduction to Punctuation in the West (Ashgate, 1992) Roberts, Jane, Guide to Scripts used in English Writings up to 1500 (British Library, 2008) Sampson, Geoffrey, Writing Systems: A Linguistic Introduction (Hutchinson, 1985) Sebba, Mark, Spelling and Society: The culture and politics of orthography around the world (Cambridge, 2007) Robinson, Andrew, Writing and Script: A Very Short Introduction (Oxford, 2009)

Also useful are the volumes published in the journal Writing Systems Research (2009-) and the relevant volumes of the Cambridge History of the English Language (Cambridge, 1992-2001)

Week 1: Orthography: Variation and Standardisation

This class will examine the history of English spelling from Old English to the present day, and changing attitudes towards variation and standardisation.

Deborah Cameron, Verbal Hygiene (Routledge, 2012) chapter 1. Marilyn Corrie, 'Middle English-Dialects and Diversity', in Lynda Mugglestone (ed), The Oxford History of English (Oxford, 2006), pp. 86-119. James Milroy and Lesley Milroy, Authority in Language 4th edition (Routledge, 2012), chapters 1 and 2. Terttu Nevalainen, 'Towards a Standard Language', in An Introduction to Early Modern English (Edinburgh, 2006), pp. 29-44. Ingrid Tieken-Boon van Ostade, 'Spelling systems', in An Introduction to Late Modern English (Edinburgh, 2009), pp. 37-52.

Week 2: Punctuation

In this class we will survey the history of English punctuation in manuscript and print. We will also consider changing uses of punctuation today and attitudes towards correctness.

David Crystal, Making a Point: The Pernickety Story of English Punctuation (Profile, 2015) Vivian Salmon, 'Orthography and Punctuation', in Cambridge History of the English Language III, ed. Roger Lass (Cambridge, 1999), pp. 13-55. Lynn Truss, Eats, Shoots and Leaves: The Zero Tolerance Approach to Punctuation (Profile, 2003)

Week 3: English Scripts

In this class we will investigate developments in English script types from the earliest Anglo-Saxon writing systems to the advent of printing at the end of the fifteenth century. We will study examples to be selected from the following textbooks:

M.B. Parkes, English Cursive Bookhands (Variorum, 2008) Jane Roberts, Guide to Scripts used in English Writings up to 1500 (British Library, 2008)

Week 4: Reform

144

This class will focus on attempts to reform the way English is written, drawing on analysis of selected instances of proposed reforms to be distributed in advance.

Richard Bailey, 'English Improved' in Images of English (Cambridge, 1991), pp. 179-214 Simon Horobin, Does Spelling Matter, chapters 5 and 6. Mark Sebba, Spelling and Society: The culture and politics of orthography around the world (Cambridge, 2007), chapter 6. [See also various essays in J.A. Fishman (ed.) Advances in the Creation and Revision of Writing Systems (Mouton, 1977) and in W. Haas (ed), Alphabets for English (Manchester, 1969)] [Also useful: website of the English Spelling Society and associated articles: http://www.spellingsociety.org]

Week 5: Writing and Technology

In this class we will consider how new technologies are changing the way we write, spell and punctuate.

David Crystal, Internet Linguistics: A Student Guide (Routledge, 2011), chapter 2. David Crystal, Txtng: The gr8 db8 (Oxford, 2008), chapter 3. Simon Horobin, Does Spelling Matter, chapter 8. Crispin Thurlow, ‘Generation Txt: Exposing the sociolinguistics of young people's text-messaging’, Discourse Analysis Online 1:1 (2003) [http://extra.shu.ac.uk/daol/previous/v1_n1.html]

Week 6: Presentations and discussion of research projects.

145